Table of Contents

As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on April 8, 2014

 

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

Form 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

¨ REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

or

 

x ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013

or

 

¨ TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from [                      ] to [                      ]

or

 

¨ SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

For the transition period from [                      ] to [                      ]

Commission file number: 001-35053

 

 

InterXion Holding N.V.

(Exact name of registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

The Netherlands

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

Tupolevlaan 24

1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk

The Netherlands

+31 20 880 7600

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

 

 

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of Each Class

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which Registered

Ordinary shares, with a nominal value of €0.10 each   New York Stock Exchange

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act:

None

(Title of Class)

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report:

68,867,038 ordinary shares

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act:    Yes   x     No   ¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes   ¨     No   x

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes   x     No   ¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically and posted on its corporate Web site, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).    Yes   ¨     No   x

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer. See definition of “accelerated filer and large accelerated filer” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Large accelerated filer   x             Accelerated filer   ¨                 Non-accelerated filer   ¨

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   ¨

    

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued

by the International Accounting Standards Board   x

   Other   ¨

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:    Item 17   ¨     Item 18   ¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act). Yes  ¨  No  x

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.    Yes   ¨     No   ¨

 

 

 


Table of Contents

Introduction

Presentation of Financial Information

Unless otherwise indicated, the financial information in this annual report has been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, or IFRS, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. The significant IFRS accounting policies applied to our financial information in this annual report have been applied consistently.

Financial Information

The financial information included in “Financial Statements” is covered by the auditors’ report included therein. The audit was carried out in accordance with standards issued by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States).

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

In this annual report we refer to our EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. We define EBITDA as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to Operating profit/(loss) and Profit for the year attributable to shareholders, see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and other key performance indicators may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Additional Key Performance Indicators

In addition to EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, our management also uses the following key performance indicators as measures to evaluate our performance:

 

    Equipped Space: the amount of data center space that, on the relevant date, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any significant additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at a data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power capacity and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space (such as corridors) which cannot be sold to individual customers;

 

    Revenue Generating Space is defined as the amount of Equipped Space that is under contract and billed on the relevant date;

 

    Utilization Rate: on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space. Some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate does not reach 100%;

 

    Recurring Revenue Percentage: Recurring Revenue during the relevant period as a percentage of total revenue in the same period. Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded. Monthly Recurring Revenue is the contracted Recurring Revenue over a full month excluding energy usage revenues, amortized set-up fees and the sub-leasing of office space; and

 

    Average Monthly Churn: the average of the Churn Percentage in each month of the relevant period. Churn Percentage in a month is the contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue which came to an end during the month as a percentage of the total contracted Monthly Recurring Revenue at the beginning of the month.

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin, Recurring Revenue and Average Monthly Churn are all non-GAAP measures. Together with the other key performance indicators listed above, they serve as additional indicators of our operating performance and are not required by, or presented in accordance with, IFRS. They are not intended as a replacement for, or alternatives to, measures such as cash flows from operating activities and operating profit as defined and required under IFRS. We believe that EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key performance indicators are measures commonly used by analysts, investors and peers in our industry. We have, therefore, disclosed this information to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key


Table of Contents

performance indicators, as we calculate them, may not be comparable to similarly titled measures reported by other companies. For a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit/(loss), see “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA.” EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA margin and our other key performance indicators listed above may not be indicative of our historical results of operations, nor are they meant to be predictive of future results.

Currency Presentation and Convenience Translations

Unless otherwise indicated, all references in this annual report to “euro” or “€” are to the currency introduced at the start of the third stage of the European Economic and Monetary Union pursuant to the Treaty establishing the European Community, as amended. All references to “dollars,” “$,” “U.S. $” or “U.S. dollars” are to the lawful currency of the United States. We prepare our financial statements in euro.

Solely for convenience, this annual report contains translation of certain euro amounts into U.S. dollars based on the noon buying rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.3779 in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2013. These translation rates should not be construed as representations that the euro amounts have been, could have been or could be converted into U.S. dollars at that or any other rate. See “Exchange Rate Information.”

Metric Convenience Conversion

This annual report contains certain metric measurements and for your convenience, we provide the conversion of metric units into U.S. customary units. The standard conversion relevant for this annual report is approximately 1 meter = 3.281 feet or 1 square meter = 10.764 square feet.

Rounding

Certain financial data in this annual report, including financial, statistical and operating information have been subject to rounding adjustment. Accordingly, in certain instances, the sum of the numbers in a column or a row in tables contained in this annual report may not conform exactly to the total figure given for that column or row. Percentages in tables have been rounded and accordingly may not add up to 100%.

No Incorporation of Website Information

The contents of our website do not form part of this annual report.

Terminology

The terms the “Group”, “we”, “our” and “us” refer to InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries, as the context requires.

MARKET, ECONOMIC AND INDUSTRY DATA

Information regarding markets, market size, market share, market position, growth rates and other industry data pertaining to our business contained in this annual report consists of estimates based on data and reports compiled by professional organizations and analysts, on data from other external sources, and on our knowledge of our sales and markets. In many cases, there is no readily available external information (whether from trade associations, government bodies or other organizations) to validate market-related analyses and estimates, requiring us to rely on internally developed estimates. While we have compiled, extracted and reproduced market or other industry data from external sources which we believe to be reliable, including third parties or industry or general publications, we have not independently verified that data. Similarly, our internal estimates have not been verified by any independent sources.

 

2


Table of Contents

Forward-Looking Statements

This annual report on Form 20-F contains forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 27A of the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and Section 21E of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, with respect to all statements other than statements of historical fact regarding our business, financial condition, results of operations and certain of our plans, objectives, assumptions, projections, expectations or beliefs with respect to these items and statements regarding other future events or prospects. These statements include, without limitation, those concerning: our strategy and our ability to achieve it; expectations regarding sales, profitability and growth; plans for the construction of new data centers; our possible or assumed future results of operations; research and development, capital expenditure and investment plans; adequacy of capital; and financing plans. The words “aim,” “may,” “will,” “expect,” “anticipate,” “believe,” “future,” “continue,” “help,” “estimate,” “plan,” “schedule,” “intend,” “should,” “shall” or the negative or other variations thereof as well as other statements regarding matters that are not historical fact, are or may constitute forward-looking statements.

In addition, this annual report includes forward-looking statements relating to our potential exposure to various types of market risks, such as foreign exchange rate risk, interest rate risks and other risks related to financial assets and liabilities. We have based these forward-looking statements on our management’s current view with respect to future events and financial performance. These views reflect the best judgment of our management but involve a number of risks and uncertainties which could cause actual results to differ materially from those predicted in our forward-looking statements and from past results, performance or achievements. Although we believe that the estimates reflected in the forward-looking statements are reasonable, those estimates may prove to be incorrect. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to events and depend on circumstances that will occur in the future. There are a number of factors that could cause actual results and developments to differ materially from these expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. These factors include, among other things:

 

    operating expenses cannot be easily reduced in the short term;

 

    inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions;

 

    significant competition;

 

    cost and supply of electrical power;

 

    data center industry over-capacity; and

 

    performance under service level agreements.

These risks and others described under “Risk Factors” are not exhaustive. Other sections of this annual report describe additional factors that could adversely affect our business, financial condition or results of operations. We urge you to read the sections of this annual report entitled Item 3 “Key Information–“Risk Factors,” Item 4 “Information on the Company” and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” for a more complete discussion of the factors that could affect our future performance and the industry in which we operate. Additionally, new risk factors can emerge from time to time, and it is not possible for us to predict all such risk factors, nor can we assess the impact of all such risk factors to differ materially from those contained in any forward-looking statements. Given these risks and uncertainties, you should not place undue reliance on forward-looking statements as a prediction of actual results.

All forward-looking statements included in this annual report are based on information available to us on the date of this annual report. We undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise, except as may be required by applicable law. All subsequent written and oral forward-looking statements attributable to us or persons acting on our behalf are expressly qualified in their entirety by the cautionary statements contained throughout this annual report.

 

3


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page  

PART I ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISORS

     5   

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

     6   

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

     7   

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

     27   

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

     36   

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

     37   

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

     57   

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

     64   

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

     67   

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

     68   

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

     69   

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

     85   

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

     86   

PART II ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

     87   

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

     88   

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

     89   

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

     90   

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

     91   

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

     92   

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

     93   

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

     94   

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

     95   

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

     96   

PART III ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     97   

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

     98   

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

     99   

 

4


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1: IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISORS

For the identity of Directors and Senior Management reference is made to “Item 6: Directors, Senior Management and Employees”. Identification of Advisors is not applicable for this Form 20-F.

 

5


Table of Contents

ITEM 2: OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable.

 

6


Table of Contents

ITEM 3: KEY INFORMATION

Selected Historical Consolidated Financial Data

The following selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements, which are included elsewhere in this annual report. The selected financial data as of and for the years ended December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009 have been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements not included in this annual report. Our audited consolidated financial statements included in this annual report have been prepared and presented in accordance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and have been audited by KPMG Accountants N.V., an independent registered public accounting firm.

You should read the selected financial data in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes and Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects” included elsewhere in this annual report. Our historical results do not necessarily indicate our expected results for any future periods.

 

     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2013 (1)     2013     2012     2011     2010     2009  
     (U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares in
thousands)
    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of
shares in thousands)
 

Income statement data

            

Revenue

     423,168        307,111        277,121        244,310        208,379        171,668   

Cost of sales

     (171,054     (124,141     (113,082     (101,766     (91,154     (78,548
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     252,114        182,970        164,039        142,544        117,225        93,120   

Other income

     470        341        463        487        425        746   

Sales and marketing costs

     (31,441     (22,818     (20,100     (17,680     (15,072     (11,253

General and administrative costs

     (124,195     (90,134     (79,243     (67,258     (55,892     (50,628
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     96,948        70,359        65,159        58,093        46,686        31,985   

Net finance expense

     (79,165     (57,453     (17,746     (22,784     (29,444     (6,248
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     17,783        12,906        47,413        35,309        17,242        25,737   

Income tax (expense) / income

     (8,380     (6,082     (15,782     (9,737     (2,560     715   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     9,403        6,824        31,631        25,572        14,682        26,452   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share (2)

     0.14        0.10        0.47        0.40        0.33        0.60   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Diluted earnings per share (2)

     0.14        0.10        0.46        0.39        0.31        0.57   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Number of shares (2) (3)

     68,867        68,867        68,176        66,129        44,354        44,351   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share (2) (4)

     68,584        68,584        67,309        64,176        44,352        43,999   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share (2) (4)

     69,345        69,345        68,262        65,896        47,707        46,792   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

     Year ended December 31,     Year ended December 31,  
     2013 (1)     2013     2012     2011     2010     2009  
     U.S. $’000, except per
share amounts and
number of shares in
thousands)
    (€’000, except per share amounts and number of
shares in thousands)
 

Cash flow statement data

            

Net cash flows from operating activities

     99,985        72,563        89,082        64,043        74,379        51,378   

Net cash flows from investing activities

     (197,565     (143,381     (179,105     (161,011     (100,164     (100,949

Net cash flows from financing activities

     66,017        47,911        15,883        140,330        92,748        19,764   

Capital expenditures including intangibles (5)

     (197,565     (143,381     (178,331     (161,956     (100,394     (101,053

 

7


Table of Contents
     Year ended December 31,      Year ended December 31,  
     2013 (1)      2013      2012      2011      2010      2009  
     (U.S. $’000)      (€’000)  

Balance sheet data

        

Trade and other current assets

     133,247         96,703         74,854         67,874         55,672         55,610   

Cash and cash equivalents (6)

     62,956         45,690         68,692         142,669         99,115         32,003   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current assets

     196,203         142,393         143,546         210,543         154,787         87,613   

Non-current assets

     1,058,754         768,382         675,678         533,738         391,975         320,407   

Total assets

     1,254,957         910,775         819,224         744,281         546,762         408,020   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current liabilities

     193,078         140,125         134,109         133,799         112,375         120,894   

Non-current liabilities

     527,389         382,748         309,541         279,921         279,118         152,749   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total liabilities

     720,467         522,873         443,650         413,720         391,493         273,643   

Shareholders’ equity

     534,490         387,902         375,574         330,561         155,269         134,377   

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

     1,254,957         910,775         819,224         744,281         546,762         408,020   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The “Income statement data,” “Cash flow statement data” and “Balance sheet data” as of and for the year ended December 31, 2013 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2013 for euros into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. $1.3779. See “Exchange Rate Information” for additional information.
(2) “Basic earnings per share”, “Diluted earnings per share” and “Number of shares” have been adjusted to reflect the five-to-one reverse stock split, which occurred in conjunction with our initial public offering in January 2011.
(3) “Number of shares” is in thousands as at the end of the year.
(4) “Weighted average number of shares for Basic earnings per share” and “Weighted average number of shares for Diluted earnings per share” are in thousands.
(5) Capital expenditures including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant & equipment and intangible assets as recorded on our consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.
(6) Cash and cash equivalents includes €4.1 million, €5.0 million, €4.8 million, €4.2 million and €3.9 million as of December 31, 2013, December 31, 2012, December 31, 2011, December 31, 2010 and December 31, 2009, respectively, which is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

Exchange Rate Information

We publish our financial statements in euro. The conversion of euro into U.S. dollars in this annual report is solely for the convenience of readers. The exchange rates of euro into U.S. dollars are based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York. Unless otherwise noted, all translations from euro to U.S. dollars and from U.S. dollars to euro in this annual report were made at a rate of €1.00 to U.S. $ 1.3779, the noon buying rate in effect as of December 31, 2013. We make no representation that any euro or U.S. dollar amounts could have been, or could be, converted into U.S. dollars or euro, as the case may be, at any particular rate, the rates stated below, or at all.

 

8


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth information concerning exchange rates between the euro and the U.S. dollar for the periods indicated.

 

     Low      High  
     (U.S. $ per €1.00)  

Month:

     

September 2013

     1.3120         1.3537   

October 2013

     1.3490         1.3810   

November 2013

     1.3357         1.3606   

December 2013

     1.3552         1.3816   

January 2014

     1.3500         1.3682   

February 2014

     1.3507         1.3806   

March 2014

     1.3731         1.3927   

April 2014 (through April 4, 2014)

     1.3704         1.3804   

 

     Average for
Period (1)
 
     (U.S. $ per
€1.00)
 

Year ended December 31,:

  

2009

     1.3955   

2010

     1.3211   

2011

     1.4002   

2012

     1.2909   

2013

     1.3303   

 

Source: Federal Reserve Bank of New York

Note:

 

(1) Annual averages are calculated from month-end exchange rates by using the average of the exchange rates on the last day of each month during the year.

On April 4, 2014, the noon buying rate was €1.00 to U.S. $1.3704.

 

9


Table of Contents

Risk Factors

In addition to the other information contained in this annual report on Form 20-F, you should carefully consider the following risk factors. If any of the possible events described below occurs, our business, financial condition, results of operations or prospects could be adversely affected. The risks and uncertainties below are those known to us and that we currently believe may materially affect us.

Risks Related to our Business

We cannot easily reduce our operating expenses in the short term, which could have a material adverse effect on our business in the event of a slowdown in demand for our services or a decrease in revenue for any reason.

Our operating expenses primarily consist of personnel, power and property costs. Personnel and property costs cannot be easily reduced in the short term. Therefore, we are unlikely to be able to reduce significantly our expenses in response to a slowdown in demand for our services or any decrease in revenue. The terms of our leases with landlords for facilities that serve as data centers are typically for a minimum period of 10 to 15 years (excluding our extension options) and do not provide us with an early termination right, while our colocation contracts with customers are initially typically for only three to five years. As at December 31, 2013, 42% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Our personnel costs are fixed due to our contracts with our employees having set notice periods and local law limitations in relation to the termination of employment contracts. In respect of our power costs, there is a minimum level of power required to keep our data centers running irrespective of the number of customers using them so our power costs may exceed the amount of revenue derived from power. We could have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers if, among other things:

 

    our existing customers contracts are not renewed and those customers are not replaced by new customers;

 

    internet and telecommunications equipment becomes smaller and more compact in the future;

 

    there is an unexpected slowdown in demand for our services; or

 

    we are unable to terminate or amend our leases when we have underutilized space at a data center.

If we have higher than expected levels of unused space at a data center at any given time, we may be required to operate a data center at a loss for a period of time. If we have higher than expected levels of unused capacity in our data centers and we are unable to reduce our expenses accordingly, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

Our inability to utilize the capacity of newly planned data centers and data center expansions in line with our business plan would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2013 we invested €143.4 million in property, plant and equipment (€140.3 million) and intangible assets (€3.1 million). In the year ended December 31, 2012 we invested €178.3 million in property, plant and equipment (€172.0 million) and intangible assets (€6.3 million). Investments in property, plant and equipment includes expansion, upgrade, maintenance and general administrative IT equipment. Investments in intangible assets include power grid rights and software development.

We expect to continue to invest as we expand our data center footprint and increase our Equipped Space based on demand in our target markets. Our total annual investment in property, plant and equipment includes maintenance and replacement capital expenditures. Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that such expenses will be between 3% and 5% of total revenue in the long term. We hold title to the AMS3, AMS6, CPH2, FRA8, PAR3 and PAR5 properties, and we have exercised the option to purchase the freehold land in Paris on which we own the PAR7 data center. Until we complete the acquisition of the freehold land with respect to PAR7, the freehold land will be reported as a financial lease. We also lease space for data centers and typically begin construction before entering into contractual agreements with customers to utilize the capacity of our data centers under construction. In some cases, we enter into lease agreements for data centers or begin expansions at our existing data centers without any pre-existing customer commitments to use the additional space that will be created. If we open a new data center or complete an expansion at an existing data center, we will be required to pay substantial up-front and ongoing costs associated with that data center, including leasehold improvements, basic overhead costs and rental payments regardless of whether or not we have any agreements with customers to fill the space.

 

10


Table of Contents

As a result of our expansion plans, we will incur capital expenditures, and as a result, an increase in other operating expenses, which will negatively impact our cash flow, and depreciation that together will negatively impact our profitability unless and until these new and expanded data centers generate enough revenue to exceed their operating costs and related capital expenditures.

There can be no guarantee that we will be able to sustain or increase our profitability if our planned expansion is not successful or if there is not sufficient customer demand in the future to realize expected returns on these investments. Any such development would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

If we are unable to expand our existing data centers or locate and secure suitable sites for additional data centers on commercially acceptable terms our ability to grow our business may be limited.

Our ability to meet the growing needs of our existing customers and to attract new customers depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading. We have reached high utilization levels at some of our data centers and therefore any increase in these locations would need to be accomplished through the lease of additional property that satisfies our requirements. Property meeting our specifications may be scarce in our target markets. If we are unable to identify and enter into leases on commercially acceptable terms on a timely basis for any reason including due to competition from other companies seeking similar sites who may have greater financial resources than us, or are unable to expand our space in our current data centers, our rate of growth may be substantially impaired.

Our capital expenditures, together with ongoing operating expenses and obligations to service our debt, will be a drain on our cash flow and may decrease our cash balances. The capital markets in the recent past have been and may again become limited for external financing opportunities. Additional debt or equity financing, especially in the current credit-constrained climate, may not be available when needed or, if available, may not be available on satisfactory terms. Our inability to obtain needed debt and/or equity financing or to generate sufficient cash from operations may require us to prioritize projects or curtail capital expenditures which could adversely affect our results of operations.

Failure to renew or maintain real estate leases for our existing data centers on commercially acceptable terms, or at all, could harm our business.

We hold title to the AMS3, AMS6, CPH2, FRA8, PAR3 and PAR5 properties, and we have exercised the option to purchase the freehold land in Paris on which we own the PAR7 data center. Until we complete the acquisition of the freehold land with respect to PAR7, the freehold land will be reported as a financial lease. For the leased properties, on which our data centers are located, we generally enter into leases for initial minimum periods of 10 to 15 years (excluding renewal options). Including renewal options, the lease properties are generally secured for terms of 20 to 25 years. The majority of our leases are subject to an annual inflation-linked increase in rent and, on renewal (or earlier in some cases), the rent we pay may be reset to the current market rate. There is, therefore, a risk that there will be significant rent increases when the rent is reviewed. Our leases in France, Ireland, Belgium and the United Kingdom do not contain contractual options to renew or extend those leases, and we have exhausted or may in the future exhaust such options in other leases. With respect to our operating leases in France, certain landlords may terminate our operating leases following the expiration of the original lease period (being 12 years from the commencement date), and the other leases in France may be terminated by the landlords at the end of each three year period upon giving six months prior notice in the event the landlord wishes to carry out construction works to the building. The non-renewal of leases for our existing data center locations, or the renewal of such leases on less favorable terms, is a potentially significant risk to our ongoing operations. We would incur significant costs if we were forced to vacate one of our data centers due to the high costs of relocating our own and our customers’ equipment, installing the necessary infrastructure in a new data center and, as required by most of our leases, reinstating the vacated data center to its original state. In addition, if we were forced to vacate a data center, we could lose customers that chose our services based on location. If we fail to renew any of our leases, or the renewal of any of our leases is on less favorable terms and we fail to increase revenues sufficiently to offset the higher rental costs, this could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our leases may obligate us to make payments beyond our use of the property.

Our leases generally do not give us the right to terminate without penalty. Accordingly, we may incur costs under leases of data center space that is not or no longer is Revenue Generating Space. Some of our leases do not give us the right to sublet, and even if we have that right we may not be able to sublet the space on favorable terms or at all. We have incurred moderate costs in relation to such onerous lease contracts in recent years.

 

11


Table of Contents

We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses when fitting out and upgrading data centers, and the costs could be greater than anticipated.

As we attempt to grow our business, substantial management effort and financial resources are employed by us in fitting out new, and upgrading existing, data centers. In addition, we periodically upgrade and replace certain equipment at our data centers. We may experience unforeseen delays and expenses in connection with a particular client project or data center build-out. In addition, unexpected technological changes could affect customer requirements and we may not have built such requirements into our data centers and may not have budgeted for the financial resources necessary to build out or redesign the space to meet such new requirements. Furthermore, the redesign of existing space is difficult to implement in practice as it normally requires moving existing customers. Although we have budgeted for expected build-out and equipment expenses, additional expenses in the event of unforeseen delays, cost overruns, unanticipated expenses, regulatory changes, unexpected technological changes and increases in the price of equipment may negatively affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

No assurance can be given that we will complete the build-out of new data centers or expansions of existing data centers within the proposed timeframe and cost parameters or at all. Any such failure could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier and cloud -neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers, including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Further, the growth of the European data center market has encouraged new, larger companies to consider entering the market, in particular those from the United States who are active in this sector. This growth and other factors have also led to increasing alliances and consolidation. Many of these companies may have significantly greater financial, marketing and other resources than we do. Some of our competitors may be willing to, and due to greater financial resources, may be better able to adopt aggressive pricing policies, including the provision of discounted data center services as an encouragement for customers to utilize their other services. Certain of our competitors may also provide our target customers with additional benefits, including bundled communications services, and may do so in a manner that is more attractive to potential customers than obtaining space in our data centers.

While not currently a direct competitive threat to us, wholesale providers of data center space might change their business plan to compete with us directly or open new data centers, thus making large amounts of capacity available at a single point in time and facilitating the entry into the market or expansion of our direct competitors. Wholesale providers of data center space may compete with us for the acquisition of new sites, thereby increasing the average rental prices for suitable sites.

In addition, corporations that have already invested substantial resources in in-house data center operations may be reluctant to outsource these services to a third party, or may choose to acquire space within a wholesale provider’s data center, which would allow them to manage the equipment themselves. If existing customers were to conclude that they could provide the same service in-house at a lower cost, with greater reliability, with increased security or for other reasons, they might move such services in-house and we would lose customers and business.

We may also see increased competition for data center space and customers from wholesale data center providers, such as large real estate companies. Rather than leasing available space to large single tenants, real estate companies, including certain of our landlords, may decide to convert the space instead to smaller square meter units designed for multitenant colocation use. In addition to the risk of losing customers to wholesale data center providers, this could also reduce the amount of space available to us for expansion in the future. As a result of such competition, we could suffer from downward pricing pressure and the loss of customers (and potential customers), which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

 

12


Table of Contents

Our services may have a long sales cycle that may materially adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A customer’s decision to take space in one of our data centers typically involves a significant commitment of resources by us and by potential customers, who often require internal approvals. In addition, some customers will be reluctant to commit to locating in our data centers until they are confident that the data center has adequate available carrier connections and network density. As a result, we may have a long sales cycle lasting anywhere from three months for smaller customers to periods in excess of one year for some of our larger customers. Furthermore, we may expend significant time and resources in pursuing a particular sale or customer that does not result in revenue.

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may further impact this long sales cycle by making it extremely difficult for customers to accurately forecast and plan future business activities. This could cause customers to slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which would delay and lengthen our sales cycle.

Delays due to the length of our sales cycle may have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our business is dependent on the adequate supply of electrical power and could be harmed by prolonged electrical power outages or increases in the cost of power.

The operation of each of our data centers requires an extremely large amount of power and we are among the largest power consumers in certain cities in which we operate data centers. We cannot be certain that there will be adequate power in all of the locations in which we operate, or intend to open additional data centers. We attempt to limit exposure to system downtime caused by power outages by using back-up generators and uninterrupted power supply systems; however, we may not be able to limit our exposure entirely even with these protections in place. We also cannot guarantee that the generators will always provide sufficient power or restore power in time to avoid loss of or damage to our customers’ and our equipment. Any loss of services or damage to equipment resulting from a temporary loss of or reduction in power at any of our data centers could harm our customers, reduce customers’ confidence in our services, impair our ability to attract new customers and retain existing customers, and result in us incurring financial obligations to our customers as they might be eligible for service credits pursuant to their service level agreements with us. Our customers may also seek damages from us.

In addition, we are susceptible to fluctuations in power costs in all of the locations in which we operate. Clients have two options with respect to power usage. They can either (i) pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. While we are contractually able to recover power cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered or recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons and as a result, may have a negative impact on our results of operations.

Although we have not experienced any power outages that have had a material impact on our financial condition in the past, power outages or increases in the cost of power to us could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

A general lack of electrical power resources sufficient to meet our customers’ demands may impair our ability to utilize fully the available space at our existing data centers or our plans to open new data centers.

In each of our markets, we rely on third parties to provide a sufficient amount of power for current and future customers. Power and cooling requirements are generally growing on a per customer basis. Some of our customers are increasing and may continue to increase their use of high-density electrical power equipment, such as blade servers, which can significantly increase the demand for power per customer and cooling requirements for our data centers. Future demand for electrical power and cooling may exceed the designed electrical power and cooling infrastructure in our data centers. As the electrical power infrastructure is typically one of the most important limiting factors in our data centers, our ability to utilize available space fully may be limited. This, as well as any inability to secure sufficient power resources from third-party providers, could have a negative impact on the effective available capacity of a given data center and limit our ability to grow our business.

The ability to increase the power capacity or power infrastructure of a data center, should we decide to, is dependent on several factors including, but not limited to, the local utility’s ability and willingness to provide additional power, the length of time required to provide that power and/or whether it is feasible to upgrade the electrical infrastructure and cooling systems of a data center to deliver additional power to customers.

The availability of sufficient power may also pose a risk to the successful development of future data centers. In cities where we intend to open new data centers, we may face delays in obtaining sufficient power to operate our data centers. Our ability to

 

13


Table of Contents

secure adequate power sources will depend on several factors, including whether the local power supply is at or close to its limit, whether new connections for our data center would require the local power company to install a new substation or feeder and whether new connections for our data center would increase the overall risks of blackouts or power outages in a given geographic area.

If we are unable to utilize fully the physical space available within our data centers or successfully develop additional data centers or expand existing data centers due to restrictions on available electrical power or cooling, we may be unable to accept new customers or increase the services provided to existing customers, which may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

A significant percentage of our Monthly Recurring Revenue is generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. If those contracts are not renewed, or if their pricing terms are negotiated downwards, our business, financial condition and results of operations would be materially adversely affected.

The majority of our initial customer contracts are entered into on a fixed term basis for periods from three to five years, which, unless terminated in advance, are automatically renewed for subsequent one-year periods. Please see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Customer Contracts.” As at December 31, 2013, 42% of our Monthly Recurring Revenue was generated by contracts with terms of one year or less remaining. Consequently, a large part of our customer base could either terminate their contracts with us at relatively short notice, or seek to re-negotiate the pricing of such contracts downwards, which, if either were to occur, would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our inability to use all or part of our net deferred tax assets could cause us to pay taxes at an earlier date and in greater amounts than expected.

As at December 31, 2013, we had €30.3 million of recognized net deferred tax assets and €1.4 million of unrecognized net deferred tax assets. We cannot assure you that we will generate sufficient profit in the relevant jurisdictions to utilize these deferred tax assets fully or that the tax loss availability will not expire before we have been able to fully utilize them. In addition, applicable law could change in one or more jurisdictions in which we have deferred tax assets, rendering such assets unusable. Either such event would cause us to pay taxes in greater amounts than would otherwise occur, which may have a material adverse effect on our results of operations.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may fluctuate in the future, which may make it difficult to evaluate our business and prospects.

Our operating results have fluctuated in the past and may continue to fluctuate in the future, due to a variety of factors, which include:

 

    demand for our services;

 

    competition from other data center operators;

 

    the cost and availability of power;

 

    the introduction of new services by us and/or our competitors;

 

    data center expansion by us and/or our competitors;

 

    changes in our pricing policies and those of our competitors;

 

    a change in our customer retention rates;

 

    economic conditions affecting the Internet, telecommunications and e-commerce industries; and

 

    changes in general economic conditions.

Any of the foregoing factors, or other factors discussed elsewhere in this annual report, could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition. Although we have experienced growth in revenues during the past three financial years, this growth rate is not necessarily indicative of future operating results. In addition, a relatively large portion of our expenses cannot be reduced in the short-term, particularly personnel and property costs and part of our power costs, which means that our results of operations are particularly sensitive to fluctuations in revenues. As such, comparisons to prior reporting periods should not be relied upon as indications of our future performance. In addition, our operating results in one or more future periods may fail to meet the expectations of securities analysts or investors. If this happens, the market price of our ordinary shares may decline significantly.

 

14


Table of Contents

We are dependent on third-party suppliers for equipment, technology and other services.

We contract with third parties for the supply of equipment (including generators, UPS systems and cabinet equipment) on which we are dependent to operate our business. Poor performance by, or any inability of, our suppliers to provide necessary equipment, products, services and maintenance could have a negative effect on our reputation and harm our business.

We depend on the ongoing service of our personnel and senior management team and may not be able to attract, train and retain a sufficient number of qualified personnel to maintain and grow our business.

Our success depends upon our ability to attract, retain and motivate highly-skilled employees, including the data center personnel who are integral to the establishment and running of our data centers, as well as sales and marketing personnel who play a large role in attracting and retaining customers. Due to several factors, including the rapid growth of the Internet, there is aggressive competition for experienced data center employees. We compete intensely with other companies to recruit and hire from this limited pool. In addition, the training of new employees requires a large amount of our time and resources. If we cannot attract, train and retain qualified personnel, we may be unable to expand our business in line with our strategy, compete for new customers or retain existing customers, which could cause our business, financial condition and results of operations to suffer.

Our future performance also depends to a significant degree upon the continued contributions of our senior management team. The loss of any member of our senior management team could significantly harm us. To the extent that the services of members of our senior management team would be unavailable to us for any reason, we would be required to hire other personnel to manage and operate our Company. There can be no assurance that we would be able to locate or employ such personnel on acceptable terms or on a timely basis.

Our failure to maintain competitive compensation packages, including equity incentives, may be disruptive to our business. If one or more of our key personnel resigns from our Company to join or form a competitor, the loss of such personnel and any resulting loss of existing or potential customers to any such competitor could harm our business, financial condition and results of operations. In addition, we may be unable to prevent the unauthorized disclosure or use of our technical knowledge, practices or procedures by departed personnel.

Disruptions to our physical infrastructure could lead to significant costs, reduce our revenues and harm our business reputation and financial results.

Our business depends on providing customers with highly reliable and secure services. A number of factors may disrupt our ability to provide services to our customers, including:

 

    human error;

 

    power loss;

 

    physical or electronic security breaches;

 

    terrorist acts;

 

    interruptions to the fiber network;

 

    hardware and software defects;

 

    fire, earthquake, flood and other natural disasters;

 

    improper maintenance by our landlords; and

 

    sabotage and vandalism.

Disruptions at one or more of our data centers, whether or not within our control, could result in service interruptions or significant equipment damage, leading to significant costs and revenue reductions. Please see “—Risks Related to our Industry—Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.”

Our insurance may not be adequate to cover all losses.

The insurance we maintain covers material damage to property, business interruption and third-party liability. This insurance contains limitations on the total coverage for damage due to catastrophic events, such as flooding or terrorism. In addition, there is an overall cap on our general insurance coverage per data center in any one year. There is, therefore, a risk that if one or more data centers were damaged, the total amount of the loss would not be recoverable by us.

 

15


Table of Contents

Also, our insurance policies include customary exclusions, deductibles and other conditions that could limit our ability to recover losses. In addition, some of our policies are subject to limitations involving co-payments and policy limits that may not be sufficient to cover losses. If we experience a loss that is uninsured or that exceeds policy limits, or if customers consider that there is a significant risk that such an event will occur, this may negatively affect our reputation, business, financial condition and results of operations.

Our failure to meet the performance standards under our service level agreements may subject us to liability to our customers, which could have a material adverse effect on our reputation, business, financial condition or results of operations.

We have service level agreements with substantially all of our customers in which we provide various guarantees regarding our level of service. Our inability to provide services consistent with these guarantees may lead to large losses for our customers, who consequently may be entitled to service credits for their accounts or to terminate their relationship with us. We have issued service credits to customers in the past due to our failure to meet service level commitments and we may do so in the future. We cannot be sure that our customers will accept these service credits as compensation in the future. Our failure or inability to meet a customer’s expectations or any deficiency in the services we provide to customers could result in a claim against us for substantial damages. Provisions contained in our agreements with customers attempting to limit damages, including provisions to limit liability for damages, may not be enforceable in all instances or may otherwise fail to protect us for liability damages.

We could be subject to costs, as well as claims, litigation or other potential liability, in connection with risks associated with the security of our data centers.

One of our key service offerings is our high level of physical premises security. Many of our customers entrust their key strategic IT services and applications to us due, in part, to the level of security we offer. If anyone is able to breach our security, they could physically damage our and our customers’ equipment and/or misappropriate either our proprietary information or the information of our customers or cause interruptions or malfunctions in our operations.

There can be no assurance that the security of any of our data centers will not be breached or the equipment and information of our customers put at risk. Any security breach could have a serious effect on our reputation and could prevent new customers from choosing our services and lead to customers terminating their contracts early and seeking to recover losses suffered, which could have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations. We may incur significant additional costs to protect against physical premises security breaches or to alleviate problems caused by such breaches.

We face risks relating to foreign currency exchange rate fluctuations.

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. We also, however, earn revenues and incur operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish kroner, Swedish kroner and US dollars. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

The slowdown in global economies and their delayed recovery may have an impact on our business and financial condition in ways that we cannot currently predict.

The European debt crisis and slowdown and delayed recovery in the global financial markets could continue to have an adverse effect on our business and our financial condition. If the market conditions continue to remain weak or uncertain, some of our customers may have difficulty paying us and we may experience increased churn in our customer base. Our sales cycle could also lengthen as customers slow spending, or delay decision-making, on our services, which could adversely affect our revenue growth. Finally, we could also experience pricing pressure as a result of economic conditions if our competitors lower prices and attempt to lure away our customers.

Additionally, our ability to access the capital markets may be severely restricted at a time when we would like, or need, to do so, which could have an impact on our ability to pursue additional expansion opportunities and maintain our desired level of revenue growth in the future.

 

16


Table of Contents

Acquisitions, business combinations and other transactions present many risks, and we may not realize the financial or strategic goals that were contemplated at the time of any transaction and such transactions may alter our financial or strategic goals.

We have evaluated, and expect to continue to evaluate, potential strategic combinations and acquisitions and other transactions. We may enter into transactions like these at any time, or discussions concerning such transactions, which may include combinations with other companies or businesses, acquisitions of us by third parties, including potential strategic and financial acquirers and acquisitions by us of businesses, products, services or technologies that we believe to be complementary. These potential transactions expose us to several potential risks, including:

 

    the possible disruption of our ongoing business and diversion of management’s attention by acquisition, transition and integration activities and/or entering into discussions that do not result in a transaction;

 

    our potential inability to successfully pursue or realize some or all of the anticipated revenue opportunities associated with an acquisition or investment;

 

    the possibility that we may not be able to successfully integrate acquired businesses, or businesses in which we invest, or achieve anticipated operating efficiencies or cost savings;

 

    the possibility that announced acquisitions or business combinations may not be completed, due to failure to satisfy the conditions to closing or for other reasons;

 

    the dilution of our existing stockholders as a result of any such transaction that involves the issuance of stock;

 

    the possibility of customer dissatisfaction if we are unable to achieve levels of quality and stability on par with past practices or with respect to any business combination with a new party;

 

    the possibility that additional capital expenditures may be required or that transaction expenses associated with acquisitions may be higher than anticipated;

 

    the possibility that required financing to fund the requirements of a transaction may not be available on acceptable terms or at all;

 

    the possibility governmental approvals under antitrust and competition laws required to complete a transaction may not be obtained on a timely basis or at all, which could, among other things, delay or prevent the completion of a transaction, or limit the ability to realize the expected financial or strategic benefits of a transaction or have other adverse effects on our current business and operations;

 

    the possibility of loss or reduction in value of acquired businesses;

 

    the possibility that carriers may find it cost-prohibitive or impractical to bring fiber and networks into a new data center;

 

    the possibility of litigation or other claims in connection with or as a result of a transaction including claims from terminated employees, customers, former or current stockholders or other third parties;

 

    the possibility of pre-existing undisclosed liabilities, including but not limited to lease or landlord related liability, environmental or asbestos liability, for which insurance coverage may be insufficient or unavailable; and

 

    the possibility there will not be sufficient customer demand to realize expected returns on these transactions.

We may pay for future acquisitions by using our existing cash resources (which may limit other potential uses of our cash), incurring additional debt (which may increase our interest expense, leverage and debt service requirements) and/or issuing shares (which may dilute our existing stockholders and have a negative effect on our earnings per share). The occurrence of any of these risks could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations, financial condition or cash flows.

We focus on the development of communities of interest within customer segments and the attraction of magnetic customers. Our failure to attract, grow and retain these communities of interest could harm our business and operating results.

Our ability to maximize revenue growth depends on our ability to develop and grow communities of interest within our target customer segments such as network providers, cloud and managed service providers, financial services, enterprises and digital media and distribution. Within each community, there are certain customers, which we consider to be magnetic customers as we believe they make it attractive to other customers to be in our data centers. Our ability to attract magnetic customers to our data centers will depend on a variety of factors, including the presence of multiple carriers, the mix of our offerings, the overall

 

17


Table of Contents

mix of customers, the presence of other magnetic customers, the data center’s operating reliability and security and our ability to effectively market our offerings. We may not be able to attract magnetic customers and thus be unsuccessful in the development of our communities of interest. This may hinder the development, growth and retention of customer communities of interest and adversely affect our business, financial condition and results of operations.

Consolidation may have a negative impact on our business model.

If customers combine businesses, they may require less colocation space, which could lead to churn in our customer base. Competitors in some of our markets may also consolidate, which can make it more difficult for us to compete. Consolidation of our customers and/or our competitors may present a risk to our business model and have a negative impact on our revenues.

Our operations are highly dependent on the proper functioning of our information technology systems. We are in the process of upgrading our information technology systems. The failure or unavailability of such systems during or after the upgrade process could result in the loss of existing or potential customers and harm our reputation, business and operating results.

We rely heavily on our information technology and back office systems to conduct our business, including for purposes of providing customer fee quotes and maintaining accurate customer service and billings records. Commencing in 2012, we began a significant project to overhaul our back office systems that support the customer experience, from initial quote to customer billing, including those used to generate and provide fee quotes to existing and potential customers. As a continuation of this upgrade project, in 2013, we began to devote significant resources to upgrade our financial and client contract billing system. The upgrade of our back office systems is ongoing and we expect the upgrade process to continue through 2014.

Difficulties with our systems may interrupt our ability to accept and deliver customer orders and impact our overall financial operations, including our accounts payable, accounts receivables, general ledger, close processes, internal financial controls, and our ability to otherwise run and track our business. We may need to expend significant attention, time and resources to correct problems or find alternative sources for performing these functions. As a result of any significant investments in ongoing upgrades or any future upgrades or modifications, we may be unable to devote adequate financial and other resources to remedy any such delay or technical difficulty in an efficient manner.

Any disruption to our information technology and back office systems, whether caused by upgrade projects or otherwise, may adversely affect our business and operating results.

Substantial indebtedness could adversely affect our financial condition and our ability to operate our business, and we may not be able to generate sufficient cash flows to meet our debt service obligations

We have a significant amount of debt and expect to incur additional debt to support our growth. As of December 31, 2013, our total indebtedness was approximately €371.9 million, our stockholders’ equity was €387.9 million and our cash and cash equivalents totaled €45.7 million. Our substantial amount of debt could have important consequences. For example, it could:

 

    make it more difficult for us to satisfy our debt obligations;

 

    restrict us from making strategic acquisitions;

 

    limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and future business opportunities, thereby placing us at a competitive disadvantage if our competitors are not as highly leveraged;

 

    increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions; or

 

    require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to make interest and principal payments on our debt, reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund future capital expenditures, working capital, execution of our expansion strategy and other general corporate requirements;

 

    limit our ability to borrow additional funds, even when necessary to maintain adequate liquidity, which would also limit our ability to further expand our business; and

 

    make us more vulnerable to increases in interest rates because of the variable interest rates on some of our borrowings to the extent we have not entirely hedged such variable rate debt.

The occurrence of any of the foregoing factors could have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations and financial condition.

 

18


Table of Contents

We require a significant amount of cash to service our debt, which may limit available cash to fund working capital and capital expenditures. Our ability to generate sufficient cash depends on many factors beyond our control.

Our ability to make payments on and to refinance our debt, and to fund working capital and capital expenditures, will depend on our future operating performance and ability to generate sufficient cash. This depends, to some extent, on general economic, financial, competitive, market, legislative, regulatory and other factors, many of which are beyond our control, as well as the other factors discussed in these “Risk Factors.”

We cannot assure you that our business will generate sufficient cash flows from operations or that future debt and equity financing will be available to us in an amount sufficient to enable us to pay our debts when due, including the Senior Secured Notes, or to fund our other liquidity needs. See Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects.”

If our future cash flows from operations and other capital resources (including borrowings under our Revolving Facility) are insufficient to pay our obligations as they mature or to fund our liquidity needs, we may be forced to:

 

    reduce or delay our business activities and capital expenditures;

 

    sell assets;

 

    obtain additional debt or equity capital; or

 

    restructure or refinance all or a portion of our debt, including the Senior Secured Notes, on or before maturity.

We cannot assure you that we would be able to accomplish any of these alternatives on a timely basis or on satisfactory terms, if at all. In addition, the terms or our debt, including the Revolving Facility and the Senior Secured Notes, will limit, and any future debt may limit, our ability to pursue any of these alternatives.

We may need to refinance our outstanding debt

We may also need to refinance a portion of our outstanding debt as it matures, such as mortgages with quarterly repayment schedules, our PAR7 finance lease obligation due in 2019 and our €325.0 million 6.00% senior secured notes due in 2020 (the “Senior Secured Notes”). There is a risk that we may not be able to refinance existing debt or that the terms of any refinancing may not be as favorable as the terms of our existing debt. Furthermore, if prevailing interest rates or other factors at the time of refinancing result in higher interest rates upon refinancing, then the interest expense relating to that refinanced indebtedness would increase. These risks could materially adversely affect our financial condition, cash flows and results of operations

If we increase our indebtedness by borrowing additional amounts under our €100.0 million revolving facility (the “Revolving Facility”) or incur other new indebtedness, the risks described above would increase.

We are subject to significant restrictive debt covenants, which limit our operating flexibility.

Our Revolving Facility and the Indenture (as defined below) governing the Senior Secured Notes contain covenants which impose significant restrictions on the way we and our subsidiaries operate, including (but not limited to) restrictions on the ability to:

 

    create certain liens;

 

    incur debt and/or guarantees;

 

    enter into transactions other than on arm’s-length basis;

 

    pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

    engage, in relation to the Company, in any business activity or own assets or incur liabilities not authorised by the Revolving Facility Agreement (as defined below);

 

    sell certain kinds of assets;

 

    impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Senior Secured Notes;

 

    enter into any sale and leaseback transactions;

 

    make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

    substantially change the nature of the Company’s or the Group’s business;

 

    designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

    effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

 

19


Table of Contents

These covenants could limit our ability to finance our future operations and capital needs and our ability to pursue acquisitions and other business activities that may be in our interest.

Our Revolving Facility also requires us to maintain a specified financial ratio. The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions including, in relation to the incurrence of additional debt, a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt and, if such debt is senior debt, a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net senior debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) to be less than 4.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt. The Revolving Facility Agreement also includes a leverage ratio financial covenant (tested on a quarterly basis) requiring total net debt (calculated as a ratio to pro forma EBITDA) not to exceed a leverage ratio of 4.00 to 1.00. In addition, the Company must ensure, under the Revolving Facility Agreement, that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of adjusted EBITDA of the Group as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Group as a whole. Our ability to meet these covenants may be affected by events beyond our control and, as a result, we cannot assure you that we will be able to meet the covenants. In the event of a default under our Revolving Facility, the lenders could terminate their commitments and declare all amounts owed to them to be due and payable. Borrowings under other debt instruments that contain cross acceleration or cross default provisions, including the Senior Secured Notes, may as a result also be accelerated and become due and payable. We may be unable to pay these debts in such circumstances or to the extent we pay such debts, we may not have sufficient cash to fund our working capital expenditure needs.

Risks Related to our Industry

The European data center industry has suffered from over-capacity in the past, and a substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity and/or a general decrease in demand for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins.

The European data center industry has previously suffered from overcapacity. For example, certain Internet-based customers have previously contracted to use more space than necessary to meet their needs and in the periods following adverse market conditions, the number of Internet-related business failures increased significantly, resulting in high levels of customer churn due to the termination or non-renewal of contracts.

A substantial increase in the supply of new data center capacity in the European data center market and/or a general decrease in demand, or in the rate of increase in demand, for data center services could have an adverse impact on industry pricing and profit margins. If there is insufficient customer demand for data center services, our business, financial condition and operating results would be adversely affected.

If we do not keep pace with technological changes, evolving industry standards and customer requirements, our competitive position will suffer.

The Internet and telecommunications industries are characterized by rapidly changing technology, evolving industry standards and changing customer needs. Accordingly, our future success will depend, in part, on our ability to meet the challenge of these changes. Among the most important challenges that we may face are the need to: continue to develop our strategic and technical expertise, influence and respond to emerging industry standards and other technological changes, enhance our current services and develop new services that meet changing customer needs.

All of these challenges must be met in a timely and cost-effective manner. Some of our competitors may have greater financial resources, which would allow them to react better or more quickly to changes than we may be able to. We may not effectively meet these challenges as rapidly as our competitors or at all and our failure to do so could harm our business.

Terrorist activity throughout the world and military action to counter terrorism could adversely impact our business.

Due to the high volume of important data that passes through data centers, there is a real risk that terrorists seeking to damage financial and technological infrastructure view data centers generally, and those in concentrated areas specifically, as potential targets. These factors may increase our costs due to the need to provide enhanced security, which would have a material adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations if we are unable to pass such costs on to our customers. These circumstances may also adversely affect the ability of companies, including us, to raise capital. We may not have adequate property and liability insurance to cover terrorist attacks.

 

20


Table of Contents

In addition, we depend heavily on the physical infrastructure (particularly as it relates to power) that exists in the markets in which we operate. Any damage to such infrastructure, particularly in the major European markets such as Amsterdam, Frankfurt, London and Paris, where we derive a substantial amount of our revenue and which are likely to be more prone to terrorist activities, may materially and adversely affect our business.

Our carrier neutral business model depends on the presence of numerous telecommunications carrier networks in our data centers.

The presence of diverse telecommunications carriers’ fiber networks in our data centers is critical to our ability to retain and attract new customers. We are not a telecommunications carrier and as such we rely on third parties to provide our non-carrier customers with carrier services. We cannot assure you that the carriers operating within our data centers will not cease to do so. For example, as a result of strategic decisions or consolidations, some carriers may decide to downsize or terminate connectivity within our data centers, which could have an adverse effect on our business, financial condition and results of operations.

We may be subject to reputational damage and legal action in connection with the information disseminated by our customers.

We may face potential direct and indirect liability for claims of defamation, negligence, copyright, patent or trademark infringement and other claims, as well as reputational damage, based on the nature and content of the materials disseminated from our data centers, including on the grounds of allegations of the illegality of certain activities carried out by customers through their equipment located in our data centers. For example, lawsuits may be brought against us claiming that content distributed by our customers may be regulated or banned. Our general liability insurance may not cover any such claim or may not be adequate to protect us against all liability that may be imposed. In addition, on a limited number of occasions in the past, businesses, organizations and individuals have sent unsolicited commercial emails (“spam”), which may be viewed as offensive by recipients, from servers hosted at our data centers to a number of people, typically to advertise products or services. We have in the past received, and may in the future receive, letters from recipients of information transmitted by our customers objecting to spam. Although our contracts with our customers prohibit them from spamming, there can be no assurance that customers will not engage in this practice, which could subject us to claims for damages, damage our reputation and have a material adverse effect on our business.

Risks Related to Regulation

Laws and government regulations governing Internet-related services, related communication services and information technology and electronic commerce, across the European countries in which we operate, continue to evolve and, depending on the evolution of such regulations, may adversely affect our business.

Laws and governmental regulations governing Internet-related services, related communications services and information technology and electronic commerce continue to evolve. This is true across the various European countries in which we operate. In particular, the laws regarding privacy and those regarding gambling and other activities that certain countries deem illegal are continuing to evolve.

Changes in laws or regulations (or the interpretation of such laws or regulations) or national or EU policy affecting our activities and/or those of our customers and competitors, including regulation of prices and interconnection arrangements, regulation of access arrangements to types of infrastructure, regulation of privacy requirements through the protection of personal data and regulation of activity considered illegal through rules affecting data center and managed service providers could materially adversely affect our results by decreasing revenue, increasing costs or impairing our ability to offer services.

The industry in which we operate is subject to environmental and health and safety laws and regulations and may be subject to more stringent efficiency, environmental and health and safety laws and regulations in the future.

We are subject to various environmental and health and safety laws and regulations, including those relating to the generation, storage, handling and disposal of hazardous substances and technological equipment, the maintenance of warehouse facilities and the generation and use of electricity. Certain of these laws and regulations are capable of imposing liability for the entire cost of the investigation and remediation of contaminated sites, without regard to fault or the lawfulness of the disposal activity, on former owners and operators of real property and persons who have disposed of or released hazardous substances at any location. Compliance with these laws and regulations could impose substantial ongoing compliance costs and operating restrictions on us.

 

21


Table of Contents

Hazardous substances or regulated materials of which we are not aware may be present at data centers leased and operated by us. If any such contaminants are discovered at our data centers, we may be responsible under applicable laws, regulations or leases for any required removal or clean-up or other action at substantial cost.

Our facilities contain tanks and other containers for the storage of diesel fuel and significant quantities of lead acid batteries to provide back-up power. We cannot guarantee that our environmental compliance program will be able to prevent leaks or spills in these or other technical installations.

In addition, as a consumer of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme, which was introduced in 2010, and simplified in May 2013 by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2013. It is a mandatory UK-wide emissions trading scheme based on electricity usage. It applies to organizations that have at least one settled half hourly meter and also consume over 6,000 MWh of half-hourly metered electricity in the initial qualification years for the relevant phase. Phase 1 runs from April 1, 2010 to March 31, 2014 and Phase 2 will run from April 1, 2014 to March 2019. Qualifying organizations are required to register with the CRC Registry for Phase 2 by January 31, 2014, which we have done. Non-compliance with the Scheme may result in criminal and civil penalties.

Participants of the Scheme are required to purchase emissions allowances from the UK Government to cover CO2 emitted from energy supplies in each year. Once registered for Phase 2, participants will have to monitor and report on their electricity consumption for five years and purchase or surrender allowances equal to the quantity of CO2 emissions. Allowances can be bought, traded or surrendered and participants must submit an annual report by the end of July in each compliance year. In the 2013 Autumn Statement, the Chancellor announced that the allowance price for 2014/2015 will be £15.60 per tonne of CO2 in the April 2014 “forecast sale” and £16.40 per tonne in the “buy to comply sale” in June 2015. The potential impacts of the Scheme on our data centers in the UK include the costs of improving energy efficiency in order to reduce electricity consumption and hence the costs of allowances and administration in complying with the Scheme.

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard. The European Union is aiming to reduce primary energy consumption by 20% by 2020 pursuant to the Energy Efficiency Directive 2012, which obliges member states to set indicative targets for themselves, establish auditing requirements and report to the European Commission through periodic National Energy Efficiency Action Plans. The UK has committed to ensuring that 15% of its energy needs are met by renewable sources by 2020.

On July 11, 2013, the Department of Energy and Climate Change issued a consultation on the Energy Saving Opportunity Scheme (ESOS), which will implement Article 8 of the Energy Efficiency Directive 2012, relating to energy audits. With the aim of encouraging investment in energy efficiency, it is intended that all large enterprises (with more than 250 employees or an annual turnover exceeding €50 million and a consolidated balance sheet exceeding €43 million) will be required to participate. Participants will need to review the total energy use and efficiency of their buildings in order to identify opportunities for energy and cost saving measures. Assessments would have to be completed by December 2015, but there is unlikely to be a legal requirement to implement the measures identified. If it is introduced in the Spring of 2014, there will be an overlap with reporting under the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, Climate Change Agreements (“CCAs”) and mandatory greenhouse gas reporting requirements.

CCAs are voluntary agreements between the UK Government and energy intensive sectors allowing a discount from the Climate Change Levy in return for companies meeting carbon saving targets. From April 1, 2013, participants are entitled to a 90% reduction on the electricity Climate Change Levy and 65% reduction for other fuels if they agree to and meet their targets. Although the Government indicated in its 2013 Autumn Statement that a CCA for the data center sector would be introduced by the end of 2013, this has not yet happened. We do not therefore qualify for a CCA and instead, we were required to register for Phase 2 of the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme by January 31, 2014, which we have done.

Non-compliance with, or liabilities under, existing or future environmental or health and safety laws and regulations, including failure to hold requisite permits, or the adoption of more stringent requirements in the future, could result in fines, penalties, third-party claims and other costs that could have a material adverse effect on us.

 

22


Table of Contents

Changes in Dutch or foreign tax laws and regulations, or interpretations thereof may adversely affect our financial position.

We are a Dutch company with European subsidiaries and are subject to income tax in The Netherlands and foreign income tax in the countries we conduct operations, including The Netherlands, France, Germany and the UK. Significant judgment is required in determining our worldwide tax liabilities and obligations. Although we believe that we have adequately assessed and accounted for our potential tax liabilities, and that our tax estimates including our transfer pricing estimates are reasonable, there can be no certainty that additional taxes will not be due upon an audit of our tax returns or as a result of changes to applicable tax laws and interpretations thereof. In addition, several of the governments in which we conduct operations, including The Netherlands, France, Germany and the UK, are actively considering changes to their respective taxation regimes, which may impact the recognition and taxation of worldwide income. The nature and timing of any amendments to tax laws of the jurisdictions in which we operate and the impact on our future tax liabilities cannot be predicted with any certainty, however any such amendments or changes could materially and adversely impact our results of operations and financial position including cash flows. In the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, we were adversely impacted by a ‘one-time’ crisis wage tax in The Netherlands. Initially this new tax was introduced as a one-time crisis wage tax, however, we were subject to this tax again in the year ended December 31, 2013.

Risks Related to Our Ordinary Shares

The market price for our ordinary shares may continue to be volatile.

From January 1, 2013 to December 31, 2013, the closing sale price of our common stock on the NYSE ranged from $20.67 to $27.67 per share. The market price for our shares is likely to be highly volatile and subject to wide fluctuations in response to factors including, but not limited to, the following:

 

    announcements of new products and services by us or our competitors;

 

    technological breakthroughs in the data center, networking or computing industries;

 

    news regarding any gain or loss of customers by us;

 

    news regarding recruitment or loss of key personnel by us or our competitors;

 

    announcements of competitive developments, acquisitions or strategic alliances in our industry;

 

    changes in the general condition of the global economy and financial markets;

 

    general market conditions or other developments affecting us or our industry;

 

    the operating and stock price performance of other companies, other industries and other events or factors beyond our control;

 

    cost and availability of power and cooling capacity;

 

    cost and availability of additional space inventory either through lease or acquisition in our target markets;

 

    regulatory developments in our target markets affecting us, our customers or our competitors;

 

    changes in demand for interconnection and colocation products and services in general or at our facilities in particular;

 

    actual or anticipated fluctuations in our quarterly results of operations;

 

    changes in financial projections or estimates about our financial or operational performance by securities research analysts;

 

    changes in the economic performance or market valuations of other data center companies;

 

    release or expiry of lock-up or other transfer restrictions on our outstanding ordinary shares; and

 

    sales or perceived sales of additional ordinary shares.

In addition, the securities market has from time to time experienced significant price and volume fluctuations that are not related to the operating performance of particular companies. These market fluctuations may also have a material adverse effect on the market price of our ordinary shares.

A substantial portion of our total outstanding ordinary shares may be sold into the market at any time. Such future sales or issuances, or perceived future sales or issuances, could adversely affect the price of our shares.

If our existing shareholders sell, or are perceived as intending to sell, substantial amounts of our ordinary shares, including those issued upon the exercise of our outstanding share options, the market price of our ordinary shares could be adversely

 

23


Table of Contents

impacted. Such sales, or perceived potential sales, by our existing shareholders might make it more difficult for us to issue new equity or equity-related securities in the future at a time and price we deem appropriate. The ordinary shares offered in our initial public offering were eligible for immediate resale in the public market without restrictions. Shares previously held by our existing shareholders may also be sold in the public market in the future if registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”), or if such shares qualify for an exemption from registration, including by reason of Rules 144 or 701 under the Securities Act. Additionally, we intend to register all of our ordinary shares that we may issue under our employee stock ownership plans. Once we register those shares, they can be freely sold in the public market upon issuance, unless pursuant to their terms these stock awards have transfer restrictions attached to them.

You may not be able to exercise pre-emptive rights.

Our board of directors has the power to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights in respect of any issue and/or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Such designation will be limited to our authorized share capital from time to time and will be effective for a period of five years. As a result, we may issue additional shares for future acquisitions or other purposes while excluding any pre-emptive rights. If we issue additional shares without pre-emptive rights, your ownership interests in our Company would be diluted and this in turn could have a material adverse effect on the price of our shares.

We may need additional capital and may sell additional ordinary shares or other equity securities or incur indebtedness, which could result in additional dilution to our shareholders or increase our debt service obligations.

We believe that our current cash and anticipated cash flow from operations will be sufficient to meet our anticipated cash needs for the foreseeable future. We may, however, require additional cash resources due to changed business conditions or other future developments, including any investments or acquisitions we may decide to pursue. If these resources are insufficient to satisfy our cash requirements, we may seek to sell additional equity or debt securities or utilize our existing or obtain a new credit facility. The sale of additional equity securities could result in additional dilution to our shareholders. The incurrence of indebtedness would limit our ability to pay dividends or require us to seek consents for the payment of dividends, increase our vulnerability to general adverse economic and industry conditions, limit our ability to pursue our business strategies, require us to dedicate a substantial portion of our cash flow from operations to service our debt, thereby reducing the availability of our cash flow to fund capital expenditure, working capital requirements and other general corporate needs, and limit our flexibility in planning for, or reacting to, changes in our business and our industry. We cannot assure you that financing will be available in amounts or on terms acceptable to us, if at all.

We have never paid, do not currently intend to pay and may not be able to pay any dividends on our ordinary shares.

We have never declared or paid any dividends on our ordinary shares and currently do not plan to declare dividends on our ordinary shares in the foreseeable future. If we were to choose to declare dividends in the future, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness. In addition, because we are a holding company, our ability to pay cash dividends on our ordinary shares may be limited by restrictions on our ability to obtain sufficient funds through dividends from subsidiaries, including restrictions under the terms of the agreements governing our and our subsidiaries’ indebtedness. In that regard, our wholly-owned subsidiaries are limited in their ability to pay dividends or otherwise make distributions to us. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of profits as shown in our adopted statutory annual accounts. We will only be able to declare and pay dividends to the extent our equity exceeds the sum of the paid and called up portion of our ordinary share capital and the reserves that must be maintained in accordance with provisions of Dutch law and our articles of association. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. Appropriation and distribution of dividends will be subject to the approval of our general meeting of shareholders. Our board of directors, in determining to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant.

Your rights and responsibilities as a shareholder will be governed by Dutch law and will differ in some respects from the rights and responsibilities of shareholders under U.S. law, and your shareholder rights under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as shareholder rights are established under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions.

Our corporate affairs are governed by our articles of association and by the laws governing companies incorporated in The Netherlands. The rights of our shareholders and the responsibilities of members of our board of directors under Dutch law may not be as clearly established as under the laws of some U.S. jurisdictions. In the performance of its duties, our board of directors will be required by Dutch law to consider the interests of our Company, our shareholders, our employees and other stakeholders in all cases with reasonableness and fairness. It is possible that some of these parties will have interests that are different from, or in addition to, your interests as a shareholder. We anticipate that all of our shareholder meetings will take place in The Netherlands.

 

24


Table of Contents

In addition, the rights of holders of ordinary shares and many of the rights of shareholders as they relate to, for example, the exercise of shareholder rights, are governed by Dutch law and our articles of association and differ from the rights of shareholders under U.S. law. For example, Dutch law does not grant appraisal rights to a company’s shareholders who wish to challenge the consideration to be paid upon a merger or consolidation of the company. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

The provisions of Dutch corporate law and our articles of association have the effect of concentrating control over certain corporate decisions and transactions in the hands of our board of directors. As a result, holders of our shares may have more difficulty in protecting their interests in the face of actions by members of our board of directors than if we were incorporated in the United States. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.”

The interests of our principal shareholders may be inconsistent with your interests.

As of March 1, 2014, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30.00% of our equity. Upon completion of our initial public offering, we entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our board of directors, including the right to nominate the chairman of our board of directors. Please see Item 7: “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”, “Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. In a letter dated February 26, 2014, Lamont Finance, N.Y. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., the private equity funds affiliated with Baker Capital (collectively “Baker”), notified the board of directors of the Company that, pursuant to the shareholders agreement, they intend to designate two additional individuals to be elected at the Company’s 2014 Annual General Meeting, each of whom must meet the standards for independence under the requirements of the NYSE. The letter further states. “Baker believes all stakeholders would benefit from a newly constituted Board that is focused on enhancing corporate governance and is open to all avenues for creating and maximizing shareholder value.” As of the date of this report, the Company has not received the names of any additional nominees from Baker.

The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital may also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or that do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our Company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our Company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

We are a foreign private issuer and, as a result, and as permitted by the listing requirements of the New York Stock Exchange, we may rely on certain home country governance practices rather than the corporate governance requirements of the New York Stock Exchange.

Many of the corporate governance rules of the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”) do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE rules, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Under Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE rules, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, the Company’s Nominating Committee and Compensation Committee do not meet the NYSE independence standard, as one (1) member of each respective committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE rules.

For an overview of our corporate governance principles, see Item 16G “Corporate Governance.” As a result, you may not have the same protections afforded to stockholders of companies that are not foreign private issuers.

You may be unable to enforce judgments obtained in U.S. courts against us.

We are incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands, and all or a substantial portion of our assets are located outside of the United States and certain of our directors and officers and certain other persons named in this annual report are, and will continue to be, non-residents of the United States. As a result, although we have appointed an agent for service of process in the United States, it may be difficult or impossible for United States investors to effect service of process within the United States upon us or our non-U.S. resident directors and officers or to enforce in the United States any judgment against us or them

 

25


Table of Contents

including for civil liabilities under the United States securities laws. Any judgment obtained in any United States federal or state court against us may, therefore, have to be enforced in the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, as applicable. Because there is no treaty or other applicable convention between the United States and The Netherlands with respect to legal judgments, a judgment rendered by any United States federal or state court will not be enforced by the courts of The Netherlands unless the underlying claim is relitigated before a Dutch court. Under current practice, however, a Dutch court will generally grant the same judgment without a review of the merits of the underlying claim (i) if that judgment resulted from legal proceedings compatible with Dutch notions of due process, (ii) if that judgment does not contravene public policy of The Netherlands and (iii) if the jurisdiction of the United States federal or state court has been based on grounds that are internationally acceptable. Investors should not assume, however, that the courts of The Netherlands, or such other foreign jurisdiction, would enforce judgments of United States courts obtained against us predicated upon the civil liability provisions of the United States securities laws or that such courts would enforce, in original actions, liabilities against us predicated solely upon such laws.

We incur increased costs as a result of being a public company.

As a listed public company, we incur additional legal, accounting, insurance and other expenses than we would have incurred as a private company. We incur costs associated with our public company reporting requirements. In addition, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and related rules implemented by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) and the NYSE have imposed increased regulation and required enhanced corporate governance practices for public companies. Our efforts to comply with evolving laws, regulations and standards in this regard are likely to result in increased general and administrative expenses and a diversion of management time and attention from revenue generating activities to compliance activities. We also expect these new rules and regulations to make it more expensive for us to obtain director and officer liability insurance, and we may be required to accept reduced policy limits and coverage or incur substantially higher costs to obtain the same or similar coverage.

If our internal controls over financial reporting are found to be ineffective, our financial results or our stock price may be adversely affected.

Our most recent evaluation of our internal controls resulted in our conclusion that, as of December 31, 2013, our internal controls over financial reporting were effective. Our ability to manage our operations and growth, and other systems upgrades designed to support our growth, will require us to develop our controls and reporting systems and implement or adopt new controls and reporting systems. If in the future our internal control over financial reporting is found to be ineffective, or if a material weakness is identified in our controls over financial reporting, our financial results may be adversely affected. Investors may also lose confidence in the reliability of our financial statements which could adversely affect our stock price.

 

26


Table of Contents

ITEM 4: INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

Overview

We are a leading provider of carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center services in Europe. We support approximately 1,400 customers through 34 data centers (as at December 31, 2013) in 11 countries enabling them to protect, connect, process and distribute their most valuable information. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media between carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering of carrier and cloud neutral colocation services includes space, power, cooling and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. We enable our customers to reduce operational and capital costs while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and we operate in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris and Amsterdam the main data center markets in Europe. Our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes, and we house more than 500 individual carriers and Internet service providers and 19 European Internet exchanges. Our data centers allow our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and reduce latency, thereby improving the response time of their applications. This high level of connectivity fosters the development of communities of interest.

Strategy

Target New Customers in High Growth Segments to Further Develop our Communities of Interest

We categorize our customers into segments, and we will continue to target new customers in high growth market segments, including financial services, cloud and managed services providers, digital media and carriers. Winning new customers in these target markets enables us to expand existing, and build new, high value communities of interest within our data centers. For example, customers in the digital media segment benefit from the close proximity to content delivery network providers and Internet exchanges in order to rapidly deliver content to consumers. We expect the high value and reduced cost benefits of our communities of interest to continue to attract new customers, which will lead to decreased customer acquisition costs for us.

Increase Share of Spend from Existing Customers

We focus on increasing revenue from our existing customers in our target market segments. New revenue from our existing customers comprises a substantial portion of our new business, generating the majority of our new bookings. Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively working with customers to identify expansion opportunities in new or existing markets.

Maintain Connectivity Leadership

We seek to increase the number of carriers in each of our data centers by expanding the presence of our existing carriers into additional data centers and targeting new carriers. We also will continue to develop our relationships with Internet exchanges and work to increase the number of Internet service providers in these exchanges. In countries where there is no significant Internet exchange, we will work with Internet service providers and other parties to create the appropriate Internet exchange. Our carrier sales and business development team will continue to work with our existing carriers and Internet service providers, and target new carriers and Internet service providers, to maximize our share of their data center spend, and to achieve the highest level of connectivity in each of our data centers, with the right carriers to support the requirements of each of our communities of interest.

Continue to Deliver Best-in-Class Customer Service

We will continue to provide a high level of customer service in order to maximize customer satisfaction and minimize churn. Our European Customer Service Center operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, providing continuous monitoring and troubleshooting and giving our customers one call access to full, multilingual technical support, thereby reducing our customers’ internal support costs. In addition, we will continue to develop our customer tools, which include an online customer portal to provide our customers with real-time access to information. We will continue to invest in our local service delivery and assurance teams, which provide flexibility and responsiveness to customer needs.

 

27


Table of Contents

Disciplined Expansion and Conservative Financial Management

We plan to invest in our data center capacity, while maintaining our disciplined investment approach and prudent financial policy. We will continue to determine the size of our expansions based on selling patterns, pipeline and trends in existing demand as well as working with our customers to identify future capacity requirements. We only begin new expansions once we have identified customers and we have the capital to fully fund the build out, with the goal of selling 25% of a data center’s space by its opening. Our expansions are done in phases in order to manage the timing and scale of our capital expenditure obligations, reduce risk and improve our return on capital, with a target internal rate of return in excess of 30%. Finally, we will continue to manage our capital deployment and financial management decisions based on adherence to our target internal rate of return on new expansions and target leverage ratios. For a description of past and current capital expenditures, see Item 5 “Operating and Financial Review and Prospects.”

Our Services

We offer carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center and managed services to our customers.

Colocation

Our colocation services provide clients with the space and power to deploy IT infrastructure in our world-class data centers. Through a number of redundant subsystems, including power, fiber and cooling, we are able to provide our customers with highly reliable services. Our colocation services are scalable, allowing our customers to upgrade space, connectivity and services as their requirements evolve. Our data centers employ a wide range of physical security features, including biometric scanners, man traps, smoke detection, fire suppression systems, and secure access. We provide colocation services including:

Space

Each of our data centers houses our customers’ IT infrastructure in a highly connected facility, designed and outfitted to ensure a high level of network reliability. This service provides space and power to our clients to deploy their own IT infrastructure. Customers can choose individual cabinets or a secure cage or an individual room depending on their space and security requirements.

Power

Each of our data centers is equipped to offer our customers high power availability. Since the availability of power is essential to the operation of our data centers, we provide power backup in case of outage as the availability of power is essential to the operation of a data center. The vast majority of our data centers have redundant grid connections and all of our data centers have a power backup installation in case of outage. Generators in combination with uninterrupted power supply, or UPS, system, endeavor to ensure maximum availability. We provide a full range of output voltages and currents and we offer our customers a choice of guaranteed levels of availability between 99.9% and 99.999%.

Connectivity

We provide connectivity services that allow our customers to connect their IT infrastructure. These services offer connectivity with more than 500 telecommunications carriers and allow our customers to reduce costs while enhancing the reliability and performance associated with the exchange of Internet and other data traffic. Our connectivity options offer our customers a key strategic advantage by providing direct, high-speed connections to peers, partners, customers and some of the most important sources of IP data, content, cloud platforms and distribution in the world.

Cross Connect

We install and manage physical connections running from our customers’ equipment to the equipment of our telecommunications carrier, Internet service providers and Internet exchange customers as well as other customers. Cross connects are physically secured in dedicated areas called Meet-Me rooms. Our staff test and install cables and patches and maintain cable trays and patch panels according to industry best practice.

Managed Services

In addition to providing colocation services, we provide a number of additional managed services, including systems monitoring, systems management, engineering support services, data back-up and storage. Some managed services are only performed on an ad hoc basis, as and when requested by the customer, while others are more recurring in nature. These services are provided either by us directly, or in conjunction with third parties.

 

28


Table of Contents

Customers

We categorize our customers into customer segments including: digital media and distribution, enterprises, financial services, managed services providers and network providers. We have approximately 1,400 customers. The majority of our customers have entered into contracts with us for an initial three to five year term, which are typically renewed perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods.

In the year ended December 31, 2013, 33% of our Recurring Revenue came from our top 20 customers, 24% of our Recurring Revenue came from our top 10 customers and no single customer accounted for more than 10% of our Recurring Revenue.

The following table sets forth some of our representative customers by segment:

 

Digital Media and

Distribution

  

Enterprises

   Financial Services    Managed Service
Providers
   Network Providers
Akamai    Bacardi    ABN Amro Bank N.V.    Hewlett-Packard    AT&T
Britel    Canon    Aviva    IBM    British Telecom
Bwin    Lease Plan    Barclays Capital    Terremark    Colt Technology Services
Deluxe    Merger Market    Bloomberg       Interoute Communications
Internap       Fixnetix       Level3
I-stream Planet       NYSE Euronext       Sprint
Limelight       Options IT      
Mindmark       Sungard      
RTL Interactive       Trading Technologies      

Customer service is provided locally by our in-country teams and centrally via our European Customer Service Center located in London. The European Customer Service Center supports five European languages (Dutch, English, French, German and Spanish) and is run by technical support staff and operates 24 hours a day, 365 days a year, in order to provide rapid and cost-effective technical and business support to all of our clients. In addition to its service desk functions, the European Customer Service Center monitors and manages the performance of our data centers and takes care of network monitoring and other network operations center functions. The European Customer Service Center arranges, as necessary, local engineering support, rapid response (out of hours emergency assistance), “backup and restore” and other managed services. There is also a customer relationship management system in place to electronically log each issue that the European Customer Service Center is requested to address to ensure efficient and timely support.

Customer Contracts

Our customers typically sign contracts for the provision of colocation space together with basic service level agreements that provide for support services and other managed services. Unless customers notify us of their intention to terminate, which is typically 90 days in advance of the end of the contract period, contracts (a majority of which have an initial term of three to five years) typically renew perpetually and automatically for successive one year periods. However, where beneficial to us we will, prior to the expiry of a customer contract, seek to re-negotiate and re-sign with a customer (generally for a minimum one-year period). Our contracts generally allow us the option to increase prices in accordance with local price indices in each jurisdiction and we are able to adjust the amount charged for power at any time and as frequently as necessary during the life of the contract to account for any increases in power costs we are charged by our suppliers.

Contracts for colocation services are priced on the basis of a monthly recurring fee reflecting charges for space, power used in the common parts of the data center, power “plugs” and metered power usage, with related infrastructure and implementation costs included in an initial set-up fee. Clients have two options with respect to power usage: either (i) to pay for power usage in “plugs” in advance (typically included in the total cabinet price), which are contractually defined amounts of power per month, for which the customer must pay in full, regardless of how much power is actually used; or (ii) to pay for their actual power usage in arrears on a metered basis. The first option (power plugs) is usually sold in shared areas of our data centers where customers pay per cabinet. The second option (metered power usage) is usually sold to customers taking dedicated space such as a cage, suite or private room where they are charged on a per square meter basis.

 

29


Table of Contents

As with colocation services, our managed services are typically contracted on the basis of an annual contract (or longer where appropriate) and the fee generally consists of monthly recurring charges and usage based charges as appropriate, and may also include an initial set-up fee. If managed services are ad hoc in nature, they are invoiced on completion of the service.

Each new customer contract we enter into provides that in the event of a power outage or other equivalent service level agreement breach (e.g. for repeatedly crossing a temperature or humidity benchmark), the customer will receive a service credit in the form of a reduction in its next service fee payment, the credit being on a sliding scale to reflect the seriousness of the breach. Our customer contracts typically exclude liability for consequential or indirect loss suffered as a result of a service level agreement breach and for force majeure. Historically, our penalty payments under our service level agreements have been minimal.

Customer Accounts

Fees are typically invoiced quarterly in advance, with the exception of metered power usage which is invoiced monthly in arrears. On new contracts, we generally require deposits, which we are able to use to cover any non-payment of invoices. If accounts are not paid on time, we ultimately seek recovery through the court system.

Sales and Marketing

Our sales and marketing teams focus on proactively identifying and converting opportunities for both existing customers and prospects within our target segments, to expand customers’ space within our data center portfolio.

Sales

We sell our products and services through local direct sales forces and a centralized International Accounts Team and by attending tradeshows, networking events and industry seminars. Our International Accounts Team focuses on maximizing revenues across our European footprint from our largest customers and on identifying and developing new major accounts. We utilize a number of indirect channel partners in the United States to secure both referrals and orders from companies based out of the United States.

Marketing

Our marketing organization is responsible for identifying target customer segments, development of the value proposition that will enable us to succeed in our chosen segments, building and communicating a distinct brand, driving qualified leads into the sales pipeline and ensuring strategic alignment with key partners. Our marketing team supports our strategic priorities through the following primary objectives:

Customer Segmentation

Our marketing organization is responsible for the identification of high-growth customer segments and associated companies therein that we wish to target in order to build the community of interest and develop our value proposition to enable success in our chosen markets. Our marketing organization is also responsible for business development of key magnetic and strategic accounts in each segment working with sales in order to build our communities of interest. Magnetic companies when present in our data centers, attract other interested members to join the community. The magnetic effect can be a consequence of the application, data or capability that they place in our data centers. A company in one of our segments is considered “strategic” if its presence adds value to the community of interest by increasing the magnetism of the community. This can be achieved by virtue of its brand and the associated added value to Interxion and the community.

Brand Management and Positioning

This includes brand identity unification, positioning at the corporate and country levels, the development of methodology, marketing assets and brand awareness programs for all of our business units.

Lead Generation

Utilizing online marketing, targeted advertising, direct marketing, event marketing and public relations programs and strategies to design and execute successful lead-generation campaigns leveraging telemarketing and direct sales to grow our pipeline and deliver our revenue goals.

 

30


Table of Contents

Employees

As of December 31, 2013 we had a total of 453 employees (full time equivalents, excluding contractors and interim staff) of which 253 employees worked in operations and support, 97 employees worked in sales and marketing and 103 employees served general and administrative roles. Of our employees 336 were based in countries where we have operations and 117 employees worked from our headquarters near Amsterdam and corporate offices in London as of December 31, 2013. We believe that relations with our employees are good. Except for collective rights granted by local law, none of our employees are subject to collective bargaining agreements.

Leases

We hold title to the AMS3, AMS6, CPH2, FRA8, PAR3 and PAR5 properties, and we have exercised the option to purchase the freehold land in Paris on which we own the PAR7 data center. Until we complete the acquisition of the freehold land with respect to PAR7, the freehold land will be reported as a financial lease. For the leased properties, on which our data centers are located, we generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms for a minimum period of 10 to 15 years with the option for us to either (i) extend the leases for additional five-year terms or (ii) terminate the leases upon expiration of the initial 10 to 15 year term. Our leases generally have consumer price index based annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

Data Center Operations

We have 34 carrier and cloud neutral colocation data centers in 13 metropolitan areas in 11 countries, representing approximately 83,800 square meters of maximum equippable space (as of December 31, 2013). Maximum equippable space is the maximum amount of space in our data centers which is designed to be used and sold as Equipped Space.

All of our data centers are located in Europe and all of our revenues are generated in Europe. For more information on the geographic breakdown of our revenues, see Note 5 of our 2013 consolidated financial statements, included elsewhere herein.

We select sites for our data centers based primarily on expected customer demand, availability of power and access to telecommunications fiber routes. Most of our data centers are stand-alone structures, close to power sub-stations and telecommunication networks in light industrial areas outside of city centers, rather than residential areas where more prohibitive environmental regulations exist. Data center design and development is a highly complex process. Data center construction requires extensive planning and must navigate regulatory procedures which can vary by jurisdiction. We have developed extensive technical experience in building data centers in Europe and we are well-positioned to bring new data centers to market rapidly to meet customer demand.

The following table presents the key characteristics of our data centers.

 

Country

  

Location

  

Ready for service Quarter

   Maximum
Equippable Space
as of
December 31, 
2013
 
               Square Meters  

Austria

   Vienna    Third Quarter, 2000      4,700   

Belgium (1)

   Brussels    Third Quarter, 2000      5,100   

Denmark (2)

   Copenhagen    Third Quarter, 2000      3,800   

France

   Paris—1    First Quarter, 2000      1,400   

France

   Paris—2    Third Quarter, 2001      3,000   

France

   Paris—3    Third Quarter, 2007      2,000   

France

   Paris—4    Third Quarter, 2007      1,300   

France

   Paris—5    Fourth Quarter, 2009      4,100   

France

   Paris—6    Third Quarter, 2009      1,400   

France

   Paris—7    Second Quarter, 2012      4,700   

Germany

   Dusseldorf    Second Quarter, 2000      2,800   

Germany

   Frankfurt—1    First Quarter, 1999      500   

Germany

   Frankfurt—2    Fourth Quarter, 1999      1,100   

Germany

   Frankfurt—3    First Quarter, 2000      2,100   

Germany

   Frankfurt—4    First Quarter, 2001      1,400   

Germany

   Frankfurt—5    Third Quarter, 2008      1,700   

 

31


Table of Contents

Country

  

Location

  

Ready for service Quarter

   Maximum
Equippable Space
as of
December 31, 
2013
 
               Square Meters  

Germany

   Frankfurt—6    Second Quarter, 2010      2,200   

Germany

   Frankfurt—7    First Quarter, 2012      1,500   

Ireland

   Dublin—1    Second Quarter, 2001      1,100   

Ireland

   Dublin—2    First Quarter, 2010      2,400   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—1    First Quarter, 1998      600   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—2    First Quarter, 1999      700   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—3    Fourth Quarter, 1999      3,100   

The Netherlands (3)

   Amsterdam—4    Fourth Quarter, 2000      —     

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—5    Fourth Quarter, 2008      4,300   

The Netherlands

   Amsterdam—6    Third Quarter, 2012      4,400   

The Netherlands (4)

   Hilversum    Third Quarter, 2001      600   

Spain

   Madrid—1    Third Quarter, 2000      4,000   

Spain

   Madrid—2    Fourth Quarter, 2012      1,700   

Sweden

   Stockholm—1    Third Quarter, 2000      1,900   

Sweden

   Stockholm—2    Second Quarter, 2013      1,000   

Switzerland (5)

   Zurich    Fourth Quarter, 2000      6,500   

UK

   London—1    Third Quarter, 2000      5,200   

UK

   London—2    Third Quarter, 2012      1,500   
        

 

 

 

Subtotal

           83,800   
        

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Brussels maximum equippable space increased by 300 square meters as result of a new expansion.
(2) Copenhagen maximum equippable space increased by 300 square meters as result of a new expansion
(3) The maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—4 is included in the maximum equippable space of Amsterdam—1.
(4) The maximum equippable space of Hilversum decreased by 200 square meters as a result of a renegotiated lease.
(5) Zurich maximum equippable space increased by 100 square meters as result of a new expansion.

Seasonality

The Company’s operations are not significantly exposed to seasonality.

Competition

We compete with all providers of data center services including in-house and outsourced data centers. Our chief competitors among each of the types of competition are listed below.

Carrier and Cloud Neutral Colocation Data Centers

Carrier and cloud neutral colocation data centers in Europe include Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. These companies are our chief competitors.

IT Outsourcers and Managed Services Provider Data Centers

IT outsourcers and managed services providers in Europe include HP, IBM, Rackspace and Sungard.

Wholesale Data Centers

Competitor wholesale data center providers include Digital Realty Trust and Global Switch.

Carrier-Operated Data Centers

Carriers that operate their own data centers in Europe include AT&T, BT, Cable & Wireless, Colt Technology Services and Verizon.

 

32


Table of Contents

Please see Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors—We face significant competition and we may not be able to compete successfully against current and future competitors.”

Litigation

We have not been party to any legal proceedings, governmental or arbitration proceedings during the twelve months preceding the date of this annual report which may have, or have had in the recent past, a significant effect on our financial position.

Regulation

Although we are not subject to any financial regulations (such as outsourcing requirements, MiFID or Basel II), our financial services customers commonly are. In their contracts with us, these financial services customers impose access, audit and inspection rights to those parts of our data centers that contain their equipment so that they can satisfy their regulatory requirements.

In addition, as a consumer of substantial amounts of electricity, we may be affected by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, or the Scheme, which was introduced in 2010, and simplified in May 2013 by the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme Order 2013. It is a mandatory UK-wide emissions trading scheme based on electricity usage. It applies to organizations that have at least one settled half hourly meter and also consume over 6,000 MWh of half-hourly metered electricity in the initial qualification years for the relevant phase. Phase 1 runs from April 1, 2010 to March 31, 2014 and Phase 2 will run from April 1, 2014 to March 2019. Qualifying organizations are required to register with the CRC Registry for Phase 2 by January 31, 2014, which we have done. Non-compliance with the Scheme may result in criminal and civil penalties.

Participants of the Scheme are required to purchase emissions allowances from the UK Government to cover CO2 emitted from energy supplies in each year. Once registered for Phase 2, participants will have to monitor and report on their electricity consumption for five years and purchase or surrender allowances equal to the quantity of CO2 emissions. Allowances can be bought, traded or surrendered and participants must submit an annual report by the end of July in each compliance year. In the 2013 Autumn Statement, the Chancellor announced that the allowance price for 2014/2015 will be £15.60 per tonne of CO2 in the April 2014 “forecast sale” and £16.40 per tonne in the “buy to comply sale” in June 2015. The potential impacts of the Scheme on our data centers in the UK include the costs of improving energy efficiency in order to reduce electricity consumption and hence the costs of allowances and administration in complying with the Scheme.

Our data centers may also be adversely affected by any future application of additional regulation relating to energy usage, for example seeking to reduce the power consumption of companies and fees or levies in this regard. The European Union is aiming to reduce primary energy consumption by 20% by 2020 pursuant to the Energy Efficiency Directive 2012, which obliges member states to set indicative targets for themselves, establish auditing requirements and report to the European Commission through periodic National Energy Efficiency Action Plans. The UK has committed to ensuring that 15% of its energy needs are met by renewable sources by 2020.

On July 11, 2013, the Department of Energy and Climate Change issued a consultation on the Energy Saving Opportunity Scheme (ESOS), which will implement Article 8 of the Energy Efficiency Directive 2012, relating to energy audits. With the aim of encouraging investment in energy efficiency, it is intended that all large enterprises (with more than 250 employees or an annual turnover exceeding €50 million and a consolidated balance sheet exceeding €43 million) will be required to participate. Participants will need to review the total energy use and efficiency of their buildings in order to identify opportunities for energy and cost saving measures. Assessments would have to be completed by December 2015, but there is unlikely to be a legal requirement to implement the measures identified. If it is introduced in the Spring of 2014, there will be an overlap with reporting under the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme, CCAs and mandatory greenhouse gas reporting requirements.

CCAs are voluntary agreements between the UK Government and energy intensive sectors allowing a discount from the Climate Change Levy in return for companies meeting carbon saving targets. From 1 April 2013, participants are entitled to a 90% reduction on the electricity Climate Change Levy and 65% reduction for other fuels if they agree to and meet their targets. Although the Government indicated in its 2013 Autumn Statement that a CCA for the data center sector would be introduced by the end of 2013, this has not yet happened. We do not therefore qualify for a CCA and instead, we were required to register for Phase 2 of the CRC Energy Efficiency Scheme by January 31, 2014, which we have done.

As an operator of data centers which act as content and connectivity hubs that facilitate the storage, sharing and distribution of data, content and media for customers, we have in place an Acceptable Use Policy which applies to all of our customers using Internet connectivity services provided by us and which requires our customers to respect all legislation pertaining to the use of Internet services, including email.

 

33


Table of Contents

We are subject to telecommunications regulation in the various European jurisdictions in which we presently operate, most notably the EU Regulatory Framework. Under these regulations, we are not required to obtain licenses for the provision of our services. However, we may be required to notify the national telecommunications regulator in certain European jurisdictions about these services. We have made the necessary notifications for such jurisdictions.

By operating data centers, we will process personal data under the EU Data Protection Directive (95/46/EC). This directive is implemented through adoption in local legislation of the EU member states. We are subject to this legislation in most European jurisdictions as processors and controllers in the meaning of this Directive. This may impose obligations on us, such as an obligation to take reasonable steps to protect that information.

Insurance

We have in place insurance coverage which we consider to be reasonable and against the type of risks usually insured by companies carrying on the same or similar types of business as ours in the markets in which we operate. Our insurance broadly falls under the following four categories: professional indemnity, general third party liability, directors and officers liability and property damage insurance and business interruption insurance.

Our History and Organizational Structure

European Telecom Exchange BV was incorporated on April 6, 1998, which (after being renamed InterXion Holding B.V. on June 12, 1998) was converted into InterXion Holding N.V. on January 11, 2000. For further information on the history and development of the Company, see Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” From inception onwards we have grown our colocation business organically. We have developed our current footprint (both in terms of countries and cities) between 1999 and 2001 and now operate in 11 countries and 13 cities. Following the industry downturn beginning in 2001 as a result of a sharp decline in demand for Internet-based businesses, we restructured to refocus on a broader and more stable customer base. We have since focused on shifting our customer base from primarily emerging Internet companies and carriers to a wide variety of established businesses seeking to house their IT infrastructure.

Our subsidiaries perform various tasks, such as servicing our clients, operating our data centers, customers support, and providing management, sales and marketing support to the Group. The following table sets forth the name, country of incorporation and (direct and indirect) ownership interest of our most significant subsidiaries based on revenues and total assets:

 

Entity   

Country of

incorporation

  

Ownership

%

    Activity

InterXion HeadQuarters B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Management

Interxion Europe Ltd

   United Kingdom      100   Management

InterXion Operational B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Management/Holding

InterXion Nederland B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Datacenters B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Data center sales & marketing

InterXion Real Estate Holding B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate management/Holding

InterXion Real Estate I B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Real Estate IV B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Real Estate V B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Real Estate X B.V.

   The Netherlands      100   Real estate

InterXion Österreich GmbH

   Austria      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Real Estate VII GmbH

   Austria      100   Real estate

InterXion Belgium N.V.

   Belgium      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Real Estate IX NV.

   Belgium      100   Real estate

InterXion Danmark ApS.

   Denmark      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Real Estate VI ApS.

   Denmark      100   Real estate

Interxion France SAS

   France      100   Provision of co-location services

Interxion Real Estate II SARL

   France      100   Real estate

Interxion Real Estate III SARL

   France      100   Real estate

 

34


Table of Contents
Entity   

Country of

incorporation

  

Ownership

%

    Activity

InterXion Deutschland GmbH

   Germany      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Ireland Ltd.

   Ireland      100   Provision of co-location services

Interxion España SA

   Spain      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Sverige AB

   Sweden      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion (Schweiz) AG

   Switzerland      100   Provision of co-location services

InterXion Real Estate VIII AG.

   Switzerland      100   Real estate

InterXion Carrier Hotel Ltd.

   United Kingdom      100   Provision of co-location services

 

35


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A: UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

Not applicable.

 

36


Table of Contents

ITEM 5: OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

The following information should be read in conjunction with the audited consolidated financial statements and notes thereto and with the financial information presented in Item 18 “Financial Statements” included elsewhere in this annual report. The following discussion contains forward-looking statements that reflect our plans, estimates and beliefs. Such statements are based upon current expectations that involve risks and uncertainties. Any statements contained herein that are not statements of historical fact may be deemed to be forward-looking statements. For example, the words “believes,” “anticipates,” “plans,” “expects,” “intends” and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements. Our actual results could differ materially from those discussed in these forward-looking statements. Factors that might cause such a discrepancy include, but are not limited to, those discussed in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources” below and Item 3 “Key Information—Risk Factors” above. All forward-looking statements in this annual report are based on information available to us as of the date of this annual report and we assume no obligation to update any such forward-looking statements.

Overview

We are a leading carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center services provider in Europe. Our core offering is carrier and cloud neutral colocation services, which we sell to approximately 1,400 customers. Within our data centers, we enable our customers to connect to a broad range of telecommunications carriers, Internet service providers and other customers. Our data centers act as content, cloud and connectivity hubs that facilitate the processing, storage, sharing and distribution of data, content, applications and media among carriers and customers, creating an environment that we refer to as a community of interest.

Our core offering is carrier and cloud neutral colocation services, which includes space, uninterrupted power and a secure environment in which to house our customers’ computing, network, storage and IT infrastructure. Our carrier and cloud neutral colocation services enable our customers to reduce operational and capital expenses while improving application performance and flexibility. We supplement our core colocation offering with a number of additional services, including network monitoring, remote monitoring of customer equipment, systems management, engineering support services, cross connects, data backup and storage.

We are headquartered near Amsterdam, The Netherlands, and deliver our services through 34 data centers in 11 countries strategically located in major metropolitan areas, including London, Frankfurt, Paris and Amsterdam, which are the main data center markets in Europe. Because our data centers are located in close proximity to the intersection of telecommunications fiber routes and power sources, we are able to provide our customers with high levels of connectivity and the requisite power to meet their needs.

Our data centers house connections to more than 500 individual carriers and Internet service providers and 19 European Internet exchanges, which allows our customers to lower their telecommunications costs and, by reducing latency, improve the response time of their applications. This connectivity to carriers and Internet service providers, and to other customers, fosters the development of value-added communities of interest, which are important to customers in each of our segments: network providers, managed services providers (including cloud service providers), enterprises, financial services and digital media. Development of our communities of interest generates network effects for our customers that enrich the value and attractiveness of the community to both existing and potential customers.

Growth in Internet traffic, cloud computing and the use of customer-facing hosted applications are driving significant demand for high quality carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center services. This demand results from the need for either more space or more power, or both. These needs, in turn, are driven by, among other factors, decreased cost of Internet access, increased broadband penetration, increased usage of high-bandwidth content, increased number of wireless access points and growing availability of Internet and network based applications. If the global economy’s recovery stalls or is reversed, global IP traffic may grow at a lesser rate, which could lead to a slowdown in the increase in demand for our services.

Our ability to meet the demand for high quality carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center services depends on our ability to add capacity by expanding existing data centers or by locating and securing suitable sites for additional data centers that meet our specifications, such as proximity to numerous network service providers, access to a significant supply of electrical power and the ability to sustain heavy floor loading.

Our market is highly competitive. Most companies operate their own data centers and in many cases continue to invest in data center capacity, although there is a trend towards outsourcing. We compete against other carrier and cloud neutral colocation data center service providers, such as Equinix, Telecity and Telehouse. We also compete with other types of data centers,

 

37


Table of Contents

including carrier-operated colocation, wholesale and IT outsourcers and managed services provider data centers. The cost, operational risk and inconvenience involved in relocating a customer’s networking and computing equipment to another data center are significant and have the effect of protecting a competitor’s data center from significant levels of customer churn.

Key Aspects of Our Financial Model

We offer carrier and cloud neutral colocation services to our customers. Our revenues are mostly recurring in nature and in the last several years, Recurring Revenue has consistently represented over 90% of our total revenue. Our contracted Recurring Revenue model together with low levels of Average Monthly Churn provide significant predictability of future revenue.

Revenue

We enter into contracts with our customers for initial terms of generally three to five years, with annual price escalators and with automatic one-year renewals after the end of the initial term. Our customer contracts provide for a fixed monthly recurring fee for our colocation, managed services and, in the case of cabinets, fixed amounts of power pre-purchased at a fixed price. These fees are billed monthly, quarterly or bi-annually in advance, together with fees for other services such as the provision of metered power (based on a price per kilowatt hour actually consumed), billed monthly in arrears, or fees for services such as remote hands and eyes support, billed on an as-incurred basis.

The following table presents our future committed revenues expected to be generated from our fixed term customer contracts as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011.

 

     2013      2012      2011 (1)  

Within 1 year

     219,300         204,164         174,263   

Between 1 to 5 years

     301,600         240,951         207,549   

After 5 years

     101,800         105,069         104,236   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     622,700         550,184         486,048   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) The future committed revenue receivables for the year ended December 31, 2011 have been adjusted compared with the amounts previously reported on Form 20-F for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011. If at the end of the reporting date, we have not received a termination notice within the notice period for the contracts with an automatic renewal clause, the Company has assumed that the customers will use and commit to our services for an extended term. This has increased the 2011 future committed future revenue receivable by €41.0 million from €445.0 million.

Revenues are recognized when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group and that these benefits, together with their related costs, can be measured reliably. Revenues are measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable taking into account any discounts or volume rebates.

The Group reviews transactions for separately identifiable components of revenue and if necessary applies individual recognition treatment, in which revenues are allocated to separately identifiable components based on their relative fair values.

The Group earns colocation revenue as a result of providing data center services to customers at its data centers. Colocation revenues and lease income are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter. Initial setup fees payable at the beginning of customer contracts are deferred at inception and recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the customer contract. Power revenues are recognized based on customers’ usage and are generally matched with the corresponding costs.

Other services revenue, including managed services, connectivity and customer installation services, including equipment sales, are recognized when the services are rendered. Certain installation services and equipment sales, which by their nature are non-recurring, are presented as non-recurring revenues and are recognized upon delivery of service.

 

38


Table of Contents

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial setup fees are carried on the statement of financial position as part of trade payables and other liabilities. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Recurring Revenue comprises revenue that is incurred monthly from colocation and associated power charges, office space, amortized set-up fees and certain recurring managed services (but excluding any ad hoc managed services) provided by us directly or through third parties. Rents received for the sublease of unused sites are excluded.

Costs

Our cost base consists primarily of personnel, power and property costs.

We employ the majority of our personnel in operations and support roles that operate our data centers 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. As of December 31, 2013 we employed 453 full-time equivalent employees: 253 in operations and support; 97 in sales and marketing; and 103 served in general and administrative roles. A data center typically requires a fixed number of personnel to run, irrespective of customer utilization. Increases in operations and support personnel occur when we bring new data centers into service. Our approach is, where possible, to locate new data centers close to our existing data centers. In addition to other benefits of proximity, in some cases it also allows us to leverage existing personnel within a data center campus.

In 2013, 2012 and 2011, we invested resources in sales and marketing personnel to engage with our existing and potential customers on an industry basis. This has enabled us to establish closer relationships with our customers thereby allowing us to understand and anticipate their needs and to forecast demand, helping us plan the scope and timing of our expansion activities.

Our customers’ equipment consumes significant amounts of power and generates heat. In recent years the amount of power consumed by an individual piece of equipment, or power density, has increased as processing capacity has increased. In maintaining the correct environmental conditions for the equipment to operate most effectively, our cooling and air conditioning infrastructure also consume significant amounts of power. Our power costs are variable and directly dependent on the amount of power consumed by our customers’ equipment. Our power costs also increase as the Utilization Rate of a data center increases. Increases in power costs due to increased usage by our customers are generally matched by corresponding increases in power revenues.

The unit price we pay for our energy also has an impact on our energy costs. We generally enter into contracts with local utility companies to purchase energy at fixed prices for periods of one or two years. Within substantially all of our customer contracts, we have the right to adjust at any time the price we charge for our power services to allow us to recover increases in the unit price we pay.

We hold title to the AMS3, AMS6, CPH2, FRA8, PAR3 and PAR5 properties, and we have exercised the option to purchase the freehold land in Paris on which we own the PAR7 data center. Until we complete the acquisition of the freehold land with respect to PAR7, the freehold land will be reported as a financial lease. For the leased properties, on which our data centers are located, we generally seek to secure property leases for terms of 20 to 25 years. Where possible, we try to mitigate the long-term financial commitment by contracting for initial lease terms for a minimum period of 10 to 15 years with the option for us to either (i) extend the leases for additional five-year terms or (ii) terminate the leases upon expiration of the initial 10 to 15 year term. Our leases generally have consumer price index based annual rent increases over the full term of the lease.

Larger increases in our property costs occur when we bring new data centers into service. Bringing new data centers into service also has the effect of temporarily reducing our overall Utilization Rate while the utilization of the new data center increases as we sell to customers.

In addition, we enter into annual maintenance contracts with our major plant and equipment suppliers. This cost increases as new maintenance contracts are entered into in support of new data center operations.

Operating Leverage

Due to the relatively fixed nature of our costs, we generally experience margin expansion as our Utilization Rate at existing data centers increases. Our margins and the rate of margin expansion will vary based upon the scope and scale of our capacity expansions, which affects our overall Utilization Rate.

 

39


Table of Contents

EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin

We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €100.0 million Revolving Facility Agreement and the €325.0 million 6.0% Senior Secured Notes due 2020. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently, than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue.

Onerous lease contracts are those in which we expect losses to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the lease contract. Provisions for these leases are based upon the present value of the future contracted payout under these leases, and movements in the provision for onerous lease contracts are reflected on our income statement. We sublease portions of these unused sites to third parties and treat the income from these subleases as other income.

The provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

“IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

Net Finance Expense

Towards the end of 2006, we started an expansion program of our data centers based on customer demand. This expansion program, closely matched to both customer demand and available capital resources, has continued since that time. We do not commit to a phase of an expansion or construction of a data center unless we have cash and committed capital available to complete the phase. Since 2006, we have raised debt capital to fund our expansion program, and this has contributed to increases in our finance expense. During the period of construction of a data center, we capitalize the borrowing costs as part of the construction costs of the data center. We refinanced the Company’s debt in February 2010 when we issued €200 million of 9.5% senior secured notes, which was primarily used to repay existing debt, and a further tap offering of €60 million in November 2010. In 2013, we issued €325 million of 6.0% senior secured notes. The proceeds were used to purchase, redeem and discharge the €260 million of 9.5% senior secured notes, pay fees and expenses incurred in connection with the refinancing, and for other general corporate purposes.

In the year ended December 31, 2013, our net finance expense primarily consisted of interest expense of €24.6 million, refinancing expenses of €31.0 million and interest income of €0.5 million. For the full year 2012, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €17.2 million and interest income of €0.9 million. For the full year 2011, the major components of net finance expense consisted of interest expense of €23.9 million and interest income of €2.3 million. The increase in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2013 was due primarily to €31.0 million of refinancing expenses incurred as well as decreased capitalization of borrowing costs during the construction of new data center space. We capitalized €1.7 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2013 and €9.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 was due primarily to the increased capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space. We capitalized €9.2 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2011.

We discuss our capital expenditures, including intangible assets and our capital expansion program below in “—Liquidity and Capital Resources.”

Income Tax Expense

Since inception we have generated significant tax loss carry forwards in all of our jurisdictions. In 2006, we became taxable income positive and began offsetting our tax loss carry forwards against taxable profits. As at December 31, 2013 we have recognized most of our tax loss carry forwards. We will continue to recognize the remaining deferred tax loss carry forwards progressively as we become profitable in the respective jurisdictions. We expect to be able to continue to use our tax loss carry forwards to minimize cash taxes going forward.

 

40


Table of Contents

Segment Reporting

We report our financials in two segments, which we have determined based on our management and internal reporting structure: the first being France, Germany, The Netherlands and UK and the second being the Rest of Europe, which comprises our operations in Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items are presented as “corporate and other” and comprise mainly general and administrative expenses, assets and liabilities associated with our headquarters operations, provisions for onerous contracts (relating to the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the relevant leases, as further explained below) and revenue and expenses related to those onerous contracts, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities. Segment capital expenditure, including intangible assets is the total cost directly attributable to a segment incurred during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment.

 

41


Table of Contents

Results of Operations

The following table presents our operating results for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2013 (1)     2013     2012     2011  
     (U.S. $’000,
except per
share amounts)
    (€’000, except per share amounts)  

Revenue

     423,168        307,111        277,121        244,310   

Cost of sales

     (171,054     (124,141     (113,082     (101,766
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     252,114        182,970        164,039        142,544   

Other income

     470        341        463        487   

Sales and marketing costs

     (31,441     (22,818     (20,100     (17,680

General and administrative costs

        

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (79,463     (57,670     (43,993     (35,552

Share-based payments

     (5,717     (4,149     (5,488     (2,736

(Increase)/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts

     —         —         (838     (18

IPO transaction costs

     —         —         —         (1,725

Other general and administrative costs

     (39,015     (28,315     (28,924     (27,227
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (124,195     (90,134     (79,243     (67,258
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     96,948        70,359        65,159        58,093   

Net finance expense

     (79,165     (57,453     (17,746     (22,784
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     17,783        12,906        47,413        35,309   

Income tax expense

     (8,380     (6,082     (15,782     (9,737
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     9,403        6,824        31,631        25,572   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Basic earnings per share

     0.14        0.10        0.47        0.40   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA (2)

     181,658        131,837        115,015        97,637   

The following table presents our operating results as a percentage of revenues for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2013     2012     2011  

Revenue

     100     100     100

Cost of sales

     (40     (41     (42
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

     60        59        58   

Other income

     0        0        0   

Sales and marketing costs

     (7     (7     (7

General & administrative costs

      

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (19     (16     (15

Share-based payments

     (1     (2     (1

(Increase)/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts

     0        (0     (0

IPO transaction costs

     0        0        (1

Other general and administrative costs

     (9     (10     (11
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

General and administrative costs

     (29     (29     (28
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     23        24        24   

Net finance expense

     (19     (6     (9
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     4        17        14   

Income tax expense

     (2     (6     (4
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     2     11     10
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA margin (2)

     43     42     40

 

42


Table of Contents

 

Notes:

(1) The operating results for the year ended December 31, 2013 have been translated for convenience only based on the noon buying rate in The City of New York for cable transfers of euro as certified for customs purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York as of December 31, 2013 and for euro into U.S. dollars of €1.00 = U.S. 1.3779. See Item 3 “Key Information—Exchange Rate Information” for additional information.
(2) EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €100 million Revolving Facility Agreement and €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020. Other companies, however, may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS. See “—EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA” for a more detailed description.

The following table presents a reconciliation of Profit for the year attributable to shareholders to EBITDA and EBITDA to Adjusted EBITDA, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended
December 31,
    Year ended December 31,  
     2013 (1)*     2013     2012     2011  
     (U.S. $’000)     (€’000)  

Other financial data

        

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     9,403        6,824        31,631        25,572   

Income tax expense

     8,380        6,082        15,782        9,737   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     17,783        12,906        47,413        35,309   

Net finance expense

     79,165        57,453        17,746        22,784   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     96,948        70,359        65,159        58,093   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     79,463        57,670        43,993        35,552   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     176,411        128,029        109,152        93,645   

Share-based payments

     5,717        4,149        5,488        2,736   

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts (a)

     —          —          838        18   

IPO transaction costs (b)

     —          —          —          1,725   

Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites

     (470     (341     (463     (487
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA (2)*

     181,658        131,837        115,015        97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

* References are to the footnotes above.
(a) “Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(b) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

 

43


Table of Contents

The following table sets forth some of our key performance indicators as of the dates indicated:

 

     As of December 31,  
     2013      2012      2011  

Equipped Space (1) (square meters)

     80,100         74,000         62,800   

Utilization Rate (2) (%)

     75         76         75   

 

Notes:

(1) Equipped Space is the amount of data center space that, on the date indicated, is equipped and either sold or could be sold, without making any additional investments to common infrastructure. Equipped Space at a particular data center may decrease if either (a) the power requirements of customers at such data center change so that all or a portion of the remaining space can no longer be sold as the space does not have enough power and/or common infrastructure to support it without further investment or (b) if the design and layout of a data center changes to meet among others, fire regulations or customer requirements, and necessitates the introduction of common space which cannot be sold to individual customers, such as corridors.
(2) Utilization Rate is, on the relevant date, Revenue Generating Space as a percentage of Equipped Space; some Equipped Space is not fully utilized due to customers’ specific requirements regarding the layout of their equipment. In practice, therefore, Utilization Rate may not reach 100%.

Years Ended December 31, 2013 and 2012

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2013      %      2012      %          %  
     (€’000, except percentages)        

Revenue

           

Recurring revenue

     291,274         95         259,249         94         32,025        12   

Non-recurring revenue

     15,837         5         17,872         6         (2,035     (11
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 
     307,111         100         277,121         100         29,990        11   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €307.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €277.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of 11%. Recurring revenue increased by 12% and non-recurring revenue decreased by 11% from the year ended December 31, 2012 to the year ended December 31, 2013. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 3,500 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €124.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €113.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of 10%. Cost of sales was 40% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 41% for the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €5.5 million in energy usage costs and (ii) an increase of €5.2 million in compensation costs. Equipped Space increased by approximately 6,100 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2013 as a result of expansions to existing data centers in Frankfurt, London, Vienna, Copenhagen and Zurich and the construction of new data centers in Stockholm, Paris and Madrid. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business. It includes income from the subleases on unused data center sites.

 

44


Table of Contents

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €22.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €20.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of 14%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012.

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €1.5 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount and marketing expenses associated with our continued strategy to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, share-based payments, increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts and other general and administrative costs.

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €57.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €44.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of 31%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 19% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 16% for the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase was a result of new data centers and data center expansions. The increase was partly offset by €2.0 million attributable to a change in the estimated useful life of certain assets. In the fourth quarter of the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company completed its annual review of the estimated useful life of its property, plant and equipment. As a result of this review, the Company concluded that certain of its existing assets were in use longer than originally anticipated. Therefore, the estimated useful life of certain of our property, plant and equipment has been extended. This change was accounted for as a change in accounting estimate on a prospective basis effective October 1, 2013 under IAS 8 change in accounting estimates.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2013 we recorded share-based payments of €4.1 million, a decrease of 24% from the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease was primarily due to a €1.3 million lower crisis wage tax payable. In the years ended December 31, 2013 and 2012, we were adversely impacted by a ‘one-time’ crisis wage tax in The Netherlands. Initially this new tax was introduced as a one-time crisis wage tax, however, we were subject to this crisis tax again in the year ended December 31, 2013. Amounts payable in connection with the crisis wage tax is included in share-based payments with respect to options exercised during the period. Amounts payable in connection with the crisis wage tax included in the share-based payments over options exercised were €0.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2013 and €1.5 million in the year ended December 31, 2012. In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts. Following our annual review of the provision for onerous lease contracts the provision remained unchanged, while in 2012, the Company reassessed and increased its provision by €0.8 million.

Other general and administrative costs decreased to €28.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €28.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, a decrease of 2%. Other general and administrative costs were 9% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 10% for the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in the other general and administrative costs was due to a decrease of €0.6 million in compensation costs principally resulting from lower bonus, recruitment and severance expenses, which were partly offset by an increase in salaries associated with an increased headcount.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense increased to €57.5 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 from €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2012, an increase of 224%. Net finance expense was 19% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012. The increase in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2013 was due primarily to €31.0 million in costs related to the refinancing and the decreased capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space. We capitalized €1.7 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to €9.2 million in the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space was principally due to decreased average amounts invested and capitalization at a lower interest rate for the period after the refinancing on July 3, 2013.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €6.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to €15.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. Income tax expense was 2% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2013 and 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012. The decrease in income tax expenses was primarily due to a decrease in profit before tax as a result of the €31.0 million in debt refinancing costs and the impact of changes in tax rates, resulting in a €0.3 million positive tax impact in

 

45


Table of Contents

the year ended December 31, 2013 and €1.0 million negative tax impact in the year ended December 31, 2012. The effective income tax rate of 47% in the year ended December 31, 2013, compared to 33% for the year ended December 31, 2012, was adversely impacted by the tax effect, on the €31.0 million refinancing costs, included in the tax charge as a credit but at a lower than average tax rate.

We recorded current tax expenses of €7.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 and €6.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2012. We recorded deferred tax income of €1.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2013 and deferred tax expense of €9.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 arising from the net impact of the recognition and utilization of deferred tax assets on tax loss carry-forwards as well as the movements in temporary differences. Deferred tax is charged for the annual movements in temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes.

The deferred tax income in the year ended December 31, 2013, was principally due to the pre-tax refinancing costs of €31.0 million, which created a taxable loss.

Years Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011

Revenue

Our revenue for the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 was as follows:

 

     Year ended December 31,      Change  
     2012      %      2011      %           %  
     (€’000, except percentages)         

Revenue

           

Recurring revenue

     259,249         94         228,328         93         30,921         14   

Non-recurring revenue

     17,872         6         15,982         7         1,890         12   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     277,121         100         244,310         100         32,811         13   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Revenue increased to €277.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €244.3 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 13%. Recurring revenue increased by 14% and non-recurring revenue increased by 12% from the year ended December 31, 2011 to the year ended December 31, 2012. The period over period growth in recurring revenue was primarily the result of an increase of approximately 9,000 square meters in Revenue Generating Space as a result of sales to both existing and new customers in all of our regions.

Cost of Sales

Cost of sales increased to €113.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €101.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 11%. Cost of sales was 41% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 42% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in cost of sales was due to increased costs associated with our overall revenue growth and data center expansion projects, including (i) an increase of €5.8 million in energy usage costs, (ii) an increase of €2.8 million in higher installation and equipment costs and (iii) an increase of €2.5 million in compensation costs. Equipped Space increased by approximately 11,300 square meters during the year ended December 31, 2012 as a result of expansions to existing data centers in Amsterdam, Stockholm and Zurich and to the construction of new data centers in Amsterdam, Frankfurt, London, Paris and Madrid. We expect cost of sales as a percentage of revenue to decrease as we increase utilization at our existing facilities. This decrease may be offset by the impact of lower utilization in new data centers we open as part of our data center expansion projects.

Other Income

Other income represents income that we do not consider part of our core business. It includes income from the subleases on unused data center sites.

Sales and Marketing Costs

Our sales and marketing costs increased to €20.1 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 14%. Sales and marketing costs were 7% of revenue for each of the years ended December 31, 2012 and 2011.

 

46


Table of Contents

The increase in sales and marketing costs was primarily a result of an increase of €2.4 million in compensation and related costs due to increases in employee headcount and marketing expenses associated with our continued strategy to invest in our industry focused customer development and acquisition approach.

General and Administrative Costs

General and administrative costs consist of depreciation, amortization and impairments, share-based payments, increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts and other general and administrative costs.

Depreciation, amortization and impairments increased to €44.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €35.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 24%. Depreciation, amortization and impairments was 16% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 15% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was a result of new data centers and data center expansions.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we add back share-based payments. For the year ended December 31, 2012 we recorded share-based payments of €5.5 million, an increase of 101% from the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase was primarily due to a new crisis wage tax payable by employers imposed by the Dutch Government. The wage tax included in share-based payments over options exercised in the year ended December 31, 2012 amounted to €1.5 million.

In determining Adjusted EBITDA we also add back increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts. Following our annual review of the provision for onerous lease contracts, the Company reassessed and increased its provision by €0.8 million.

Other general and administrative costs increased to €28.9 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €27.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, an increase of 6%. Other general and administrative costs were 10% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 11% for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in the other general and administrative costs was due to an increase of €1.7 million in compensation costs resulting from headcount growth.

Net Finance Expense

Net finance expense decreased to €17.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 from €22.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, a decrease of 22%. Net finance expense was 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 9% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011. The decrease in net finance expense for the year ended December 31, 2012 was due primarily to the increased capitalization of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space.

We capitalized €9.2 million of borrowing costs during the period of construction of new data center space in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.6 million in the year ended December 31, 2011.

Income Taxes

Income tax expense was €15.8 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to €9.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. Income tax expense was 6% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2012 and 4% of revenue for the year ended December 31, 2011. The increase in income tax expenses was primarily due to an increase in profit before tax and a lower benefit as a result of the recognition of previously unrecognized tax losses, €0.7 million in the year ended December 31, 2012 and €2.7 million benefit realized in the year ended December 31, 2011.

We recorded current tax expenses of €6.2 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 and €5.0 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. We recorded deferred tax expense of €9.6 million for the year ended December 31, 2012 and €4.7 million for the year ended December 31, 2011, arising from the net impact of the utilization of deferred tax assets on tax loss carry-forwards as well as the initial recognition of deferred tax assets on tax loss carry-forwards.

Liquidity and Capital Resources

As of December 31, 2013, our total indebtedness consisted of (i) €325.0 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020, (ii) other debt and finance lease obligations totaling €22.1 million and (iii) mortgages totaling €24.8 million. The borrowing requirements of the Company are not subject to significant seasonality. Under our Revolving Facility, interest is based on a floating rate index. The interest expense on the remainder of our outstanding indebtedness is based on a fixed rate, except for our mortgages. Our PAR3, PAR5, AMS3 and AMS6 mortgages are subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The interest rates on the mortgages secured by our PAR3 and PAR5 properties have been swapped to a fixed rate for approximately 75% of the principal outstanding amounts for a period of 10 years.

 

47


Table of Contents

As at December 31, 2013, the interest payable under the Revolving Facility on (i) any EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (ii) any Danish kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of CIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (iii) any Swedish kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of STIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum and (iv) other applicable currencies including GBP amounts drawn at the rate of LIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum. The Revolving Facility was undrawn as at December 31, 2013.

Historically, we have made significant investments in our property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in order to expand our data center footprint and total Equipped Space as we have grown our business. In the year ended December 31, 2013 we invested €143.4 million in property, plant and equipment (€140.3 million) and intangible assets (€3.1 million), of which €135.1 million, including acquisition of AMS 3 data center (€8.8 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder was attributed to maintenance and other capital expenditures. In the year ended December 31, 2012 we invested €178.3 million in property, plant and equipment (€172.0 million) and intangible assets (€6.3 million), of which €164.7 million, including acquisition of AMS 6 data center (€7.5 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder was attributed to maintenance and other capital expenditures. In the year ended December 31, 2011 we invested €162.0 million in property, plant and equipment (€154.6 million) and intangible assets (€7.4 million), of which €145.7 million, including acquisition of PAR3 and PAR 5 data centers (€19.1 million), was attributed to expansion capital expenditures and the remainder to maintenance and other capital expenditures.

Although in any one year the amount of maintenance and replacement capital expenditures may vary, we expect that long-term such expenses will be between 3% and 5% of total revenue.

As of December 31, 2013, we had €45.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.1 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. Restricted cash is held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies. As of December 31, 2012, we had €68.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €5.0 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. As of December 31, 2011, we had €142.7 million of cash and cash equivalents of which €4.8 million was restricted cash, mostly denominated in euro. Our primary source of cash is from our financing activities and customer collections.

A limited amount of the Company’s total cash balance may be subject to certain restrictions in select countries that cannot be repatriated without a tax implication. The amount of cash that cannot be repatriated without a tax implication is negligible to the total liquidity of our business.

As of December 31, 2013 our €100.0 million Revolving Facility remained undrawn. Subsequent to the year ended December 31, 2013, as at April 8, 2014, we have drawn €30.0 million under the €100.0 million Revolving Facility to fund our data center expansions.

Sources and Uses of Cash

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Cash generated from operations

     102,671        111,701        90,048   

Net cash flows from operating activities

     72,563        89,082        64,043   

Net cash flows used in investing activities

     (143,381     (179,105     (161,011

Net cash flows from financing activities

     47,911        15,883        140,330   

Net cash flows from operating activities

The decrease in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 was primarily due to higher interest and income tax payments and decreased net working capital movements, which were partly offset by our improved operating performance. The increase in net cash flows from operating activities in the year ended December 31, 2012 compared to the year ended December 31, 2011 was primarily due to the improved operating performance and expansion of the Company.

 

48


Table of Contents

Net cash flows used in investing activities

The decrease in net cash flows used in investing activities in the year ended December 31, 2013 compared to the year ended December 31, 2012 was primarily due to lower capital expenditures in the expansion of existing data centers and the construction of new data centers. The increases in net cash flows used in investing activities in the years ended December 31, 2012 and December 31, 2011 were primarily due to capital expenditures in the expansion of existing data centers and the construction of new data centers.

Net cash flows from financing activities

Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2013 were principally the result of €317.1 million in net proceeds from the offering of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020 and the repayment of the €260.0 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017, €16.0 million in gross proceeds drawn under our new mortgage financings on our PAR3, PAR5 and AMS3 data center properties and €4.5 million in gross proceeds that we received from share options exercised by management and employees. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2012 were principally the result of €10.0 million in gross proceeds drawn under our new mortgage financing on our AMS6 data center property, and of €8.0 million in gross proceeds from the exercise of options. Net cash flows from financing activities during the year ended December 31, 2011 were primarily the result of €143.0 million in gross proceeds from the issuance of new shares in connection with the IPO partly offset by associated costs and fees.

We anticipate that cash flows from operating activities and from the utilization of credit available will be sufficient to meet our operating requirements on a short-term (twelve months) and long-term basis, including repayment of the current portion as of December 31, 2013 of our debt as it becomes due, and to complete our publicly announced expansion projects.

Optional Redemption of the Senior Secured Notes

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016 upon an Equity Offering

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may on any one or more occasions redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price of 106.000% of their principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, with the net proceeds from one or more Equity Offerings. We may only do this, however, if:

 

  (a) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes that were initially issued (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any additional notes) would remain outstanding immediately after the proposed redemption; and

 

  (b) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such Equity Offering.

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016

Prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may during each 12-month period commencing on July 3, 2013 redeem up to 10% of the aggregate principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any Additional Notes) at a redemption price equal to 103.000% of the principal amount redeemed plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date.

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may also redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the Applicable Redemption Premium and accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date.

Optional Redemption on or after July 15, 2016

At any time on or after July 15, 2016 and prior to maturity, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes. These redemptions will be in amounts of €100,000 or integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of their principal amount at maturity), plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, if redeemed during the 12-month period commencing on July 15 of the years set forth below.

 

49


Table of Contents

Year

   Redemption Price  

2016

     104.500

2017

     103.000

2018

     101.500

2019 and thereafter

     100.000

Any optional redemption or notice thereof may, at our discretion, be subject to one or more conditions precedent.

Redemption Upon Changes in Withholding Taxes

We may, at our option, redeem the Notes, in whole but not in part, at any time upon giving not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice to the Holders, at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof, together with accrued and unpaid interest thereon, if any, to the redemption date and all Additional Amounts, if any, then due and which will become due on the date of redemption as a result of the redemption or otherwise, if we determine in good faith that we or any guarantor is or, on the next date on which any amount would be payable in respect of the Notes, would be obliged to pay Additional Amounts which are more than a de minimis amount in respect of the Notes or the Guarantees pursuant to the terms and conditions thereof, which we or any guarantor cannot avoid by the use of reasonable measures available to it (including making payment through a paying agent located in another jurisdiction), as a result of:

 

  (a) any change in, or amendment to, the laws (or any regulations or rulings promulgated thereunder) of any relevant taxing jurisdiction affecting taxation which becomes effective on or after the date of the Indenture or, if the relevant taxing jurisdiction has changed since the date of the Indenture, on or after the date on which the then current relevant taxing jurisdiction became the relevant taxing jurisdiction under the Indenture; or

 

  (b) any change in the official application, administration, or interpretation of the laws, treaties, regulations or rulings of any relevant taxing jurisdiction (including a holding, judgment or order by a court of competent jurisdiction) on or after the date of the Indenture or, if the relevant taxing jurisdiction has changed since the date of the Indenture, on or after the date on which the then current relevant taxing jurisdiction became the relevant taxing jurisdiction under the Indenture (each of the foregoing clauses (a) and (b), a “Change in Tax Law”).

The Notes also contain standard change of control provisions which require the Company to make an offer to each holder of Notes to purchase such holder’s Notes in cash equal to 101% of the principal amount thereof, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the date of purchase, upon the occurrence of a change of control (as defined in the indenture for the Notes).

Definitions:

“Additional Amounts” means amounts the Issuer or Guarantor as the case may be, shall pay as may be necessary so that the net amount received by each Holder of the Notes (including Additional Amounts) after withholding or deduction on account of any such taxes from any payment made under or with respect to the Notes shall be not less than the amount that such Holder would have received if such taxes had not been required to be withheld or deducted.

“Applicable Redemption Premium” means, with respect to any Note on any redemption date, the greater of:

 

  a) 1.0% of the principal amount of the Note; and

 

  b) the excess of:

 

  (i) the present value at such redemption date of: (x) the redemption price of such Note at July 15, 2016 (such redemption price being set forth in the table appearing on the face of the Notes); plus (y) all required interest payments that would otherwise be due to be paid on such Note during the period between the redemption date and July 15, 2016 (excluding accrued but unpaid interest), computed using a discount rate equal to the bund rate plus 50 basis points; over

 

  (ii) the outstanding principal amount of the Note.

For the avoidance of doubt, calculation of the Applicable Redemptions Premium shall not be a duty or obligation of the trustee or any paying agent.

“Holder” means the person in whose name a Note is recorded on the registrar’s books.

 

50


Table of Contents

“Indenture” means the indenture dated as of July 3, 2013 among InterXion Holding N.V., as Issuer, InterXion Belgium N.V., InterXion Danmark ApS, InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited, InterXion Datacenters B.V., InterXion Deutschland GmbH, Interxion España S.A., InterXion France SAS, InterXion HeadQuarters B.V., InterXion Ireland Limited, InterXion Nederland B.V. and InterXion Operational B.V., as initial guarantors, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee, principal paying agent and transfer agent, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A., as registrar and Luxembourg paying agent and Barclays Bank PLC, as security trustee, as may be amended or supplemented from time to time.

“Issuer” means InterXion Holding N.V.

“Notes” means the €325,000,000 6.00% senior secured notes due 2020 and any additional Notes issued under the Indenture.

Restrictive Covenants Under Certain Financing Agreements

We have entered into a new revolving facility agreement (the “Revolving Facility Agreement”) between, among others, the Company as original borrower, the lenders named therein (the “Lenders”) and Barclays Bank PLC as agent and security trustee, pursuant to which a €100 million revolving facility (the “Revolving Facility”) will be made available to the Company.

Revolving Facility

Failure to comply with the financial covenants in our €100 million Revolving Facility Agreement would result in an event of default, which may cause all amounts outstanding under the facility to become immediately due and payable. Acceleration of such outstanding amounts under the facility may lead to an event of default under the indenture governing our €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes. Failure to satisfy the financial covenants in the indenture would result in our inability to incur additional debt under certain circumstances.

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains various covenants that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

    create certain liens;

 

    incur debt and/or guarantees;

 

    enter into transactions other than on arm’s-length basis;

 

    pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

    engage, in relation to the Company, in any business activity or own assets or incur liabilities not authorised by the Revolving Facility Agreement;

 

    sell certain kinds of assets;

 

    enter into any sale and leaseback transactions;

 

    make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

    substantially change the nature of the Company or the Group’s business;

 

    designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

    effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions including, in relation to the incurrence of additional debt, a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt and, if such debt is senior debt, a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net senior debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) to be less than 4.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt. The Revolving Facility Agreement also includes a leverage ratio financial covenant (tested on a quarterly basis) requiring total net debt (calculated as a ratio to pro forma EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00 to 1.00. In addition, the Company must ensure that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of adjusted EBITDA of the Group as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Group as a whole.

 

51


Table of Contents

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company or the failure by the Company to maintain its leverage ratio could result in a default under the Revolving Facility Agreement. As of December 31, 2013, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Revolving Facility Agreement. In addition, the Company does not anticipate any such breach or failure and believes that its ability to borrow funds under the Revolving Facility Agreement will not be adversely affected by the covenants in the next twelve months.

Senior Secured Notes Indenture

The Indenture contains covenants for the benefit of the holders of the Notes that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

    incur debt;

 

    enter into certain transactions with, or for the benefit of, an affiliate;

 

    create or incur certain liens;

 

    incur a changes in control;

 

    pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

    engage in any business activity not authorised by the Indenture;

 

    sell certain kinds of assets;

 

    impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Notes;

 

    enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

    make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

    designate unrestricted subsidiaries;

 

    effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets; and

 

    guarantee certain debt.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company could result in a default under the Indenture. As of December 31, 2013, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Indenture.

As of December 31, 2013, the leverage ratio and the consolidated senior leverage ratio were 2.51 compared to the maximum allowable threshold of 4.00. The Company’s consolidated fixed charge coverage ratio was 5.40 as of December 31, 2013, compared to a required ratio of greater than 2.00.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA

EBITDA for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 was €128.0 million, €109.2 million and €93.6 million, respectively, representing 42%, 39% and 38% of revenue, respectively. Adjusted EBITDA for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011 was €131.8 million, €115.0 million and €97.6 million respectively, representing 43%, 42% and 40% of revenue, respectively.

EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from sub-leases on unused data center sites. Adjusted EBITDA margin is defined as Adjusted EBITDA as a percentage of revenue. We present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €100 million Revolving Facility Agreement and €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020. However, other companies may present EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin differently than we do. EBITDA, Adjusted EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA margin are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

 

52


Table of Contents

The following table presents a reconciliation of EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA to operating profit according to our income statement, for the periods indicated:

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     6,824        31,631        25,572   

Net tax expense

     6,082        15,782        9,737   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     12,906        47,413        35,309   

Net finance expense

     57,453        17,746        22,784   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     70,359        65,159        58,093   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     57,670        43,993        35,552   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA

     128,029        109,152        93,645   

Share-based payments

     4,149        5,488        2,736   

Increase/(decrease) in provision for onerous lease contracts (1)

     —         838        18   

IPO transaction costs (2)

     —         —         1,725   

Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites (3)

     (341     (463     (487
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     131,837        115,015        97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) “Increase in provision for onerous lease contracts” does not reflect the deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.
(2) “IPO transaction costs” represents expenses associated with the write off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.
(3) “Income from sub-leases on unused data center sites” is reported within “Other income.”

Contractual Obligations and Off-Balance Sheet Arrangements

We lease a majority of our data centers and certain equipment under non-cancellable lease agreements. The following represents our debt maturities, financings, leases and other contractual commitments as of December 31, 2013:

 

     Total      Less than 1
year
     1 – 3 years      3 – 5 years      More than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Long-term debt obligations (1)

     493,120         22,798         45,652         53,472         371,198   

Capital (finance) lease obligations (2)

     30,661         1,726         3,581         3,911         21,443   

Operating lease obligations in relation to onerous lease contracts

     8,319         3,403         4,916         —           —     

Operating lease obligations (3)

     363,722         28,390         57,487         59,803         218,042   

Other contractual purchase commitments

     58,000         25,900         19,300         12,800         —     

Capital purchase commitments

     83,800         83,800         —           —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,037,622         166,017         130,936         129,986         610,683   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Notes:

(1) Long-term debt obligations include the Senior Secured Notes, the mortgages, loans from suppliers and/or landlords including the related interest.
(2) Capital (finance) lease obligations include future interest payments.
(3) Operating lease obligations include the lease of property and equipment. Of the total operating leases, as at December 31, 2013, an amount of €75.2 million is cancellable until January 1, 2016.

In connection with 18 of our data center and office leases, we entered into 15 irrevocable bank guarantees totaling €5.2 million with ABN AMRO Bank, Royal Bank of Scotland, La Caixa and Sparkasse. These bank guarantees were provided in lieu of cash deposits and automatically renew in successive one-year periods until the final lease expiration date. The bank guarantees are cash collateralized and the collateral is reflected as restricted cash on our statement of financial position. These contingent commitments are not reflected in the table above.

 

53


Table of Contents

Primarily as a result of our various data center expansion projects, as of December 31, 2013, we were contractually committed for €83.8 million of unaccrued capital expenditures, primarily for data center equipment not yet delivered and labor not yet provided, in connection with the work necessary to complete construction and open these data centers prior to making them available to customers for installation. This amount, which is expected to be paid in 2014, is reflected in the table above as “Capital purchase commitments.”

We have other non-capital purchase commitments in place as of December 31, 2013, such as commitments to purchase power in select locations, through the year 2014, and other open purchase orders, which contractually bind us for goods or services to be delivered or provided during the remainder of 2014 and beyond. Such other purchase commitments as of December 31, 2013, which totaled €58.0 million, are also reflected in the table above as “Other contractual purchase commitments.”

In addition, although we are not contractually obligated to do so, we expect to incur additional capital expenditures consistent with our disciplined expansion and conservative financial management in our various data center expansion projects during the remainder of 2014 in order to complete the work needed to open these data centers. These non-contractual capital expenditures are not reflected in the table above.

On January 18, 2013, the Group entered into a €10 million mortgage financing. The mortgage loans are secured by mortgages on the PAR3 land owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl and the PAR5 land owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, a pledge on the rights under the intergroup lease agreements between Interxion Real Estate II Sarl and Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, as lessors, and Interxion France SAS, as lessee, and are guaranteed by Interxion France SAS. The repayment of principal under the mortgage loans are required to be repaid in quarterly installments collectively amounting to €167,000 commencing April 18, 2013. The mortgage loans have a maturity of fifteen years and a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The mortgage loan agreements require the interest rate to be fixed for a minimum of 40% of the principal outstanding amount for a minimum of six years. In April 2013, the interest rate was fixed for approximately 75% of the principal outstanding amount for a period of 10 years.

On June 26, 2013, the Group entered into a €6 million mortgage financing. The mortgage loan is secured by a mortgage on the AMS3 property owned by Interxion Real Estate V B.V. and a pledge on the rights under the intergroup lease agreement between Interxion Real Estate V B.V., as lessor, and Interxion Nederland B.V., as lessee. The repayment of principal under this mortgage loan is required to be repaid in annual installments of €400,000 commencing May 1, 2014 and a final repayment of €4,400,000 due on May 1, 2018. The mortgage loan agreement includes a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 275 basis points. The mortgage loan contains a minimum debt service capacity ratio of 1:1 based on the operations of Interxion Real Estate V B.V.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Basis of Measurement

We present our financial statements in thousands of euro. They are prepared under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments. The financial statements are presented on the going-concern basis. Our functional currency is the euro.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by us and our wholly-owned subsidiaries and to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Use of Estimates and Judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates. Estimates and underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below.

 

54


Table of Contents

Property, Plant and Equipment Depreciation

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on our best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective. Furthermore, the valuation of some of the assets under construction requires judgments which are related to the probability of signing lease contracts and obtaining planning permits.

In the fourth quarter of the year ended December 31, 2013, the Company completed its annual review of the estimated useful life of its property, plant and equipment. As a result of the review, the Company concluded that certain of its existing assets were in use longer than originally anticipated. Therefore, the estimated useful life of certain of our property, plant and equipment has been extended. This change was accounted for as a change in accounting estimate on a prospective basis effective October 1, 2013 under IAS 8 change in accounting estimates. In the fourth quarter of the year ended December 31, 2013, we recorded approximately €2 million lower depreciation expenses due to the changes in the estimated useful lives of certain of our property, plant and equipment. On an annualized basis the impact would have been approximately €8 million lower depreciation charges.

Intangible Fixed Assets Amortization

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of intangible fixed assets are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on our best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is therefore subjective.

Lease Accounting

At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is or contains a lease. Classification of a lease contract (operating versus a finance lease) is based on the extent to which risks and rewards incidental to ownership of a leased asset lie with the lessor or the lessee. The classification of lease contracts includes the use of judgments and estimates.

Costs of Site Restoration

Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease and reviewed yearly based on rents, remaining terms, contracted extension possibilities and possibilities of lease terminations. A provision for site restoration is recognized when costs for restoring leasehold premises to their original condition at the end of the lease term is required to be made and the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be probable. The discounted cost of the liability is included in the related assets and is depreciated over the remaining estimated term of the lease. If the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be possible, rather than probable, it is disclosed as a contingent liability.

Provision for Onerous Lease Contracts

Provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted rental income to be received over the minimum sublease term in arriving at the amount of future losses. Currently, the provision for onerous lease contracts principally relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

Deferred Taxation

Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending upon local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Share-based Payments

Equity-settled share-based payments are issued to certain employees under the terms of the long term incentive plans. The charges related to equity-settled share-based payments, options to purchase ordinary shares, are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value at the grant date is determined using the Black Scholes model and is expensed over the vesting period. The value of the expense is dependent upon certain assumptions including the expected future volatility of the Company’s share price at the date of the grant.

 

55


Table of Contents

Senior Secured Notes due 2020

The Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are valued at amortized costs. The Senior Secured Notes due 2020 indenture includes optional redemption provisions, which allow us to redeem the Notes prior to their stated maturity. As part of the initial measurement of the amortized cost value of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020, we have assumed that the Notes will be held to maturity. If we redeem all or part of the Notes prior to their stated maturity the liability will be re-measured based on the original effective interest rate. The difference between the liability of excluding a change in assumed early redemption and the liability compared to including a change in assumed early redemption, will be reflected in our profit and loss.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations listed below were available for early adoption in the annual period beginning January 1, 2013. The Group has yet to adopt the following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations, as they were not compulsory:

 

Effective date

  

New standard or amendments

January 1, 2014    Amendments to IAS32: Off-setting financial assets and financial liabilities;
   Amendments to IFRS10, IFRS12 and IAS27: Investment entities; and
   Amendments to IAS36: Recoverable amount disclosures for non-financial assets.

 

56


Table of Contents

ITEM 6: DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

Introduction

We have a one-tier board structure (the “Board”) comprised of directors with the title “Executive Directors” and directors with the title “Non-Executive Directors” (together with the Executive Directors, the “Directors”). The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE.

Senior Management and Board of Directors

The following table lists the names, positions and ages of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors:

 

Name

   Age     

Position (2)

   Term Expiration Date (1)  

David Ruberg

     68       President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director      2016   

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

     46       Chief Financial Officer   

Jaap Camman

     47       Senior Vice President, Legal   

Jan Pieter Anten

     41       Vice President, Human Resources   

John C. Baker

     64       Chairman and Non-Executive Director      2016   

Robert M. Manning

     54       Non-Executive Director      2015   

David Lister

     55       Non-Executive Director      2014   

Cees van Luijk

     64       Non-Executive Director      2015   

Michel Massart

     62       Non-Executive Director      2014   

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville

     54       Non-Executive Director      2016   

 

Notes:

(1) The term of office expires at the annual general meeting of our shareholders held in the year indicated.
(2) A majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE. Of our Non-Executive Directors, Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning are considered to be non-independent as they are both general partners of Baker Capital affiliates. Our other Non-Executive Directors are all independent.

The business address of all members of our Senior Management and of our Directors is at our registered offices located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

The principal functions and experience of each of the members of our Senior Management and our Directors are set out below:

David Ruberg, President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director

David Ruberg joined us as President and Chief Executive Officer in November 2007 and became Vice-Chairman of the board of directors when it became a one-tier board in 2011. David served as Chairman of the Supervisory Board from 2002 to 2007 and on the Management Board from 2007 until the conversion into a one-tier board. David was affiliated with Baker Capital, a private equity firm from January 2002 until October 2007. From April 1993 until October 2001 he was Chairman, President and CEO of Intermedia Communications, a NASDAQ-listed broadband communications services provider, as well as Chairman of its majority-owned subsidiary, Digex, Inc., a NASDAQ-listed managed web hosting company. He began his career as a scientist at AT&T Bell Labs, contributing to the development of operating systems and computer languages. He holds a Bachelor’s Degree from Middlebury College and a Masters in Computer and Communication Sciences from the University of Michigan.

M.V. “Josh” Joshi, Chief Financial Officer

Josh Joshi joined us as Chief Financial Officer in August 2007. From June 2006 to December 2006 he was CFO of Leisure and Gaming plc, an online gaming and gambling business, and from April 2003 to May 2006 he was CFO of Telecity plc, a pan European carrier and cloud neutral data center business, both publicly traded companies on the London Stock Exchange. He was one of the founders and CFO of private-equity-backed Storm Telecommunications Limited, a U.S. and pan European data and network service provider. In his early career, Josh spent 8 years in professional practice, predominantly with Arthur Andersen. Josh holds a Bachelor’s Degree in Civil Engineering from Imperial College, London and is a chartered accountant.

 

57


Table of Contents

Jaap Camman, Senior Vice President, Legal

Jaap Camman is responsible for all legal and corporate affairs across the Group. He joined us in November 1999 as Manager Legal and has been our Executive Vice President Legal since July 2002. Before joining us, he worked for the Dutch Government from February 1994 until October 1999. His latest position was Deputy Head of the Insurance Division within The Netherlands Ministry of Finance. Jaap holds a Law Degree from Utrecht University.

Jan-Pieter Anten, Vice President, Human Resources

Jan-Pieter Anten joined us as Vice President Human Resources in October 2011. Prior to joining us, Jan-Pieter worked for Hay Group, a global management consulting firm, as Director International Strategic Clients Europe, where he led major accounts within the European market. Prior to that, he held the position of Vice President Human Resources at Synthon, an international organization with worldwide affiliates. Before Synthon he worked for Hay Group as a Senior Consultant. Jan-Pieter holds a degree from the University of Utrecht.

John C. Baker, Chairman and Non-Executive Director

Mr. Baker serves as Chairman of the board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Baker served as Chairman of our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2007. Mr. Baker founded Baker Capital in 1995. Mr. Baker is a member of the board of Wine.com and University of Cincinnati IAC. Mr. Baker is a graduate of Harvard College and Harvard Business School.

Robert M. Manning, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Manning serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Manning served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Mr. Manning is a general partner with Baker Capital. Prior to joining Baker Capital, Mr. Manning was CFO of Intermedia Communications, Inc., a broadband communications service provider, from 1996 to 2001, and a director of its majority-owned subsidiary Digex, Inc., a provider of managed web hosting services, from 1998 to 2001. Prior to Intermedia, Mr. Manning was a founding executive of DMX, Inc., the first satellite- and cable-delivered digital radio network, from 1990 to 1996. Prior to DMX, Mr. Manning worked as an investment banker to the cable television and communications industries. Mr. Manning serves on the boards of Wine.com (Chairman) and Core Value Software (Chairman). He is a graduate of Williams College.

David Lister, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Lister serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in June 2011. Mr. Lister joined National Grid as Global Chief Information Officer in March 2009. He is also a Non-Executive Director of the UK Government’s Department of Work and Pensions. Before joining National Grid, David held CIO positions at a number of leading international companies including Royal Bank of Scotland, Reuters, Boots, Glaxo, Wellcome, and Guinness plc. Prior to these assignments, he held a series of increasingly senior positions in Information Technology across a range of industries including Chemicals, Construction, and Electronics as well as time in Management Consultancy with Coopers & Lybrand. He was a Non-Executive Director of IXEurope, a European IT Services company, prior to its acquisition. He is a member of several IT consultative boards including the Board of eSkills, the Skills Sector Council for Business and Information Technology in the UK. Before entering industry, David studied Architecture at the University of Edinburgh.

Cees van Luijk, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Van Luijk serves on our board of directors. Prior to our conversion into a one-tier board of directors in January 2011, Mr. Van Luijk served on our Supervisory Board, which he joined in 2002. Since 2003 he has been Chairman and co-managing partner of Capital-C Ventures, a Benelux-focused technology venture capital firm. Mr. Van Luijk was formerly the CEO of Getronics between 1999 and 2001 and prior to that a member of the Global Leadership Team of PricewaterhouseCoopers. Mr. Van Luijk serves on the boards of PontMeyer NV, Holland Colours NV and Broadview Holding BV. Mr. Van Luijk is a Certified Public Accountant in The Netherlands and holds a Master’s Degree in Business Economics from the Erasmus University Rotterdam.

Michel Massart, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Massart serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2012. He is a former managing partner of PricewaterhouseCoopers (PWC) in Belgium, where he held various positions in the field of audit, specializing in Technology and FMCG companies and the Public Sector. From 1988 to 1996, he also assumed HR responsibilities for PWC Belgium. In 1997,

 

58


Table of Contents

he set up the Corporate Finance Department of PWC Belgium specializing in M&A, valuations and corporate restructuring. From 2003 to 2011, he was a director and chairman of the audit committee of Millicom International Cellular S.A., a mobile telephone operator in emerging countries listed on the NASDAQ and Stockholm stock exchanges. He is a former member of the Board of the Belgian Institute of Statutory Auditors. He is currently a professor at Solvay Brussels School of Economics and Management in Brussels, Belgium where he lectures on accounting, risk management and corporate governance.

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville, Non-Executive Director

Mr. Mandeville serves on our board of directors, to which he was appointed in January 2011. From October 2008 to December 2010, Mr. Mandeville served as Chief Financial Officer and board member of MACH S.à.r.l. He served as an Executive Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Global Crossing Holdings Ltd/Global Crossing Ltd., from February 2005 to September 2008. Mr. Mandeville joined Global Crossing in February 2005, where he was responsible for all of its financial operations. He served as Chief Financial Officer of Singapore Technologies Telemedia Pte. Ltd./ST Telemedia from July 2002 to January 2005. In 1992, he joined British Telecom and served in various capacities covering all sectors of the telecommunications market (including wireline, wireless and multi-media) in Europe, Asia and the Americas. From 1992 to June 2002, Mr. Mandeville served in various capacities at British Telecom PLC, including President of Asia Pacific from July 2000 to June 2002, Director of International Development Asia Pacific from June 1999 to July 2000 and General Manager, Special Projects from January 1998 to July 1999. Mr. Mandeville was a Senior Consultant with Coopers & Lybrand, Belgium from 1989 to 1992. He graduated from the University Saint-Ignatius Antwerp with a Masters in Applied Economics in 1982 and a Special degree in Sea Law in 1985.

Board Powers and Function

Our Board is responsible for the overall conduct of our business and has the powers, authorities and duties vested in it by and pursuant to the relevant laws of The Netherlands and our articles of association. In all its dealings, our Board shall be guided by the interests of our Group as a whole, including but not limited to our shareholders. Our Board has the final responsibility for the management, direction and performance of us and our Group. Our Executive Director will be responsible for the day-to-day management of the Company. Our Non-Executive Directors will supervise the Executive Director and our general affairs and provide general advice to the Executive Director.

Our CEO is the general manager of our business, subject to the control of our Board, and is entrusted with all of our Board’s powers, authorities and discretions (including the power to sub-delegate) delegated by the full Board from time to time by a resolution of our Board. Matters expressly delegated to our CEO are validly resolved upon by our CEO and no further resolutions, approvals or other involvement of our Board is required. Our Board may also delegate authorities to its committees. Upon any such delegation our Board supervises the execution of its responsibilities by our CEO and/or our Board committees. It remains ultimately responsible for the fulfillment of its duties by them.

Our articles of association provide that in the event we have a conflict of interest with one or more Directors, we may still be represented by the Board or an Executive Director. In the event of a conflict of interest, however, our general meeting of shareholders has the power to designate one or more other persons to represent us. Our articles of association provide that in the event we have a conflict of interest with one or more Directors, we may still be represented by the Board or an Executive Director. In the event of a conflict of interest, however, our general meeting of shareholders has the power to designate one or more other persons to represent us. Under Dutch law, a Director is prohibited from participating in any Board discussion or decision making pertaining to a subject in which such director has a conflict of interest.

Board Meetings and Decisions

All resolutions of our Board are adopted by an absolute majority of votes cast in a meeting at which at least the majority of the Directors are present or represented. A member of the Board may authorize another member of the Board to represent him/her at the Board meeting and vote on his/her behalf. Each Director is entitled to one vote (provided that, for the avoidance of doubt, a member representing one or more absent members of the Board by written power of attorney will be entitled to cast the vote of each such absent member). If there is a tie, the Chairman has the casting vote.

Our Board meets as often as it deems necessary or appropriate or upon the request of any member of our Board. Our Board has adopted rules, which contain additional requirements for our decision-making process, the convening of meetings and, through separate resolution by our Board, details on the assignment of duties and a division of responsibilities between Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors. Our Board has appointed one of the Directors as Chairman and one of more Directors as Vice-Chairman of the Board. Our Board is further assisted by a corporate secretary. The corporate secretary may be a member of our Board or our Senior Management and is appointed by our Board.

 

59


Table of Contents

Composition of Board

The majority of our Directors are independent as required by the NYSE.

Our Board consists of a minimum of one Executive Director and a minimum of three Non-Executive Directors, provided that our Board is comprised of a maximum of 7 (seven) members. The number of Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors is determined by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that the majority of our Board must consist of Non-Executive Directors. Only natural persons can be Non-Executive Directors. The Executive Directors and Non-Executive Directors as such are appointed by our general meeting of shareholders, provided that our Board is classified, with respect to the term for which each member of our Board will severally be appointed and serve as member of our Board, into three classes, as nearly equal in number as reasonably possible.

The class I Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2014, the class II Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2015, and the class III Directors serve for a term expiring at the annual general meeting of shareholders in 2016. At each annual general meeting of shareholders, Directors appointed to succeed those Directors whose terms expire are appointed to serve for a term of office to expire at the third succeeding annual general meeting of shareholders after their appointment. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Directors appointed to each class continue to serve their term in office until their successors are duly appointed and qualified or until their earlier resignation, death or removal. If a vacancy occurs, any Director so appointed to fill that vacancy serves its term in office for the remainder of the full term of the class of Directors in which the vacancy occurred.

Our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a Director. Any nomination by our Board may consist of one or more candidates per vacant seat. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned will be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and will be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates will not be binding. See Item 7 “Major Shareholder and Related Party Transactions—Related Party Transactions—Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital” for nomination rights granted to Baker Capital.

Directors may be suspended or removed at any time by our general meeting of shareholders. A resolution to suspend or remove a Director must be adopted by at least a two-thirds majority of the votes cast, provided such majority represents more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital. Executive Directors may also be suspended by the Board.

Directors’ Insurance and Indemnification

In order to attract and retain qualified and talented persons to serve as members of our Board or our Senior Management, we currently do and expect to continue to provide such persons with protection through a directors’ and officers’ insurance policy. Under this policy, any of our past, present or future Directors and members of our Senior Management will be insured against any claim made against any one of them for any wrongful act in their respective capacities.

Under our articles of association, we are required to indemnify each current and former member of our Board who was or is involved, in that capacity, as a party to any actions or proceedings, against all conceivable financial loss or harm suffered in connection with those actions or proceedings, unless it is ultimately determined by a court having jurisdiction that the damage was caused by intent ( opzet ), willful recklessness ( bewuste roekeloosheid ) or serious culpability ( ernstige verwijtbaarheid ) on the part of such member.

Insofar as indemnification of liabilities arising under the Securities Act may be permitted to members of our Board, officers or persons controlling us pursuant to the foregoing provisions, we have been informed that, in the opinion of the SEC, such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act and is therefore unenforceable.

Board Committees

Our Board has established an audit committee, a compensation committee and a nominating committee. The audit committee is in compliance with the NYSE listed company board committee independence requirements. The compensation committee and the nominating committee do not meet the NYSE independence standard. Rule 303A permits foreign private issuers like us to follow home country practice with regard to, amongst others, the independence requirement for the compensation committee and for the nominating committee. Our Board may also establish such other committees as it deems appropriate, in accordance with applicable law and regulations and our articles of association and any applicable Board rules.

 

60


Table of Contents

Many of the NYSE corporate governance rules do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE rules, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Audit Committee

Our audit committee consists of three independent Directors, Cees van Luijk, Michel Massart and Jean Mandeville, with Cees van Luijk serving as the chairperson of the audit committee. The audit committee is independent as defined under and required by Rule 10A-3 under the U.S. Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (“Rule 10A-3”) and the NYSE. Our board of directors has determined that Cees van Luijk qualifies as an “audit committee financial expert,” as that term is defined in Item 16A of Form 20-F. The audit committee has the responsibility, subject to Board and shareholder approval, for the appointment, compensation, retention and oversight of the work of our independent registered public accounting firm, KPMG Accountants N.V. In addition, approval of the audit committee is required prior to our entering into any related-party transaction. It is also responsible for “whistle-blowing” procedures, certain other compliance matters and the evaluation of the Company’s policies with respect to risk assessment and risk management.

Compensation Committee

Our compensation committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and David Lister, who serves as the chairperson of the compensation committee, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker. Among other things, the compensation committee reviews, and makes recommendations to the Board regarding, the compensation and benefits of our CEO and our Board. The compensation committee also administers the issuance of stock options and other awards under our equity incentive plan and evaluates and reviews policies relating to the compensation and benefits of our employees and consultants.

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE rules, which govern compensation committees, the Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the NYSE independence standard, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE rules.

Nominating Committee

Our nominating committee consists of two independent Directors, Cees van Luijk and Jean Mandeville, and one non-independent Director, John C. Baker, who serves as the chairman of the nominating committee. The nominating committee is responsible for, among other things, developing and recommending to our Board our corporate governance guidelines, identifying individuals qualified to become Directors, overseeing the evaluation of the performance of the Board, selecting the Director nominees for the next annual meeting of shareholders, and selecting director candidates to fill any vacancies on the Board.

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE rules, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees, the Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the NYSE independence standard, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE rules.

Compensation

The aggregate annual compensation of our Senior Management and Non-Executive Directors for the year ended December 31, 2013 was approximately €4.5 million.

The aggregate compensation of our Non-Executive, Executive Directors, and other Senior Management members for the year ended December 31, 2013 is set forth below.

 

61


Table of Contents
     Annual
compensation
     Bonus      Share-
based
payment
charges
     Termination /
post-
employment
benefits
     Total  
                          (€’000)         

D.C. Ruberg

     540         355         277         —           1,172   

J.C. Baker

     50         —           68         —           118   

R.M. Manning

     40         —           68         —           108   

C.G. van Luijk

     70         —           68         —           138   

D. Lister

     45         —           26         —           71   

M. Massart

     55         —           47         —           102   

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     55         —           26         —           81   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Subtotal

     855         355         580         —           1,790   

Senior Management (excluding D.C. Ruberg)

     1,196         285         1,022         113         2,616   

Crisis wage tax

     125         —           —           —           125   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     2,176         640         1,602         113         4,531   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

In 2013, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers over the total compensation over €150,000 annually, including the benefit from options exercised. The crisis wage tax payable over key management compensation including the benefit from options exercised is presented as “Crisis wage tax” in the table above.

None of the non-executive directors is entitled to any contractually agreed benefit upon termination. Upon termination, the Executive Director is entitled to a contractually agreed benefit compensation equal to twelve months base salary.

Employee Share Ownership Plans

Pursuant to the recommendation of our Compensation Committee, our Board adopted the 2013 International Equity Based Incentive Plan (the “2013 Plan”) on May 4, 2013. The 2013 Plan was implemented to replace the InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option Plan and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”).

Pursuant to the further recommendation of our Compensation Committee, our Board amended the 2013 Plan and adopted the 2013 Amended International Equity Based Incentive Plan (the “Amended 2013 Plan”) on October 30, 2013. The Amended 2013 Plan provides the Compensation Committee with the authority to award options, performance shares and restricted shares to certain employees and advisors.

We implemented the Amended 2013 Plan to attract and retain certain employees, advisors and board members and reward them for their contributions to the Group. The Amended 2013 Plan is designed to act as an incentive scheme, whereby various equity-based instruments may be awarded from time-to-time in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Amended 2013 Plan. The 2013 Plan was discontinued following the implementation of the Amended 2013 Plan, however, outstanding options will continue to be governed by the terms of the 2013 Plan until such options have been exercised in full.

The total number of shares which may be granted pursuant to the Amended 2013 Plan is 5,273,371 shares (the “Share Pool”). The Share Pool includes grants made under the 2011 International Option and Master Award Plan, the 2013 International Equity Based Incentive Plan and the 2013 Amended International Equity Based Incentive Plan. Shares subject to awards that expire, terminate or are otherwise surrendered, canceled or forfeited under the 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan, the 2013 International Equity Based Incentive Plan or the 2013 Amended International Equity Based Incentive Plan are returned to the Share Pool. Taking into account the grants made under those plans, as at December 31, 2013, approximately 3.1 million shares are available for grant.

Prior to adopting the 2013 Plan and the Amended 2013 Plan, we implemented the InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option Plan and Incentive Master Award Plan (the “2011 Plan”), pursuant to which our Board could grant options for ordinary shares to certain eligible persons following completion of the initial public offering. The 2011 Plan was discontinued following the implementation of the 2013 Plan, however, outstanding options will continue to be governed by the terms of the 2013 Plan until such options have been exercised in full.

The 2008 Plan was discontinued following our initial public offering, however, outstanding options will continue to be governed by the terms of the 2008 Plan until such options have been exercised in full.

 

62


Table of Contents

Corporate Governance

The Dutch Corporate Governance Code, as revised, became effective on January 1, 2009, and applies to all Dutch companies listed on a government-recognized stock exchange, whether in the Netherlands or elsewhere. The Dutch Corporate Governance Code is based on a “comply or explain” principle, under which all companies filing annual reports in the Netherlands must disclose whether or not they are in compliance with the various rules of the Dutch Corporate Governance Code and explain the reasons for any instance of noncompliance.

With exception to Sections 303A.04 and 303A.05 of the NYSE rules, which govern nominating/corporate governance committees and compensation committees, respectively, we intend to comply with the NYSE rules. We also intend to comply with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code, but where the NYSE rules conflict with the Dutch Corporate Governance Code we intend to comply with the NYSE rules. For further information with respect to the composition of our Board committees, see the discussed above under “—Board Committees.”

Stock Options

As of March 1, 2014 our directors and senior managers were granted the awards (options and restricted shares) as set forth below. The awards with exercise prices denominated in $ are awards granted under the “2011 Plan”, the “2013 Plan” and the “Amended 2013 Plan.” The restricted shares have been granted under the “2013 Plan.”

The ordinary shares beneficially owned by our directors and senior managers are disclosed in Item 7 “Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions”.

 

Name

   Awards granted 
outstanding
     Awards granted 
outstanding, but
unvested
     Award
Exercise 
Price(s)
     Award
Expiration 
Date
 

D. Ruberg

     600,000         —         $ 14.74         November 5, 2019   

J. Baker

     5,000         —         $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

R. Manning

     5,000         —         $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

D. Lister

     15,000         5,000       $ 14.74         June 29, 2016   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

C. van Luijk

     5,000         —         $ 18.01         June 27, 2017   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

M. Massart

     15,000         5,000       $ 13.92         January 20, 2017   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

J.F.H.P. Mandeville

     15,000         —         $ 13.00         June 29, 2016   
     2,047         2,047       $ 0.00         June 2014 (1)  

J. Joshi

     100,000         68,750       $ 10.00         October 31, 2020   

J. Camman

     50,000         34,375       $ 10.00         October 31, 2020   

J.P. Anten

     30,000         26,250       $ 11.50         October 10, 2019   
     20,000         15,000       $ 10.00         January 11, 2021   

 

Notes:

 

(1) Represent awards of restricted shares to Non-executive Directors that were approved at the General Meeting of Shareholders on June 26, 2013. The awards, subject to the Non-executive Directors having served the entire period, will vest at the next Annual General Meeting of Shareholders, which is anticipated to be held in June 2014.

Employees

For a discussion of the number of employees, see Item 4 “Information on the Company—Employees.”

 

63


Table of Contents

ITEM 7: MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

Major Shareholders

The following table sets forth information with respect to Directors, Senior Management and major shareholders, meaning shareholders that are beneficial owners of 5% or more of our ordinary shares as of March 1, 2014.

Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with rules of the SEC and generally includes any shares over which a person exercises sole or shared voting and/or investment power. Ordinary shares subject to options and warrants currently exercisable or exercisable within 60 days are deemed outstanding and have therefore been included in the number of shares beneficially owned and the calculation of the percentage ownership of the person holding the options but are not deemed outstanding for computing the percentage ownership of any other person. Except as otherwise indicated, we believe the beneficial owners of the ordinary shares listed below, based on information furnished by them, have sole voting and investment power with respect to the number of shares listed opposite their names. Except as otherwise set forth below, the address of each beneficial owner is c/o InterXion Holding N.V., Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands.

 

     Shares
Beneficially Owned
 

Name of Beneficial Owner (1)

   Number      Percent
(%)
 

5% Shareholders

     

Baker Capital (2)(3)

     20,657,892         30.00

Lamont Finance N.V. (2)(3)

     20,641,613         29.97

Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. (2) (3) (4)

     16,279          

Directors and Senior Management

     

David Ruberg (4) (5)

     1,375,000         2.00

John C. Baker (3) (4)

     65,618          

Robert M. Manning (3) (4)

     17,191          

David Lister (4)

     10,000          

Cees van Luijk (4)

     160,486          

Michel Massart (4)

     10,000          

Jean F.H.P. Mandeville (4)

     15,000          

Josh Joshi (6)

     37,500          

Jaap Camman (7)

     18,750          

Jan Pieter Anten (8)

     13,750          

 

Notes:

 

(1) In addition to the information in the table above, on April 7, 2014, a Schedule 13G was filed on behalf of Eminence Capital, LLC, Eminence GP, LLC and Ricky C. Sandler, indicating Eminence Capital, LLC beneficially owns 3,889,362 ordinary shares, Eminence GP, LLC beneficially owns 3,486,181 ordinary shares and Ricky C. Sandler beneficially owns 3,889,362 ordinary shares.
(2) The address of Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. is 575 Madison Avenue, New York, NY 10022.
(3) The board of managers of the general partners of each of BCF II and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P. consists of John C. Baker, Robert M. Manning and Henry G. Baker and each manager may be deemed to share voting and dispositive control over the shares held by those entities. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning serves as one of our directors. Each of Mr. Baker and Mr. Manning disclaims beneficial ownership of shares held by Baker Capital except to the extent of his pecuniary interest therein.
(4) David Ruberg, Jean Mandeville, David Lister, Michel Massart, Mr. Cees van Luijk, John Baker and Rob Manning own our shares or share options. Messrs. Baker and Manning are associated with (i) Baker Capital, through Lamont Finance N.V., which owned 29.97% of our shares as of March 1, 2014; and (ii) Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., which owned less than one percent of our shares as of March 1, 2014.
(5) David Ruberg is our President, Chief Executive Officer, Vice-Chairman and Executive Director. David Ruberg’s shares beneficially owned consist of our ordinary shares and options for our ordinary shares.
(6) Josh Joshi is our Chief Financial Officer. Josh Joshi’s total shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(7) Jaap Camman is our Senior Vice President of Legal and Corporate Secretary. Jaap Camman’s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.
(8) Jan Pieter Anten is our Vice President of Human Resources. Jan Pieter Anten’s shares beneficially owned consist of options for our ordinary shares.

We effected a registered public offering of our ordinary shares and our ordinary shares began trading on the NYSE on January 28, 2011. Accordingly, certain of our principal shareholders acquired their ordinary shares either at or subsequent to this

 

64


Table of Contents

time. Our major shareholders have the same voting rights as our other shareholders, but Baker Capital currently has the right to nominate a majority of the members of our Board, as described below in “Related Party Transactions – Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital.” As of March 1, 2014, we had 7 shareholders of record. Three of the shareholders of record were located in the United States and held in the aggregate 68,781,566 ordinary shares representing approximately 99.9% of our outstanding ordinary shares. However, the United States shareholders of record include Cede & Co., which, as nominee for The Depository Trust Company, is the record holder of 48,123,674 ordinary shares. Accordingly, we believe that the shares held by Cede & Co. include ordinary shares beneficially owned by both holders in the United States and non-United States beneficial owners. As a result, these numbers may not accurately represent the number of beneficial owners in the United States.

Related Party Transactions

Shareholders Agreement with Baker Capital

On February 2, 2011, we entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our Board. As such, upon consummation of the initial public offering, Baker Capital will be entitled to designate four nominees for the seven-member board. At such time that a majority of our Board is required to be independent in accordance with the listing requirements of the NYSE, Baker Capital will remain entitled to designate for nomination four of the seven members of the Board, provided, that at least two of the Baker Capital nominees shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the corporate governance rules of the NYSE.

For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination three of the seven members of our Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors as set forth in the applicable listing standards. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

Furthermore, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

In addition, as long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of our outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that, when required by the transition provisions for companies listing in conjunction an initial public offering, such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

In the event of a change in the number of members of our Board, Baker Capital will have the right to designate a proportional amount of the members of the nominees for our Board to most closely approximate the rights described above.

In a letter dated February 26, 2014, Lamont Finance, N.V. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., the private equity funds affiliated with Baker Capital (collectively “Baker”), notified the board of directors of the Company that, pursuant to the shareholders agreement, they intend to designate two additional individuals to be elected at the Company’s 2014 Annual General Meeting, each of whom must meet the standards for independence under the requirements of the NYSE. The letter further states, “Baker believes all stakeholders would benefit from a newly constituted Board that is focused on enhancing corporate governance and is open to all avenues for creating and maximizing shareholder value.” As of the date of this report, the Company has not received the names of any additional nominees from Baker.

Registration Rights Agreement

We have entered into a registration rights agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital (the “Baker Shareholders”), pursuant to which 30,801,491 ordinary shares are entitled to the registration rights described below. Of these shares 10,143,599 have been distributed by Baker Capital to its limited partners on March 15, 2012.

Demand registration rights.  We are required to effect up to four registrations at the request of one or more of the Baker Shareholders holding ordinary shares representing in the aggregate a majority of ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders (the “Majority Baker Shareholders”). We are not required to effect a registration within 90 days after the effective date of a registration statement. We may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan or pursuant to a registration on Form F-4 or S-4) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

In the event that the managing underwriter advises us that the number of ordinary shares requested to be included in such registration exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting the underwriter’s ability to effect an orderly distribution of such ordinary shares, we will include in the registration statement the number of ordinary shares that, in the opinion of the managing underwriter, can be sold. The allocation of such ordinary shares to be included in such registration statement will be done on a pro rata basis.

 

65


Table of Contents

Registration on Form F-3.  If we are eligible under applicable securities laws to file a registration statement on Form F-3, we will file a registration statement on Form F-3 at the request of the Majority Baker Shareholders. These shareholders may request such a registration no more than once every six months. There is no limit to the number of such registrations that these shareholders may request. In connection with the foregoing registrations: (1) we are not required to effect a registration pursuant to a request by shareholders holding registrable securities if, within the twelve month period preceding the date of such request, we have already effected one registration on Form F-3, (2) each registration on Form F-3 must be for anticipated proceeds of at least U.S. $500,000, and (3) we may not effect a registration for our own account (other than a registration effected solely with respect to an employee benefit plan) within 90 days after any such registration without the consent of the Majority Baker Shareholders.

Piggyback registration rights.  Baker Shareholders also have the right to request the inclusion of their registrable shares in any registration statements filed by us in the future for the purposes of a public offering, subject to specified exceptions. In the event that the managing underwriter advises that the number of our securities included in such a request exceeds the number that can be sold in such offering without adversely affecting such underwriters’ ability to effect an orderly distribution of our securities, the shares will be included in the registration statement in the following order of preference: first, the shares that we wish to include for our own account and second, ordinary shares held by the Baker Shareholders on a pro rata basis.

Termination. All registration rights granted to holders of registrable shares terminate when all ordinary shares resulting from the conversion of the Preferred Shares have been effectively registered under the Securities Act, or, with respect to any holder, can be sold freely during a three-month period without registration under the Securities Act.

Expenses.  We will be required to pay all expenses relating to up to two demand registration and up to two registrations on Form F-3. We will be required to pay all expenses relating to piggyback registrations.

 

66


Table of Contents

ITEM 8: FINANCIAL INFORMATION

Reference is made to Item 18 for a list of all financial statements filed as part of this annual report. For information on legal proceedings, please refer to Item 4 “Information on the Company,” above.

Dividends and Dividend Policy

We have never declared or paid cash dividends on our ordinary shares. We currently intend to retain any future earnings to fund the development and growth of our business and we do not currently anticipate paying dividends on our ordinary shares. Our board of directors will have the discretion to determine to what extent profits shall be retained by way of a reserve. The remaining profits will be at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders for distribution of a dividend or to be added to the reserves or for such other purposes as our general meeting of shareholders decides, upon a proposal of our board of directors. Our board of directors, in determining whether to recommend to our shareholders the payment of dividends, will consider our ability to declare and pay dividends in light of our future operations and earnings, capital expenditure requirements, general financial conditions, legal and contractual restrictions and other factors that it may deem relevant. In addition, our outstanding €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 and our credit agreements limit our ability to pay dividends and we may in the future become subject to debt instruments or other agreements that further limit our ability to pay dividends. To the extent we pay dividends in euro, the amount of U.S. dollars realized by shareholders will vary depending on the rate of exchange between U.S. dollars and euro. Shareholders will bear any costs related to the conversion of euro into U.S. dollars.

We are a holding company incorporated in The Netherlands. Under Dutch law, we may only pay dividends out of our profits or our share premium account subject to our ability to service our debts as they fall due in the ordinary course of our business and subject to Dutch law and our articles of association. See Item 10 “Additional Information—General.” We rely on dividends paid to us by our wholly-owned subsidiaries in the United Kingdom, France, Germany, Austria, The Netherlands, Ireland, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Belgium and Denmark to fund the payment of dividends, if any, to our shareholders.

 

67


Table of Contents

ITEM 9: THE OFFER AND LISTING

Markets

Our ordinary shares began trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “INXN” on January 28, 2011.

New York Stock Exchange Trading History

The following table shows, for the periods indicated, the high and low sales prices per ordinary share as reported on the New York Stock Exchange.

 

Yearly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2013

     27.67         20.67   
Quarterly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2014

     

First quarter

     25.81         23.25   

Second quarter (through April 4, 2014)

     24.58         23.69   

2013

     

First quarter

     26.28         22.56   

Second quarter

     27.67         22.73   

Third quarter

     27.32         22.24   

Fourth quarter

     23.61         20.67   

2012

     

First quarter

     18.10         13.57   

Second quarter

     20.28         15.82   

Third quarter

     22.72         17.49   

Fourth quarter

     23.76         20.26   
Monthly highs and lows    High      Low  
     ($ per ordinary shares)  

2014

     

January

     25.81         23.92   

February

     25.12         23.99   

March

     23.98         23.25   

April (through April 4, 2014)

     24.58         23.69   

2013

     

October

     23.48         22.26   

November

     23.61         21.98   

December

     23.61         20.67   

On April 4, 2014, the closing price of InterXion’s ordinary shares listed on The New York Stock Exchange was $23.69.

 

68


Table of Contents

ITEM 10: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Material contracts

The Intercreditor Agreement dated as of July 3, 2013, among InterXion Holding N.V. and certain of its subsidiaries and Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee.

The intercreditor agreement entered into in connection with the Revolving Facility Agreement and the Indenture is referred to in this description as the “Intercreditor Agreement” and InterXion Holding N.V. and each of its subsidiaries that incurs any liability or provides any guarantee under the Revolving Facility Agreement or the Indenture is referred to in this description as a “Debtor” and are referred to collectively as the “Debtors.”

In connection with the Revolving Facility Agreement, InterXion Holding N.V. and certain of its subsidiaries entered into an English law governed intercreditor agreement governing the relationships and relative priorities among: (i) the Lenders (as defined below); (ii) original hedge counterparty or other persons that accede to the intercreditor agreement as counterparties to certain hedging agreements (the “Hedging Agreements”; the original hedge counterparty and any other person that accedes to the intercreditor agreement as counterparties to the Hedging Agreements are referred to in such capacity as the “Hedge Counterparties”); (iii) the holders of the Senior Secured Notes and (iv) intra-group creditors and debtors. In addition, the intercreditor agreement regulates the relationship between InterXion Holding N.V. and its subsidiaries, on the one hand, and shareholders of InterXion Holding N.V. and related parties, on the other hand.

The Intercreditor Agreement, among other things, sets out:

 

    the relative ranking of certain indebtedness of the Debtors (including under the Revolving Facility Agreement and the Senior Secured Notes);

 

    the relative ranking of certain security granted by the Debtors;

 

    when payments can be made in respect of certain indebtedness of the Debtors (including the Revolving Facility Agreement and the Senior Secured Notes);

 

    when enforcement actions can be taken in respect of that indebtedness and the distribution of any enforcement proceeds;

 

    the terms pursuant to which that indebtedness will be subordinated upon the occurrence of certain insolvency events;

 

    turnover provisions; and

 

    when security and guarantees will be released to permit a sale of the collateral.

The Intercreditor Agreement allows for the issuance of senior unsecured notes by InterXion Holding N.V., and for such senior unsecured notes to be guaranteed by the Debtors on a subordinated basis, and includes customary provisions in relation to issuance of the senior unsecured notes. By accepting a note, holders of the notes shall be deemed to have agreed to, and accepted the terms and conditions of, the Intercreditor Agreement.

Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of June 17, 2013, among InterXion Holding N.V. and the financial institutions party thereto, as Lenders and Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and security trustee.

On June 17, 2013, we have entered into an English law governed revolving facility agreement (the “Revolving Facility Agreement”) between, among others, InterXion Holding N.V., the lenders named therein (the “Lenders”) and Barclays Bank PLC as agent (the “Agent”) and security trustee, pursuant to which a €100,000,000 revolving facility (the “Revolving Facility”) has been made available to the Company.

Borrowings under the Revolving Facility will be used to finance our general corporate and working capital needs (including capital expenditure, acquisitions and investments, which are not prohibited by the Revolving Facility Agreement), but not the prepayment, repayment or redemption of bonds, term debt or replacement debt (or any interest in any bonds, term debt or replacement debt) and the purchase of bonds, term debt or replacement debt in open market purchases or otherwise (as such terms are defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement).

 

69


Table of Contents

The Revolving Facility initially bears interest at a rate per annum equal to EURIBOR (or, for loans denominated in Sterling, USD, DKK, SEK or CHF, LIBOR, CIBOR or STIBOR (as applicable)) plus a margin of 3.50% per annum, subject to a margin ratchet pursuant to which the margin may be reduced by up to a maximum of 1.00% per annum if total net debt (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement) at each quarter end to the pro forma EBITDA for the twelve months ending on that quarter end (as such terms are defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement) is equal to or less than 2.00:1.

We are also required to pay a commitment fee, quarterly in arrears, on available but undrawn commitments under the Revolving Facility at a rate of 40.0% of the then applicable margin.

The Revolving Facility Agreement has a final maturity date of July 3, 2018. Any amount still outstanding at that time will be immediately due and payable. Subject to certain conditions, any borrower under the Revolving Facility Agreement may voluntarily prepay the utilizations and the borrower may permanently cancel all or part of the available commitments under the Revolving Facility in a minimum amount of €5,000,000 by giving not less than three business days’ (or such shorter period as the required majority lenders under the Revolving Facility Agreement agree) prior notice to the Agent (as defined in the Revolving Facility Agreement).

We may reborrow amounts repaid, subject to certain conditions, until one month prior to final maturity.

In addition to voluntary prepayments, the Revolving Facility Agreement requires mandatory prepayment (or, as the case may be, an offer to do so) in full or in part in certain circumstances, including:

 

    with respect to any lender, if it becomes unlawful for such lender to perform any of its obligations under the Revolving Facility Agreement or to maintain its participation in any loan under the Revolving Facility;

 

    if a lender so requires in respect of that lender’s participation in an outstanding loan under the Revolving Facility, upon a change of control; and/or

 

    upon the occurrence of the sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Group.

Drawdowns under the Revolving Facility are subject to satisfaction of certain conditions precedent on the date the applicable drawdown is requested and on the date such loan is utilized including: (i) no default (or event of default for rollover of existing loans at the end of an interest period) is continuing or would result from such drawdown and (ii) certain repeating representations and warranties specified in the Revolving Facility Agreement being true in all material respects.

The Revolving Facility is guaranteed irrevocably and unconditionally on a joint and several basis by certain members of the Group (subject to applicable local law limitations). Borrowings under the Revolving Facility are secured by various share pledges, inter-company loan receivables owed to the Company or any of the guarantors under the Revolving Facility and the bank accounts of the Company and the guarantors under the Revolving Facility.

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains customary operating and restrictive covenants, subject to certain agreed exceptions, qualifications and thresholds as well as customary events of default (subject in certain cases to agreed grace periods, qualifications and thresholds), including a cross default with respect to an event of default under the Indenture (as defined below) governing the Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (as defined below). The Revolving Facility also requires InterXion Holding N.V., each borrower and each guarantor to observe certain customary affirmative covenants (subject to certain agreed exceptions, qualifications and thresholds) and requires InterXion Holding N.V. to comply with a leverage ratio financial covenant (calculated as the ratio of consolidated total net debt at each quarter end to pro forma EBITDA for the twelve months ending on that quarter end).

The Indenture date July 3, 2013, among InterXion Holding N.V., as Issuer, the initial guarantors, the Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee, principal paying agent and transfer agent, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A., as registrar and Luxembourg paying agent and Barclays Bank PLC, as security trustee.

On 3 July 2013, the Company issued an aggregate principal amount of €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (the “Senior Secured Notes due 2020”). The €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are governed by an indenture dated July 3, 2013, between the Company, as issuer, and The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Trustee. The indenture contains customary restrictive covenants, including but not limited to limitations or restrictions on our ability to incur debt, grant liens, make restricted payments and sell assets. The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions and are governed by a consolidated fixed charge ratio to exceed 2.00 and a consolidated senior leverage ratio not to exceed 4.00.

 

70


Table of Contents

The obligations under the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are guaranteed by certain of the Company’s subsidiaries.

The Company may redeem all or part of the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020. The Company has the following redemption rights:

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016 upon an equity offering

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may on any one or more occasions redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price of 106.000% of their principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, with the net proceeds from one or more equity offerings. We may only do this, however, if:

 

  (a) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Secured Notes that were initially issued (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any additional notes) would remain outstanding immediately after the proposed redemption; and

 

  (b) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such equity offering.

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016

Prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may during each 12-month period commencing on July 3 redeem up to 10% of the aggregate principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any additional notes) at a redemption price equal to 103.000% of the principal amount redeemed plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date.

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may also redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the applicable redemption premium and accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date.

Optional Redemption on or after July 15, 2016

At any time on or after July 15, 2016 and prior to maturity, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, we may redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes. These redemptions will be in amounts of €100,000 or integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of their principal amount at maturity), plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, if redeemed during the 12-month period commencing on July 15 of the years set forth below.

 

Year

   Redemption Price  

2016

     104.500

2017

     103.000

2018

     101.500

2019 and thereafter

     100.000

General

Incorporation and Registered Office

We were incorporated on April 6, 1998 as a private company with limited liability ( besloten vennootschap met beperkte aansprakelijkheid ) under the laws of The Netherlands. On January 11, 2000, we were converted from a B.V. to a limited liability company ( naamloze vennootschap ) under the laws of The Netherlands.

Our corporate seat is in Amsterdam, The Netherlands. We are registered with the Trade Register of the Chamber of Commerce in Amsterdam under number 33301892. Our executive offices are located at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. Our telephone number is +31 20 880 7600.

 

71


Table of Contents

Articles of Association and Dutch Law

Set forth below is a summary of relevant information concerning our share capital and of material provisions of our articles of association (the “Articles”) and applicable Dutch law. This summary does not constitute legal advice regarding those matters and should not be regarded as such.

Corporate Purpose

Pursuant to Article 3 of our Articles, our corporate purpose is:

 

  (a) to incorporate, to participate in any way whatsoever in, to manage, to supervise businesses and companies;

 

  (b) to finance businesses and companies;

 

  (c) to borrow, to lend and to raise funds, including through the issue of bonds, debt instruments or other securities or evidence of indebtedness as well as to enter into agreements in connection with aforementioned activities;

 

  (d) to render advice and services to businesses and companies with which the Company forms a group and to third parties;

 

  (e) to grant guarantees, to bind the Company and to pledge its assets for obligations of businesses and companies with which it forms a group and on behalf of third parties; and

 

  (f) to perform any and all activities of an industrial, financial or commercial nature, and to do all that is connected therewith or may be conducive thereto, all to be interpreted in the broadest sense.

Issue of Ordinary Shares

Our Articles provide that we may issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares, pursuant to a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board. Our Articles provide that our general meeting of shareholders may, upon a proposal of our Board, designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent body to issue ordinary shares, or grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Pursuant to our Articles and Dutch law, the period of designation may not exceed five years, but may be renewed by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders for periods of up to five years. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving the designation, such designation is irrevocable. The resolution designating our Board must specify the number of shares which may be issued and, if applicable, any conditions to the issuance.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body competent to issue ordinary shares and to grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. This authority is limited to a maximum equal to our authorized share capital from time to time. Our Board’s authority to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to acquire ordinary shares is for a period of five years expiring on January 28, 2016. Our general meeting of shareholders may extend this period at any time, subject to the limitations set out above.

Ordinary shares may not be issued at less than their nominal value and must be fully paid up upon issue.

No resolution of our general meeting of shareholders or our Board is required for an issue of ordinary shares pursuant to the exercise of a previously granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

Pre-emptive Rights

Dutch law and our Articles generally give our shareholders pre-emptive rights to subscribe on a pro rata basis for any issue of new ordinary shares or grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares. Exceptions to these pre-emptive rights include: (i) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares to our employees, (ii) the issue of ordinary shares and the grant of rights to subscribe for ordinary shares in return for non-cash consideration and (iii) the issue of ordinary shares to persons exercising a previously-granted right to subscribe for ordinary shares.

A shareholder has the legal right to exercise pre-emption rights for at least two weeks after the date of the announcement of the issue or grant. However, our general meeting of shareholders, or our Board if so designated by our general meeting of shareholders, may restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate another corporate body, which can only be our Board, as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights requires a proposal by our Board and approval by a majority of at least two-thirds of the valid votes cast at our general meeting of shareholders if less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A resolution by our general meeting of shareholders to designate our Board as the competent authority to exclude or restrict pre-emptive rights must be for a fixed period

 

72


Table of Contents

not exceeding five years and is only possible if our Board is simultaneously designated as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares. If not otherwise stated in the resolution approving designation, such designation is irrevocable. If our general meeting of shareholders has not designated our Board, our general meeting of shareholders itself is the corporate body authorized to restrict or exclude pre-emptive rights upon a proposal by our Board.

Our Board is designated as the corporate body authorized to limit or exclude pre-emptive rights, subject to the limited authority it has to issue ordinary shares and grant rights to subscribe for ordinary shares as set out under “—Issue of Ordinary Shares” above, for a period of ending on January 28, 2016.

Reduction of Share Capital

Our general meeting of shareholders may, subject to Dutch law and our Articles and only upon a proposal of our Board, resolve to reduce our issued share capital by cancellation of ordinary shares or reduction of the nominal value of ordinary shares by amendment of our Articles. A resolution of our general meeting of shareholders to reduce the issued share capital must designate the ordinary shares to which the resolution applies and must make provisions for the implementation of such resolution. A resolution to cancel ordinary shares may only be adopted in relation to ordinary shares or depositary receipts for such shares we hold ourselves. A partial repayment or exemption from the obligation to pay up ordinary shares must be made pro rata, unless all of our shareholders agree otherwise. A resolution at our general meeting of shareholders to reduce our issued share capital requires a majority of at least two-thirds of the votes validly cast at a meeting at which less than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented. A simple majority is sufficient if more than half of our issued and outstanding share capital is present or represented.

Acquisition of Ordinary Shares

We may acquire our own fully paid up ordinary shares at any time for no consideration, or, subject to certain provisions of Dutch law and our Articles, if (i) our shareholders’ equity minus the payment required to make the acquisition, does not fall below the sum of called-up and paid-up share capital and any statutory reserves we must maintain by Dutch law or our Articles, and (ii) we and our subsidiaries would thereafter not hold ordinary shares or rights of pledge over ordinary shares with an aggregate nominal value exceeding 50% of our issued and outstanding share capital.

Dutch law generally and more specifically, the Dutch Civil Code, imposes minimum capital and other reserve requirements on legal entities as a way of protecting shareholders and creditors and maintaining the capital of a company. Such minimum capital and reserve requirements include, among other things, complying with certain minimum capital requirements when declaring and paying dividends and repurchasing shares in its own capital, maintaining reserves on the granting of legitimate financial assistance loans by a public limited company and maintaining reserves on the re-evaluation of assets.

An acquisition of ordinary shares for a consideration must be authorized by our general meeting of shareholders. Such authorization may be granted for a maximum period of 18 months and must specify the number of ordinary shares that may be acquired, the manner in which ordinary shares may be acquired and the price limits within which ordinary shares may be acquired. Authorization is not required for the acquisition of ordinary shares in order to transfer them to our employees. The actual acquisition may only be effected by a resolution of our Board.

Any ordinary shares held by us in our own capital may not be voted on or counted for quorum purposes.

Exchange Controls and Other Provisions Relating to Non-Dutch Shareholders

There are no Dutch exchange control restrictions on investments in, or payments on, the ordinary shares. There are no special restrictions in our Articles or Dutch law that limit the right of shareholders who are not citizens or residents of The Netherlands to hold or vote the ordinary shares.

Dividends and Distributions

We may only make distributions to our shareholders in so far as our equity exceeds the sum of our paid-in and called-up share capital plus the reserves we are required to maintain by Dutch law or our proposed Articles. Under our Articles, our Board may determine that a portion of the profits of the current financial year shall be added to our reserves. The remaining profits are at the disposal of our general meeting of shareholders.

 

73


Table of Contents

We may only make distributions of dividends to our shareholders after the adoption of our statutory annual accounts from which it appears that such distributions are legally permitted. However, our Board may resolve to pay interim dividends on account of the profits of the current financial year if the equity requirement set out above is met, as evidenced by an interim statement of assets and liabilities relating to the condition of such assets and liabilities on a date no earlier than the first day of the third month preceding the month in which the resolution to distribute interim dividends is made public. Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve, upon a proposal to that effect by our Board, to pay distributions at the expense of any of our reserves.

Additionally, if we choose to declare dividends, the payment of cash dividends on our shares is restricted under the terms of the agreements governing our indebtedness.

Dividends and other distributions may be made in cash or, but only at all times with the approval of the Board, in ordinary shares. Dividends and other distributions are due and payable as from the date determined by the corporate body resolving on the distribution. Claims to dividends and other declared distributions lapse after five years from the date that such dividends or distributions became payable and any such amounts not collected within this period revert to us and are allocated to our general reserves.

General Meetings of Shareholders and Voting Rights

Our annual general meeting of shareholders must be held within six months after the end of each of our financial years. It must be held in The Netherlands in Amsterdam, Haarlemmermeer (Schiphol Airport) or Hoofddorp. Our financial year coincides with the calendar year. An extraordinary general meeting of shareholders may be convened whenever our Board or CEO deems such necessary. Shareholders representing at least 10% of our issued and outstanding share capital may, pursuant to Dutch law and our Articles, request that a general meeting of shareholders be convened, specifying the items for discussion. If our Board has not convened a general meeting of shareholders within four weeks of such request such that such meeting can be held within six weeks following such request, the shareholders requesting such meeting are authorized to call such meeting themselves with due observance of the relevant provisions of our Articles.

The notice convening any general meeting of shareholders must include an agenda indicating the items for discussion, or it must state that the shareholders and any holders of depositary receipts for ordinary shares may review such agenda at our main offices in The Netherlands. We will have the notice published by electronic means of communication which is directly and permanently accessible until the meeting and in such other manner as may be required to comply with any applicable rules of the New York Stock Exchange. The explanatory notes to the agenda must contain all facts and circumstances that are relevant for the proposals on the agenda. Such explanatory notes and the agenda will be placed on our website.

Shareholders holding at least 1% of our issued and outstanding share capital or ordinary shares representing a value of at least €50 million may submit agenda proposals for any general meeting of shareholders. Provided we receive such proposals no later than 60 days before the date of the general meeting of shareholders, and provided that such proposal does not, according to our Board, conflict with our vital interests, we will have the proposals included in the notice.

Each of the ordinary shares confers the right to cast one vote. Each shareholder entitled to participate in a general meeting of shareholders, either in person or through a written proxy, is entitled to attend and address the meeting and, to the extent that the voting rights accrue to him, to exercise his voting rights in accordance with our Articles. The voting rights attached to any ordinary shares, or ordinary shares for which depositary receipts have been issued, are suspended as long as they are held in treasury.

Our Board may allow shareholders to, in person or through a person holding a written proxy, participate in a general meeting of shareholders, including to take the floor and, to the extent applicable, to exercise voting rights, through an electronic means of communication. Our Board selects the means of electronic communication and may subject its use to conditions.

To the extent that our Articles or Dutch law do not require a qualified majority, all resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders shall be adopted by a simple majority of the votes cast.

The following resolutions of our general meeting of shareholders may only be adopted upon a proposal by our Board:

 

  (a) to effect a statutory merger ( juridische fusie ) or demerger ( juridische splitsing );

 

  (b) to issue ordinary shares or to restrict or exclude pre-emption rights on ordinary shares to the extent the authority to issue has not been delegated to our Board;

 

  (c) to designate our Board as the corporate body authorized to issue ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares and to restrict or to exclude the pre-emption rights on ordinary shares or rights to subscribe for ordinary shares;

 

74


Table of Contents
  (d) to reduce our issued share capital;

 

  (e) to make a whole or partial distribution of reserves;

 

  (f) to amend our articles of association or change our corporate form; and

 

  (g) to dissolve us.

Amendment of our Articles of Association

Our general meeting of shareholders may resolve to amend our Articles upon a proposal made by our Board.

Dissolution and Liquidation

Under our Articles, we may be dissolved by a resolution of our general meeting of shareholders upon a proposal of our Board.

In the event of dissolution, our business will be liquidated in accordance with Dutch law and our Articles and the liquidation shall be effected by our Board. During liquidation, the provisions of our Articles will remain in force to the extent possible. Any assets remaining upon completion of the dissolution will be distributed to the holders of ordinary shares in proportion to the aggregate nominal amount of their ordinary shares.

Disclosure of Information

Dutch law contains specific rules intended to prevent insider trading, tipping and market manipulation. We are subject to these rules and accordingly, we have adopted a code of securities dealings in relation to our securities.

Squeeze Out

If a shareholder, alone or together with group companies, (the “Controlling Entity”) holds a total of at least 95% of a company’s issued share capital by nominal value for its own account, Dutch law permits the Controlling Entity to acquire the remaining shares in the controlled entity (the “Controlled Entity”) by initiating proceedings against the holders of the remaining shares. The price to be paid for such shares will be determined by the Enterprise Chamber of the Amsterdam Court of Appeal (the “Enterprise Chamber”). A Controlling Entity that holds less than 95% of the shares in the Controlled Entity, but that in practice controls the Controlled Entity’s general meeting of shareholders, could attempt to obtain full ownership of the business of the Controlled Entity through a legal merger of the Controlled Entity with another company controlled by the Controlling Entity, by subscribing to additional shares in the Controlled Entity (for example, in exchange for a contribution of part of its own business), through another form of reorganization aimed at raising its interest to 95% or through other means.

In addition to the general squeeze-out procedure mentioned above, following a public offer a holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights has the right to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares to it. To the extent there are two or more types of shares the request can only be made with regard to the type of shares of which the shareholder holds at least 95% in aggregate representing at least 95% of the voting rights attached to those shares. Any request to require the minority shareholders to sell their shares must be filed with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer. Conversely, in such a case, each minority shareholder has the right to require the holder of at least 95% of the outstanding shares and voting rights to purchase its shares. The minority shareholders must file such claim with the Enterprise Chamber within three months after the end of the acceptance period of the public offer.

Reporting of Insider Transactions

Pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act, the Directors and any other person who has managerial responsibilities or who has the authority to make decisions affecting our future developments and business prospects or who has regular access to inside information relating, directly or indirectly, to us (each an “Insider”), must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets (“AFM”) of all transactions conducted for his own account relating to ordinary shares or securities the value of which is determined by the value of ordinary shares. The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets must be notified within five days following the transaction date. Notification may be postponed until the date the value of the transactions amounts to €5,000 or more per calendar year.

In addition, persons designated by the Decree on Market Abuse pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act ( Besluit Marktmisbruik Wft ) (the “Market Abuse Decree”) who are closely associated with an Insider must notify The Netherlands Authority for the Financial Markets of any transactions conducted for their own account relating to ordinary shares or securities

 

75


Table of Contents

the value of which is determined by the value of the ordinary shares. The Market Abuse Decree designates the following categories of persons: (i) the spouse or any partner considered by national law as equivalent to the spouse, (ii) dependent children, (iii) other relatives who have shared the same household for at least one year prior to the relevant transaction date, and (iv) any legal person, trust or partnership whose managerial responsibilities are discharged by, which is controlled by, which has been incorporated for the benefit of, or whose economic interests are the same as, a person referred to in the previous paragraph or under (i), (ii) or (iii) above.

The AFM keeps a public register of all notifications made pursuant to the Dutch Financial Supervision Act.

Pursuant to the rules against insider trading we have, among other things, further adopted rules governing the holding of, reporting and carrying out of transactions in our securities by the Directors or our employees. Further, we have drawn up a list of those persons working for us who could have access to inside information on a regular or incidental basis and have informed the persons concerned of the rules against insider trading and market manipulation including the sanctions which can be imposed in the event of a violation of those rules.

Non-compliance with the notification obligations under the market abuse obligations laid down in the Dutch Financial Supervision Act may lead to criminal fines, administrative fines, imprisonment or other sanctions.

Comparison of Dutch Corporate Law and U.S. Corporate Law

The following comparison between Dutch corporation law, which applies to us, and Delaware corporation law, the law under which many corporations in the United States are incorporated, discusses additional matters not otherwise described in this annual report.

Duties of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law the board of directors is collectively responsible for the policy and day-to-day management of the Company. The non-executive directors will be assigned the task of supervising the executive directors and providing them with advice. Each director has a duty to the Company to properly perform the duties assigned to him. Furthermore, each board member has a duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company. Under Dutch law, the corporate interest extends to the interests of all corporate stakeholders, such as shareholders, creditors, employees, customers and suppliers. The duty to act in the corporate interest of the Company also applies in the event of a proposed sale or break-up of the Company, whereby the circumstances generally dictate how such duty is to be applied. Any board resolution regarding a significant change in the identity or character of the Company or its business requires shareholders’ approval.

Delaware

The board of directors of a Delaware corporation bears the ultimate responsibility for managing the business and affairs of a corporation. In discharging this function, directors of a Delaware corporation owe fiduciary duties of care and loyalty to the corporation and to its shareholders. Delaware courts have decided that the directors of a Delaware corporation are required to exercise an informed business judgment in the performance of their duties. An informed business judgment means that the directors have informed themselves of all material information reasonably available to them. Delaware courts have also imposed a heightened standard of conduct upon directors of a Delaware corporation who take any action designed to defeat a threatened change in control of the corporation. In addition, under Delaware law, when the board of directors of a Delaware corporation approves the sale or break-up of a corporation, the board of directors may, in certain circumstances, have a duty to obtain the highest value reasonably available to the shareholders.

Director terms

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law a director of a listed company is generally appointed for a maximum term of four years. There is no limit to the number of terms a director may serve.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law generally provides for a one-year term for directors, but permits directorships to be divided into up to three staggered classes with up to three-year terms, with the terms for each class expiring in different years, if permitted by the certificate of incorporation, an initial bylaw or a bylaw adopted by the shareholders, with exceptions if the board is classified or if the company has cumulative voting.

 

76


Table of Contents

Director vacancies

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, new members of the board of directors of a company such as ours are appointed by the general meeting. Our Articles provide that our Board has nomination rights with respect to the appointment of a new member of our Board. If a nomination consists of a list of two or more candidates, it is binding and the appointment to the vacant seat concerned shall be from the persons placed on the binding list of candidates and shall be effected through election. Notwithstanding the foregoing, our general meeting of shareholders may, at all times, by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of our issued and outstanding capital, resolve that such list of candidates shall not be binding.

Delaware

The Delaware General Corporation Law provides that vacancies and newly created directorships may be filled by a majority of the directors then in office (even though less than a quorum) unless (a) otherwise provided in the certificate of incorporation or by-laws of the corporation or (b) the certificate of incorporation directs that a particular class of stock is to elect such director, in which case any other directors elected by such class, or a sole remaining director elected by such class, will fill such vacancy.

Shareholder proposals

The Netherlands

Pursuant to our Articles, extraordinary shareholders’ meetings will be held as often as our Board or our CEO deems such necessary. Additionally, shareholders and/or persons with depository receipt holder rights representing in the aggregate at least one-tenth of the issued capital of the Company may request the Board to convene a general meeting, specifically stating the business to be discussed. If our Board has not given proper notice of a general meeting within four weeks following receipt of such request such that the meeting can be held within six weeks after receipt of the request, the applicants shall be authorized to convene a meeting themselves. Pursuant to Dutch law, one or more shareholders representing at least 10% of the issued share capital may request the Dutch Courts to order that a general meeting be held.

The agenda for a meeting of shareholders must contain such items as our Board or the person or persons convening the meeting decide, including the time and place of the shareholders’ meeting and the procedure for participating in the shareholders’ meeting by way of a written power of attorney. The agenda shall also include such other items as one or more shareholders, representing at least such part of the issued share capital as required by the laws of the Netherlands (currently, 1% of the issued share capital or shares representing a value of €50 million) may request by providing a substantiated written request or a proposal for a resolution to our Board at least 60 days before the date of the meeting.

Delaware

Delaware law does not specifically grant shareholders the right to bring business before an annual or special meeting.

Shareholder suits

The Netherlands

In the event a third party is liable to a Dutch company, only the company itself can bring a civil action against that party. The individual shareholders do not have the right to bring an action on behalf of the company. Only in the event that the cause for the liability of a third party to the company also constitutes a tortious act directly against a shareholder does that shareholder have an individual right of action against such third party in its own name. The Dutch Civil Code provides for the possibility to initiate such actions collectively. A foundation or an association whose objective is to protect the rights of a group of persons having similar interests can institute a collective action. The collective action itself cannot result in an order for payment of monetary damages but may only result in a declaratory judgment ( verklaring voor recht ). In order to obtain compensation for damages, the foundation or association and the defendant may reach—often on the basis of such declaratory judgment—a settlement. A Dutch court may declare the settlement agreement binding upon all the injured parties with an opt-out choice for an individual injured party. An individual injured party may also itself institute a civil claim for damages.

 

77


Table of Contents

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, a shareholder may bring a derivative action on behalf of the corporation to enforce the rights of the corporation. An individual also may commence a class action suit on behalf of himself and other similarly situated shareholders where the requirements for maintaining a class action under Delaware law have been met. A person may institute and maintain such a suit only if that person was a shareholder at the time of the transaction which is the subject of the suit. In addition, under Delaware case law, the plaintiff normally must be a shareholder not only at the time of the transaction that is the subject of the suit, but also throughout the duration of the derivative suit. Delaware law also requires that the derivative plaintiff make a demand on the directors of the corporation to assert the corporate claim and such demand has been refused before the suit may be prosecuted by the derivative plaintiff in court, unless such a demand would be futile.

Anti-takeover provisions

The Netherlands

Neither Dutch law nor our Articles specifically prevent business combinations with interested shareholders. Under Dutch law various protective measures are as such possible and admissible, within the boundaries set by Dutch case law and Dutch law.

Delaware

In addition to other aspects of Delaware law governing fiduciary duties of directors during a potential takeover, the Delaware General Corporation Law also contains a business combination statute that protects Delaware companies from hostile takeovers and from actions following the takeover by prohibiting some transactions once an acquirer has gained a significant holding in the corporation.

Section 203 of the Delaware General Corporation Law prohibits “business combinations,” including mergers, sales and leases of assets, issuances of securities and similar transactions by a corporation or a subsidiary with an interested shareholder that beneficially owns 15% or more of a corporation’s voting stock, within three years after the person becomes an interested shareholder, unless:

 

    the transaction that will cause the person to become an interested shareholder is approved by the board of directors of the target prior to the transactions;

 

    after the completion of the transaction in which the person becomes an interested shareholder, the interested shareholder holds at least 85% of the voting stock of the corporation not including shares owned by persons who are directors and also officers of interested shareholders and shares owned by specified employee benefit plans; or

 

    after the person becomes an interested shareholder, the business combination is approved by the board of directors of the corporation and holders of at least 66.67% of the outstanding voting stock, excluding shares held by the interested shareholder.

A Delaware corporation may elect not to be governed by Section 203 by a provision contained in the original certificate of incorporation of the corporation or an amendment to the original certificate of incorporation or to the bylaws of the Company, which amendment must be approved by a majority of the shares entitled to vote and may not be further amended by the board of directors of the corporation. Such an amendment is not effective until twelve months following its adoption.

Removal of directors

The Netherlands

Under Dutch law, the general meeting has the authority to suspend or remove members of the board of directors at any time. Under our Articles, a member of our Board may be suspended or removed by our general meeting of shareholders at any time by a resolution passed with a two-thirds majority of the votes cast representing more than half of the issued and outstanding capital. If permitted under the laws of the Netherlands, a member of our Board may also be suspended by our Board itself. Any suspension may not last longer than three months in the aggregate. If, at the end of that period, no decision has been taken on termination of the suspension, the suspension shall end. Currently, Dutch law does not allow directors to be suspended by the board of directors; however, Dutch law is expected to be amended to facilitate the suspension of directors by the board of directors.

 

78


Table of Contents

Delaware

Under the Delaware General Corporation Law, any director or the entire board of directors may be removed, with or without cause, by the holders of a majority of the shares then entitled to vote at an election of directors, except (a) unless the certificate of incorporation provides otherwise, in the case of a corporation whose board is classified, shareholders may effect such removal only for cause, or (b) in the case of a corporation having cumulative voting, if less than the entire board is to be removed, no director may be removed without cause if the votes cast against his removal would be sufficient to elect him if then cumulatively voted at an election of the entire board of directors, or, if there are classes of directors, at an election of the class of directors of which he is a part.

Taxation

Certain U.S. Federal Income Tax Considerations

This section describes certain material United States federal income tax consequences of owning our ordinary shares. It applies to a US Holder (as defined below) that holds our ordinary shares as capital assets for tax purposes. This section does not apply to a US Holder that is a member of a special class of holders subject to special rules, such as:

 

    a financial institution,

 

    a dealer in securities,

 

    a trader in securities that elects to use a mark-to-market method of accounting for its securities holdings,

 

    a real estate investment trust;

 

    a regulated investment company;

 

    U.S. expatriates;

 

    persons who acquired shares pursuant to the exercise of any employee share option or otherwise as compensation;

 

    a tax-exempt organization,

 

    an insurance company,

 

    a person liable for alternative minimum tax,

 

    a person that actually or constructively owns 10% or more of our voting stock,

 

    a person that owns shares through a partnership or other pass-through entity,

 

    a person that holds shares as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, or

 

    a person whose functional currency is not the US dollar.

This section is based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, all as currently in effect. These laws are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis.

This section does not describe any tax consequences arising out of the tax laws of any state, local or non-U.S. jurisdiction, any estate or gift tax consequences or the Medicare tax on certain “net investment income.” If a partnership, including any entity or arrangement that is treated as a partnership for United States federal income tax purposes, is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares, the treatment of a partner in the partnership will generally depend on the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. Partners in such partnerships should consult with their tax advisors.

For purposes of this discussion, a US Holder is a beneficial owner of our ordinary shares that is for United States federal income tax purposes:

 

    a citizen or resident of the United States,

 

    a US domestic corporation (or other entity taxable as a US domestic corporation for United States federal income tax purposes),

 

    an estate the income of which is subject to United States federal income tax regardless of its source, or

 

    a trust, if a United States court can exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and one or more United States persons are authorized to control all substantial decisions of the trust, or if the trust has a valid election in effect to be treated as a United States person.

 

79


Table of Contents

US Holders should consult their own tax advisor regarding the United States federal, state and local and other tax consequences of owning and disposing of our ordinary shares in their particular circumstances.

Taxation of Dividends

Under the United States federal income tax laws, and subject to the passive foreign investment company, or PFIC, rules discussed below, US Holders will include in gross income the gross amount of any dividend paid by us out of our current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for United States federal income tax purposes). The dividend is ordinary income that the US Holder must include in income when the dividend is actually or constructively received. The dividend will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to United States corporations in respect of dividends received from other United States corporations. The amount of a dividend distribution paid in euros includible in the income of a US Holder will be the US dollar value of the euro payment made, determined at the spot euro/US dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includible in the income of the US Holder, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includible in income to the date such payment is converted into US dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss. Such gain or loss generally will be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes. Distributions in excess of current and accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for United States federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a non-taxable return of capital to the extent of the US Holder’s basis in the shares and thereafter as capital gain. We currently do not, and we do not intend to, calculate our earnings and profits under United States federal income tax principles. Therefore, a US Holder should expect that a distribution will generally be reported as a dividend even if that distribution would otherwise be treated as a non-taxable return of capital or as capital gain under the rules described above.

With respect to non-corporate taxpayers, dividends may be taxed at the lower applicable capital gains rate provided that (1) either (a) our ordinary shares are readily tradable on an established securities market in the United States or (b) we are eligible for the benefits of the “Convention between the United States of America and the Kingdom of the Netherlands for the avoidance of double taxation and the prevention of fiscal evasion with respect to taxes on income,” (2) we are not a PFIC (as discussed below) for either our taxable year in which the dividend was paid or the preceding taxable year, and (3) certain holding period requirements are met. Common stock is considered for purposes of clause (1) above to be readily tradable on an established securities market if it is listed on the NYSE. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the availability of the lower rate for dividends paid with respect to our ordinary shares.

For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, the dividend will generally constitute foreign source income and will generally be “passive category income” but could, in the case of certain US Holders, constitute “general category income.” If the dividends are taxed as qualified dividend income (as discussed above), the amount of the dividend taken into account for purposes of calculating the foreign tax credit limitation will in general be limited to the gross amount of the dividend, multiplied by the reduced tax rate applicable to qualified dividend income and divided by the highest tax rate normally applicable to dividends.

If Dutch withholding taxes apply to any dividends paid to you with respect to our ordinary shares, the amount of the dividend would include withheld Dutch taxes and, subject to certain conditions and limitations, such Dutch withholding taxes may be eligible for credit against your U.S. federal income tax liability. The rules relating to the determination of the foreign tax credit are complex, and you should consult your tax advisors regarding the availability of a foreign tax credit in your particular circumstances, including the effects of any applicable income tax treaties.

Taxation of Capital Gains

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, upon the sale or other disposition of our ordinary shares, a US Holder will generally recognize capital gain or loss for United States federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the US Holder’s amount realized and the US Holder’s tax basis in such shares. If a US Holder receives consideration for shares paid in a currency other than US dollars, the US Holder’s amount realized will be the US dollar value of the payment received. In general, the US dollar value of such a payment will be determined on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, a US Holder may recognize US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, if our ordinary shares are treated as traded on an established securities market and the US Holder is a cash basis taxpayer or an accrual basis taxpayer who has made a special election, the US dollar value of the amount realized in a foreign currency is determined by translating the amount received at the spot rate of exchange on the settlement date, and no exchange gain or loss would be recognized at that time. Capital gain of a non-corporate US Holder is generally taxed at a reduced rate where the property is held more than one year. The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the United States for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

 

80


Table of Contents

PFIC Rules

We believe that our ordinary shares should not be treated as stock of a PFIC for United States federal income tax purposes for the taxable year that ended on December 31, 2013. However, the application of the PFIC rules is subject to uncertainty in several respects, and we cannot assure you that the United States Internal Revenue Service will not take a contrary position. In addition, PFIC status is a factual determination which cannot be made until the close of the taxable year. Accordingly, there is no guarantee that we will not be a PFIC for any future taxable year. Furthermore, because the total value of our assets for purposes of the asset test generally will be calculated using the market price of our ordinary shares, our PFIC status will depend in large part on the market price of our ordinary shares. Accordingly, fluctuations in the market price of our ordinary shares could render us a PFIC for any year. A non-U.S. corporation is considered a PFIC for any taxable year if either:

 

    at least 75% of its gross income is passive income, or

 

    at least 50% of the value of its assets (based on an average of the quarterly values of the assets during a taxable year) is attributable to assets that produce or are held for the production of passive income (the “asset test”).

In the PFIC determination, we will be treated as owning our proportionate share of the assets and earning our proportionate share of the income of any other corporation in which we own, directly or indirectly, 25% or more (by value) of the stock.

If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during a US Holder’s holding period, unless the US Holder elects to be taxed annually on a mark-to-market basis with respect to the shares (which election may be made only if our ordinary shares are “marketable stock” within the meaning of Section 1296 of the Code), the US Holder will be subject to special tax rules with respect to any “excess distribution” received and any gain realized from a sale or other disposition (including a pledge) of that holder’s shares. Distributions a US Holder receives in a taxable year that are greater than 125% of the average annual distributions received during the shorter of the three preceding taxable years or the holder’s holding period for the shares will be treated as excess distributions. Under these special tax rules:

 

    the excess distribution or gain will be allocated ratably over the US Holder’s holding period for the shares;

 

    the amount allocated to the current taxable year, and any taxable year prior to the first taxable year in which we are treated as a PFIC, will be treated as ordinary income; and

 

    the amount allocated to each other year will be subject to tax at the highest tax rate in effect for that year and the interest charge generally applicable to underpayments of tax will be imposed on the resulting tax attributable to each such year.

The tax liability for amounts allocated to years prior to the year of disposition or “excess distribution” cannot be offset by any net operating losses for such years, and gains (but not losses) realized on the sale of the shares cannot be treated as capital, even if the shares are held as capital assets. If we were to be treated as a PFIC for any year during which a US Holder holds the shares, we generally would continue to be treated as a PFIC with respect to that US Holder for all succeeding years during which it owns our ordinary shares. If we were to cease to be treated as a PFIC, however, a US Holder may avoid some of the adverse effects of the PFIC regime by making a deemed sale election with respect to our ordinary shares.

If a US Holder holds shares in any year in which we are a PFIC, that US Holder will generally be required by the Code to file an information report with the Internal Revenue Service containing such information as the Internal Revenue Service may require.

Information Reporting and Backup Withholding

Dividend payments with respect to our shares and proceeds from the sale, exchange or redemption of our ordinary shares may be subject to information reporting to the United States Internal Revenue Service and possible United States backup withholding. Backup withholding will not apply, however, to a US Holder that furnishes a correct taxpayer identification number and makes any other required certification or that is otherwise exempt from backup withholding. US Holders that are required to establish their exempt status generally must provide such certification on United States Internal Revenue Service Form W-9. US Holders should consult their tax advisors regarding the application of the U.S. information reporting and backup withholding rules.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld as backup withholding may be credited against your United States federal income tax liability, and you may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules by filing the appropriate claim for refund with the United States Internal Revenue Service and furnishing any required information in a timely manner.

 

81


Table of Contents

Information with respect to Foreign Financial Assets

U.S. individuals that own “specified foreign financial assets” with an aggregate value in excess of certain threshold amounts are generally required to file an information report with respect to such assets with their tax returns. “Specified foreign financial assets” include any financial accounts maintained by foreign financial institutions, as well as any of the following, but only if they are not held in accounts maintained by financial institutions: (i) stocks and securities issued by non-U.S. persons, (ii) financial instruments and contracts held for investment that have non-U.S. issuers or counterparties, and (iii) interests in foreign entities. Our shares may be subject to these rules. US Holders that are individuals should consult their tax advisers regarding the application of this requirement to their ownership of our shares.

Certain Dutch Tax Considerations

Introduction

This section describes the material Dutch tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of our ordinary shares as of the date hereof and is intended as general information only. The following summary does not purport to be a comprehensive description of all Dutch tax considerations that could be relevant for holders of the ordinary shares. This summary is intended as general information only. Each prospective holder should consult a professional tax adviser with respect to the tax consequences of an investment in the ordinary shares. This summary is based on Dutch tax legislation and published case law in force as of the date of this annual report. It does not take into account any developments or amendments thereof after that date, whether or not such developments or amendments have retroactive effect.

For the purpose of this section, “The Netherlands” shall mean the part of the Kingdom of the Netherlands in Europe.

Scope

Regardless of whether or not a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, this summary does not address the Dutch tax consequences for such a holder:

 

  (a) having a substantial interest ( aanmerkelijk belang ) in our Company (such a substantial interest is generally present if an equity stake, profit stake of at least 5%, or a right to acquire such an equity/profit stake, is held, in each case by reference to our Company’s total issued share capital, or the issued capital of a certain class of shares);

 

  (b) who is a private individual and may be taxed for the purposes of Dutch income tax ( inkomstenbelasting ) as an entrepreneur ( ondernemer ) having an enterprise ( onderneming ) to which the ordinary shares are attributable, as one who earns income from miscellaneous activities ( resultaat uit overige werkzaamheden ), which include the performance of activities with respect to the ordinary shares that exceed regular, active portfolio management (normaal, actief vermogensbeheer ), or who may otherwise be taxed as one earning taxable income from work and home ( werk en woning ) with respect to benefits derived from the ordinary shares;

 

  (c) which is a corporate entity, and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax ( vennootschapsbelasting ) and Dutch dividend tax ( dividendbelasting ), has, or is deemed to have, a participation ( deelneming ) in our Company (such a participation is generally present in the case of an interest of at least 5% of our Company’s nominal paid-in capital); or

 

  (d) which is a corporate entity and an exempt investment institution ( vrijgestelde beleggingsinstelling ) or investment institution ( beleggingsinstelling ) for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax, a pension fund, or otherwise not a taxpayer or exempt for tax purposes.

Dividend tax

Withholding requirement

We are required to withhold 15% Dutch dividend tax in respect of proceeds from the ordinary shares, which include, but is not limited to:

 

  (a) proceeds in cash or in kind, including deemed and constructive proceeds;

 

  (b) liquidation proceeds, proceeds on redemption of the ordinary shares and, as a rule, the consideration for the repurchase of ordinary shares by our Company in excess of its average paid-in capital ( gestort kapitaal ) as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes, unless a particular statutory exemption applies;

 

82


Table of Contents
  (c) the par value of the ordinary shares issued to a holder, or an increase in the par value of the ordinary shares, except when the (increase in the) par value of the ordinary shares is funded out of our paid-in capital as recognized for Dutch dividend tax purposes; and

 

  (d) partial repayments of paid-in capital, if and to the extent there are qualifying profits ( zuivere winst ), unless the general meeting of holders of shares has resolved in advance to make such repayment and provided that the nominal value of the ordinary shares concerned has been reduced by an equal amount by way of an amendment of the articles of association and the capital concerned is recognized as paid-in capital for Dutch dividend tax purposes.

Resident holders

If a holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands, Dutch dividend tax which is withheld with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares will generally be creditable for Dutch corporate income tax or Dutch income tax purposes if the holder is the beneficial owner ( uiteindelijk gerechtigde ) of the proceeds concerned. A resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from Dutch dividend withholding tax.

Non-resident holders

If a private individual holder of ordinary shares is, or is treated as being, a resident of a country other than The Netherlands, such holder is generally not entitled to claim full or partial relief at source, or a refund in whole or in part, of Dutch dividend tax with respect to proceeds from the ordinary shares. A non-resident corporate holder of ordinary shares may under certain conditions be entitled to an exemption from, reduction or refund of Dutch dividend withholding tax under the provisions of a treaty for the avoidance of double taxation between the Netherlands and its country of residence.

Income tax

Resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and a resident, or treated as being, a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax and who does not have a substantial interest in our Company nor otherwise is taxed in relation to the ordinary shares as one earning taxable income from work and home, must record the ordinary shares as assets that are held in box 3. Taxable income with regard to the ordinary shares is then determined on the basis of a deemed return on income from savings and investments ( sparen en beleggen ), rather than on the basis of income actually received or gains actually realized. This deemed return is fixed at a rate of 4% of the holder’s yield basis ( rendementsgrondslag ) on January 1 of each year, insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold. Such yield basis is determined as the fair market value of certain qualifying assets held by the holder of the ordinary shares, less the fair market value of certain qualifying liabilities. The fair market value of the ordinary shares will be included as an asset in the holder’s yield basis. The deemed return of 4% on the holder’s yield basis, being the fair market value of the ordinary shares, is taxed at a rate of 30% (insofar as the yield basis concerned exceeds a certain threshold).

Non-resident holders

A holder who is a private individual and neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch income tax, will not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

Corporate income tax

Resident holders or holders having a Dutch permanent establishment

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax a resident (or treated as being a resident) of The Netherlands, or a non-resident having (or treated as having) a permanent establishment in The Netherlands, is generally taxed in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares at rates of up to 25%.

Non-resident holders

A holder which is a corporate entity and for the purposes of Dutch corporate income tax neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands, having no permanent establishment in The Netherlands (and is not treated as having such a permanent establishment), will generally not be subject to such tax in respect of benefits derived from the ordinary shares.

 

83


Table of Contents

Gift and inheritance tax

Resident holders

Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax ( schenk- of erfbelasting ) will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is a resident, or treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax. A holder is so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one having Dutch nationality has been a resident of The Netherlands during the ten years preceding the relevant gift or death. A holder is further so treated as being a resident of The Netherlands, if one has been a resident of The Netherlands at any time during the twelve months preceding the time of the relevant gift.

Non-resident holders

No Dutch gift tax or inheritance tax will arise in respect of an acquisition (or deemed acquisition) of the ordinary shares by way of a gift by, or on the death of, a holder of ordinary shares who is neither a resident, nor treated as being a resident, of The Netherlands for the purposes of Dutch gift and inheritance tax.

Other taxes

No Dutch turnover tax ( omzetbelasting ) will arise in respect of any payment in consideration for the issue of the ordinary shares, with respect to a distribution of proceeds from the ordinary shares or with respect to a transfer of ordinary shares. Furthermore, no Dutch registration tax, capital tax, transfer tax or stamp duty (nor any other similar tax or duty) will be payable in connection with the issue or acquisition of the ordinary shares.

 

84


Table of Contents

ITEM 11: QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

Interest Rate Risk

Under our Revolving Facility, interest is based on a floating rate index. The interest expense on the remainder of our outstanding indebtedness is based on a fixed rate, except for our mortgages. Our mortgages are subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. We have determined that the impact of a near-term 10% appreciation or depreciation of EURIBOR would not have a significant effect on our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows. The interest rates on our mortgages secured by our PAR3 and PAR5 properties was fixed for approximately 75% of the principal outstanding amounts for a period of 10 years.

As at December 31, 2013, the interest payable under the Revolving Facility on (i) any EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (ii) any Danish Kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of CIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (iii) any Swedish Kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of STIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum and (iv) other applicable currencies including GBP amounts drawn at the rate of LIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum. The Revolving Facility was undrawn as at December 31, 2013.

Foreign Exchange Rate Risk

Our reporting currency for purposes of our financial statements is the euro. However, we also incur revenue and operating costs in non-euro denominated currencies, such as British pounds, Swiss francs, Danish Kroner and Swedish Kroner. We recognize foreign currency gains or losses arising from our operations in the period incurred. As a result, currency fluctuations between the euro and the non-euro currencies in which we do business will cause us to incur foreign currency translation gains and losses. We cannot predict the effects of exchange rate fluctuations upon our future operating results because of the number of currencies involved, the variability of currency exposure and the potential volatility of currency exchange rates. We have determined that the impact of a near-term 10% appreciation or depreciation of non-euro denominated currencies relative to the euro would not have a significant effect on our financial position, results of operations, or cash flows.

We do not maintain any derivative instruments to mitigate the exposure to translation and transaction risk. Our foreign exchange transaction gains and losses are included in our results of operations and were not material for all periods presented. We do not currently engage in foreign exchange hedging transactions to manage the risk of our foreign currency exposure.

Commodity Price Risk

We are a significant user of electricity and have exposure to increases in electricity prices. In recent years, we have seen significant increases in electricity prices. We use independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies where possible.

Approximately 60% of our customers by revenue pay for electricity on a metered basis while the remainder of our customers pay for power “plugs.” While we are contractually able to recover energy cost increases from our customers, some portion of the increased costs may not be recovered. In addition, some portion of the increased costs may be recovered in a delayed fashion based on commercial reasons at the discretion of local management.

 

85


Table of Contents

ITEM 12: DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

Not applicable.

 

86


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13: DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable.

 

87


Table of Contents

ITEM 14: MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS

AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable.

 

88


Table of Contents

ITEM 15: CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

Conclusion Regarding the Effectiveness of Disclosure Controls and Procedures

Under the supervision and with the participation of the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Chief Financial Officer (CFO), the effectiveness of the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) have been evaluated as of December 31, 2013. Based upon the evaluation, the CEO and CFO, concluded that as of December 31, 2013, the Company’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective and designed to provide reasonable assurance that the information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, is recorded, processed, summarized and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms and to ensure that information required to be disclosed in the reports that we file or submit under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is accumulated and communicated to our management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding required disclosure.

Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f) under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934) and for the assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting includes maintaining records, that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect our transactions; providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary for preparation of our financial statements; providing reasonable assurance that receipts and expenditures of Company assets are made in accordance with management authorization; and providing reasonable assurance that unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of Company assets that could have material effect on our financial statements would be prevented or detected on a timely basis. The Company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable, but not absolute, assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of the consolidated financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting is not intended to provide absolute assurance that a misstatement of our financial statements would be prevented or detected.

In connection with the preparation of the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements, management has undertaken an assessment of the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in the ‘Internal Control Integrated Framework (1992)’ issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (the COSO Framework).

Based on this assessment, management concluded that the Company’s internal control over financial reporting was effective as of December 31, 2013.

Our consolidated financial statements have been audited by KPMG Accountants N.V., an independent registered public accounting firm, which has issued an attestation report on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting included elsewhere in this annual report on Form 20-F.

Changes in Controls and Procedures

Enhancements have been made during the period. There were no changes that occurred during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

 

89


Table of Contents

ITEM 16A: AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The Board of Directors has determined that Cees van Luijk is the audit committee financial expert as defined by the SEC and meets the applicable independence requirements of the SEC and the NYSE.

 

90


Table of Contents

ITEM 16B: CODE OF ETHICS

Our board of directors has adopted a code of ethics on January 21, 2013, which applies to our principal executive officer, principal financial officer, principal accounting officers, controllers and employees. The code is posted on our website at www.interxion.com.

 

91


Table of Contents

ITEM 16C: PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

KPMG Accountants N.V. has served as the Company’s principal accountant for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011. Set forth below are the fees for audit and other services rendered by KPMG Accountants N.V. or other KPMG network for the fiscal years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011.

 

     Year ended December 31,  
     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Audit fees

     1,018         758         658   

Audit-related fees

     346         277         251   

Tax fees

     —           —           6   

All other fees

     64         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total

     1,428         1,035         915   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Audit fees include fees billed for audit services rendered for the Company’s annual consolidated financial statements filed with regulatory organizations.

Audit-related fees primarily relate to service organization control reports such as SOC 2 and ISAE 3402 reports.

Tax fees include fees billed for tax compliance.

All other fees consist of fees for all other services not included in any of the other categories noted above.

All of the above fees were pre-approved by the Audit Committee.

Audit Committee’s Policies and Procedures

In accordance with the Securities and Exchange Commission rules regarding auditor independence, the Audit Committee has established Policies and Procedures for Audit and Non-Audit Services Provided by an Independent Auditor. The rules apply to the Company and its consolidated subsidiaries engaging any accounting firms for audit services and the auditor who audits the accounts filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, or the external auditor, for permissible non-audit services.

When engaging the external auditor for permissible non-audit services (audit-related services, tax services, and all other services), pre-approval is obtained prior to the commencement of the services.

 

92


Table of Contents

ITEM 16D: EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable.

 

93


Table of Contents

ITEM 16E: PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

None.

 

94


Table of Contents

ITEM 16F: CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

Not applicable.

 

95


Table of Contents

ITEM 16G: CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Many of the corporate governance rules of the NYSE do not apply to the Company as a “foreign private issuer”; however, Rule 303A.11 requires foreign private issuers to describe significant differences between their corporate governance standards and the corporate governance standards applicable to U.S. companies listed on the NYSE. While the Company’s management believes that its corporate governance practices are similar in many respects to those of U.S. NYSE-listed companies and provide investors with protections that are comparable in many respects to those established by the NYSE, there are certain key differences which are described below.

Nominating Committee

Under Section 303A.04 of the NYSE rules, a domestic listed company must have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Nominating Committee does not meet the NYSE independence standard, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE rules.

Compensation Committee

Under Section 303A.05 of the NYSE rules, a domestic listed company must have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors. The Company’s Compensation Committee does not meet the NYSE independence standard, as one (1) member of that committee is not “independent” as defined under the applicable NYSE rules.

Internal Audit Function

Under Section 303A.07 of the NYSE rules, a domestic listed company must have an internal audit function. In 2013, a formal internal audit function was not in place.

 

96


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 17: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The Company has responded to Item 18 in lieu of responding to this item.

 

97


Table of Contents

ITEM 18: FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Reference is made to pages F-1 through F-60, which are incorporated herein by reference.

 

98


Table of Contents

ITEM 19: EXHIBITS

The following instruments and documents are included as Exhibits to this annual report.

 

Exhibit
Number
  Description of Document
1.1‡   Articles of Association of InterXion Holding N.V., as amended, dated as of January 20, 2012.
1.2‡   Bylaws of InterXion Holding N.V. dated as of January 23, 2012.
2.1*   Form of Registration Rights Agreement.
2.2‡   Indenture dated as of July 3, 2013 among InterXion Holding N.V., as Issuer, InterXion Belgium N.V., InterXion Danmark ApS, InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited, InterXion Datacenters B.V., InterXion Deutschland GmbH, Interxion España S.A., InterXion France SAS, InterXion HeadQuarters B.V., InterXion Ireland Limited, InterXion Nederland B.V. and InterXion Operational B.V., as initial guarantors, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee, principal paying agent and transfer agent, The Bank of New York Mellon (Luxembourg) S.A., as registrar and Luxembourg paying agent and Barclays Bank PLC, as security trustee.
2.3   Supplemental Indenture dated as of December 17, 2013 among InterXion Holding N.V., as Issuer, InterXion Sverige AB, as Guaranteeing Entity, InterXion Belgium N.V., InterXion Damark ApS, InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited, InterXion Datacenters B.V., InterXion Deutschland GmbH, InterXion España S.A., InterXion France SAS, InterXion HeadQuarters B.V., InterXion Ireland Limited, InterXion Nederland B.V. and InterXion Operational B.V., as guarantors and The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee.
2.4‡   The Intercreditor Agreement dated July 3, 2013, by and among, Interxion Holding N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, as revolving agent, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as original senior secured notes trustee, the revolving lenders named therein, the original debtors named therein, and Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee.
2.5   Amendment Letter to the Intercreditor Agreement dated December 17, 2013, by and among, Interxion Holding N.V., the original debtors and financial institutions as listed in the Intercreditor Agreement, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as original senior secured notes trustee and Barclays Bank PLC, as original hedge counterparty, revolving agent and security trustee.
4.1‡   Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated as of June 17, 2013 among InterXion Holding N.V., ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, Credit Suisse AG, London Branch and Bank of America Securities Limited.
4.2   Accession Letter to the Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated December 17, 2013 among InterXion Holding N.V. and InterXion Sverige AB, as additional guarantor.
4.3*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Österreich GmbH and S-Invest Beteiligungsgesellschaft mbH dated January 1, 2000 as amended by the Supplement to the Floridsdorf Technology Park Lease dated November 13, 2007.
4.4*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Belgium N.V. and First Cross Roads dated June 25, 2001.
4.5*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion HeadQuarters B.V. and Keops A/S dated May 1, 2000.
4.6*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated June 29, 2007 as amended by the Amendment to the Lease Agreement dated October 26, 2007.
4.7*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and SCI 43 Rue du Landy dated April 28, 2006.
4.8*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 15 to the Lease Agreement dated November 30, 2009.
4.9*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion France Sarl and ICADE dated December 23, 2008.
4.10*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VastNed Industrial B.V. dated November 4, 2005.
4.11*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Nederland B.V. and VA No. 1 (Point of Logistics) B.V. dated May 14, 2007.

 

99


Table of Contents
Exhibit
Number
  Description of Document
  4.12*†   Lease Agreement between InterXion Carrier Hotel S.L. and Naves y Urbanas Andalucia S.A. dated March 20, 2000 as amended by the Annex to the Lease Agreement dated March 15, 2006.
  4.13*†   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Eliahou Zeloof, Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated February 23, 2000.
  4.14*†   InterXion Holding N.V. Fifth Amended and Restated Shareholders Agreement dated December 24, 2009.
  4.15*†   Lease/Loan Agreement between Alpine Finanz Immobilien AG, InterXion (Schweiz) AG and InterXion Holding N.V. dated March 13, 2009.
  4.16‡   Directors Remuneration Policy of InterXion Holding N.V. dated January 20, 2012.
  4.17§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2011 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated May 31, 2011.
  4.18§   InterXion Holding N.V. 2008 International Stock Option and Incentive Master Award Plan dated May 31, 2011.
  4.19*   Shareholders Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., Chianna Investment N.V., Lamont Finance N.V. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P.
  4.20 ¨   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited and Amira Zeloof, Ofer Zeloof and Oren Zeloof dated November 1, 2011.
  4.21 ¨   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion France Sas and Corpet Louvet Sas dated January 3, 2011.
  4.22 ¨   Lease Agreement among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion España, S.A.U and Chainco Investments Company, S.L. dated October 10, 2011.
  4.23   Management Agreement Managing Director InterXion Holding N.V. dated July 15, 2013.
  4.24 ¨   Lease Agreement among InterXion España, S.A.U. and Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. dated February 27, 2012.
  4.25 ¨   Lease Agreement between InterXion Holding B.V. and GiP Gewerbe im Park GmbH dated January 29, 1999 as amended by Supplement No. 17 to the Lease Agreement dated September 1, 2011.
  4.26††   Lease Agreement between InterXion Netherlands B.V. and ProLogis Netherlands VII SarL dated April 15, 2013.
  4.27††   Lease Agreement among InterXion España, S.A.U. and Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. dated July 5, 2013.
  4.28††   Lease Agreement between InterXion Deutschland GmbH and Union Investment Real Estate GmbH dated August 2, 2013.
  4.29‡   InterXion Holding N.V. 2013 Amended International Equity Based Incentive Plan dated March 17, 2014.
  4.30   Deed of Pledge of Shares among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Operational B.V. and Barclays Bank PLC dated July 2, 2013.
12.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
12.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer
13.1   Certification of Chief Executive Officer
13.2   Certification of Chief Financial Officer
15.1   Consent of KPMG Accountants N.V.

 

Notes:

 

* Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form F-1 (File No. 333-171662) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.

 

100


Table of Contents
Confidential treatment has been received for certain portions which are omitted in the copy of the exhibit filed with the SEC. The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
†† The omitted information has been filed separately with the SEC pursuant to an application for confidential treatment.
Previously filed as an exhibit on Form 6-K (File No. 001-35053) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference.
§ Previously filed as an exhibit to the InterXion Holding N.V.’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File No. 119-28329) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference to such Registration Statement.
¨ Previously filed as an exhibit on Form 20-F (File No. 001-35053) filed with the SEC and hereby incorporated by reference.

 

101


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

INTERXION HOLDING N.V.

/s/ David C. Ruberg

Name:

  David C. Ruberg

Title:

  Chief Executive Officer

Date:

  April 8 , 2014

 

102


Table of Contents

INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Audited financial statements of InterXion Holding N.V. as of and for the years ended December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011

 

Independent Auditor’s Report

     F-2   

Consolidated Income Statements

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Comprehensive Income

     F-4   

Consolidated Statements of Financial Position

     F-5   

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Shareholders’ Equity

     F-6   

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

     F-7   

Notes to the 2013 Consolidated Financial Statements

     F-8   

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To: The Board of Directors and Shareholders of InterXion Holding N.V.

We have audited the accompanying consolidated statements of financial position of Interxion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated income statements and, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, changes in shareholders’ equity and cash flows for the years then ended. We also have audited Interxion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries’ internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (1992) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Interxion Holding N.V.’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audits.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Interxion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for the years then ended, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, Interxion Holding N.V. maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, based on criteria established in Internal Control – Integrated Framework (1992) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission .

/s/ KPMG Accountants N.V.

Rotterdam, The Netherlands

April 8, 2014

 

F-2


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

F-3


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

 

            For the year ended December 31,  
     Note      2013     2012     2011  
            (€’000)  

Revenue

     5,6         307,111        277,121        244,310   

Cost of sales

     5,7         (124,141     (113,082     (101,766
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit

        182,970        164,039        142,544   

Other income

     5         341        463        487   

Sales and marketing costs

     5,7         (22,818     (20,100     (17,680

General and administrative costs

     5,7,10         (90,134     (79,243     (67,258
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     5         70,359        65,159        58,093   

Finance income

     8         484        907        2,290   

Finance expense

     8         (57,937     (18,653     (25,074
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

        12,906        47,413        35,309   

Income tax expense

     9         (6,082     (15,782     (9,737
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

        6,824        31,631        25,572   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Earnings per share attributable to shareholders post 5:1 reverse stock split at January 28, 2011:

         

Basic earnings per share: (€)

     16         0.10        0.47        0.40   

Diluted earnings per share: (€)

     16         0.10        0.46        0.39   

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

     For the year ended December 31,  
     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     6,824        31,631        25,572   

Other comprehensive income

      

Items that are, or may be, reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

      

Foreign currency translation differences

     (3,220     2,588        2,253   

Effective portion of changes in fair value of cash flow hedge

     90        —          —     

Tax on items that are, or may be, reclassified subsequently to profit or loss

     544        (571     200   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Other comprehensive income/(loss), net of tax

     (2,586     2,017        2,453   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total comprehensive income attributable to shareholders

     4,238        33,648        28,025   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-4


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

 

            As at December 31,  
     Note      2013     2012     2011  
            (€’000)  

Non-current assets

         

Property, plant and equipment

     10         698,748        620,931        477,798   

Intangible assets

     11         17,878        18,638        12,542   

Deferred tax assets

     9         34,446        30,376        39,557   

Financial asset

     12         774        774        —     

Other non-current assets

     13         16,536        4,959        3,841   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        768,382        675,678        533,738   

Current assets

         

Trade and other current assets

     13         96,703        74,854        67,874   

Cash and cash equivalents

     14         45,690        68,692        142,669   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        142,393        143,546        210,543   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total assets

        910,775        819,224        744,281   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Shareholders’ equity

         

Share capital

     15         6,887        6,818        6,613   

Share premium

     15         485,347        477,326        466,166   

Foreign currency translation reserve

     15         6,757        9,403        7,386   

Hedging reserve, net of tax

     15         60        —          —     

Accumulated deficit

     15         (111,149     (117,973     (149,604
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        387,902        375,574        330,561   

Non-current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     17         11,537        11,194        10,294   

Deferred tax liability

     9         4,147        2,414        1,742   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         4,855        7,848        10,618   

Borrowings

     19         362,209        288,085        257,267   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        382,748        309,541        279,921   

Current liabilities

         

Trade payables and other liabilities

     17         132,093        127,778        127,639   

Income tax liabilities

        2,229        2,301        2,249   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         4,020        3,978        3,108   

Borrowings

     19         1,783        52        803   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        140,125        134,109        133,799   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities

        522,873        443,650        413,720   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

        910,775        819,224        744,281   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-5


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CHANGES IN SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY

 

     Note      Share
capital
     Share
premium
    Foreign
currency
translation
reserve
    Hedging
Reserve
     Accumulated
deficit
    Total
equity
 
            (€’000)  

Balance at January 1, 2013

        6,818         477,326        9,403        —           (117,973     375,574   

Profit for the year

        —           —          —          —           6,824        6,824   

Hedging result, net of tax

        —           —          —          60         —          60   

Total other comprehensive income/(loss), net of tax

        —           —          (2,646     —           —          (2,646

Total comprehensive income/(loss), net of tax

        —           —          (2,646     60         6,824        4,238   

Exercise of options

        69         4,431        —          —           —          4,500   

Share-based payments

     21         —           3,590        —          —           —          3,590   

Total contribution by, and distributions to, owners of the Company

        69         8,021        —          —           —          8,090   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2013

        6,887         485,347        6,757        60         (111,149     387,902   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at January 1, 2012

        6,613         466,166        7,386        —           (149,604     330,561   

Profit for the year

        —           —          —          —           31,631        31,631   

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,017        —           —          2,017   

Total comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,017        —           31,631        33,648   

Exercise of options

        205         7,750        —          —           —          7,955   

Share-based payments

     21         —           3,410        —          —           —          3,410   

Total contribution by, and distributions to, owners of the Company

        205         11,160        —          —           —          11,365   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2012

        6,818         477,326        9,403        —           (117,973     375,574   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at January 1, 2011

        4,434         321,078        4,933        —           (175,176     155,269   

Profit for the year

        —           —          —          —           25,572        25,572   

Total other comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,453        —           —          2,453   

Total comprehensive income, net of tax

        —           —          2,453        —           25,572        28,025   

IPO proceeds

        1,625         142,487        —          —           —          144,112   

Conversion of Preferred Shares

        337         (337     —          —           —          —     

Liquidation price paid to Preferred Shareholders

        —           (3,055     —          —           —          (3,055

Exercise of options

        217         3,257        —          —           —          3,474   

Share-based payments

     21         —           2,736        —          —           —          2,736   

Total contribution by, and distributions to, owners of the Company

        2,179         145,088        —          —           —          147,267   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance at December 31, 2011

        6,613         466,166        7,386        —           (149,604     330,561   
     

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

 

Since no minority shareholders in Group equity exist, the Group equity is entirely attributable to the parent’s shareholders.

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-6


Table of Contents

CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF CASH FLOWS

 

            For the years ended December 31,  
     Note      2013     2012     2011  
            (€’000)  

Profit for the year

        6,824        31,631        25,572   

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     10,11         57,670        43,993        35,552   

IPO transaction costs

     5         —          —          1,725   

Provision for onerous lease contracts

     18         (3,285     (2,328     (3,125

Share-based payments

     21         4,149        5,488        2,736   

Net finance expense

     8         57,453        17,746        22,784   

Income tax expense

     9         6,082        15,782        9,737   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
        128,893        112,312        94,981   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Movements in trade and other current assets

        (22,712     (7,154     (16,942

Movements in trade and other liabilities

        (3,510     6,543        12,009   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash generated from operations

        102,671        111,701        90,048   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest and fees paid

        (22,747     (18,081     (24,472

Interest received

        569        1,007        2,251   

Income tax paid

        (7,930     (5,545     (3,784
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flow from operating activities

        72,563        89,082        64,043   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from investing activities

         

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

        (140,251     (172,036     (154,559

Disposal of property, plant and equipment

        —          —          945   

Purchase of intangible assets

        (3,130     (6,295     (7,397

Acquisition of financial asset

        —          (774     —     
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flow used in investing activities

        (143,381     (179,105     (161,011
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash flows from financing activities

         

Proceeds from exercised options

        4,500        7,956        3,474   

Proceeds from issuance of new shares at IPO

        —          —          142,952   

Repayment of “Liquidation Price” to former Preferred Shareholders

        —          —          (3,055

Proceeds from mortgages

        15,490        9,890        —     

Repayment of mortgages

        (1,167     —          —     

Proceeds of 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020

        317,045        —          —     

Repayment of 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017

        (286,478     —          —     

Payments for revolving facility agreement

        (1,398     (1,159     (645

Repayment of other borrowings

        (81     (804     (2,396
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net cash flow from financing activities

        47,911        15,883        140,330   

Effect of exchange rate changes on cash

        (95     163        192   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net movement in cash and cash equivalents

        (23,002     (73,977     43,554   

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

        68,692        142,669        99,115   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cash and cash equivalents, end of year

     14         45,690        68,692        142,669   
     

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

The accompanying notes form an integral part of these consolidated financial statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents

NOTES TO THE 2013 CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

 

1 The Company

Interxion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) is domiciled in The Netherlands. The Company’s registered office is at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands. The consolidated financial statements of the Company for the year ended December 31, 2013 comprise the Company and its subsidiaries (together referred to as the “Group”). The Group is a leading pan-European operator of carrier-neutral Internet data centers.

The financial statements, which were approved and authorized for issue by the Board of Directors on April 8, 2014, are subject to adoption by the General Meeting of Shareholders.

 

2 Basis of preparation

Statement of compliance

The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”), effective as at December 31, 2013, as issued by the Internal Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”), and IFRS as adopted by the European Union, and also comply with the financial reporting requirements included in Part 9 of Book 2 of The Netherlands Civil Code.

Basis of measurement

The Group prepared its consolidated financial statements on a going-concern basis and under the historical cost convention except for certain financial instruments that have been measured at fair value.

Change in accounting policies

Except for the changes below, the Group has consistently applied the accounting policies set out below to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements. The standards below are applicable for financial statements as prepared after January 1, 2013 for IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, and are effective for IFRS as endorsed by the European Union for periods ending after January 1, 2014. For preparation of these financial statements, these standards have been early adopted under IFRS as endorsed by European Union.

Consolidation and disclosures

IFRS 10 “Consolidated Financial Statements”, IFRS 11 “Joint Arrangements”, IFRS 12 “Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities” and revised standards IAS 27 “Separate Financial Statements” and IAS 28 “Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures” were issued during 2011 and are required to be adopted, with retrospective effect, by January 1, 2013 as per IFRS as issued by the IASB and by January 1, 2014 as per IFRS as endorsed by the European Union. In preparing these financial statements these standards as per IFRS as endorsed by the European Union have been early adopted. The standards reinforce the principles for determining when an investor controls another entity, amend in certain cases the accounting for arrangements where an investor has joint control and introduce changes to certain disclosures. The impact of the changes did not have an impact on the financial statements.

Fair value measurement

IFRS 13 establishes a single framework for measuring fair value and making disclosures about fair value measurements when such measurements are required or permitted by other IFRSs. In accordance with the transitional provisions of IFRS 13, the Group has applied the new fair value measurement guidance prospectively and has not provided any comparative information for new disclosures. Notwithstanding the above, the change had no impact on the Group’s assets and liabilities.

 

F-8


Table of Contents

Presentation of items of Other Comprehensive Income (“OCI”)

As a result of amendments to IAS 1, the Group has modified the presentation of items of OCI in the statement of OCI, to present separately items that would be reclassified to profit or loss from those that would never be. Comparative information has been re-presented accordingly. For the Group there are no items that would never be reclassified to profit or loss.

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

The amendment to IAS32 regarding the presentation and offsetting of financial assets and financial liabilities had no impact on the Group’s assets and liabilities.

Use of estimates and judgments

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions that affect the application of accounting policies and the reported amounts of assets, liabilities, income and expenses. Actual results may differ from these estimates, which together with underlying assumptions are reviewed on an ongoing basis. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognized in the period in which the estimates are revised and in any future periods affected.

In particular, information about significant areas of estimation uncertainty and critical judgments in applying accounting policies that have the most significant effect on amounts recognized in the financial statements are discussed below:

Property, plant and equipment depreciation (see also Note 10)

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are also reviewed for impairment, where there has been a triggering event, by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on the Group’s best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is, therefore, subjective. Furthermore, the valuation of some of the assets under construction requires judgments which are related to the probability of signing lease contracts and obtaining planning permits.

Intangible fixed assets amortization (see also Note 11)

Estimated remaining useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually. The carrying values of intangible fixed assets are also reviewed for impairment where there has been a triggering event by assessing the present value of estimated future cash flows and net realizable value compared with net book value. The calculation of estimated future cash flows and residual values is based on the Group’s best estimates of future prices, output and costs and is, therefore, subjective.

Lease accounting (see also Note 22)

At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is, or contains, a lease. Classification of a lease contract is based on the extent to which risks and rewards incidental to ownership of a leased asset lie with the lessor or the lessee. The classification of lease contracts includes the use of judgments and estimates.

Provision for onerous lease contracts (see also Note 18)

A provision is made for the discounted amount of future losses that are expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet, or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted sublease income expected to be received over the minimum sublease term, which meets the Group’s revenue recognition criteria in arriving at the amount of future losses.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

Costs of site restoration (see also Note 24)

Liabilities in respect of obligations to restore premises to their original condition are estimated at the commencement of the lease and reviewed yearly, based on the rent period, contracted extension possibilities and possibilities of lease terminations.

Deferred taxation (see also Note 9)

Provision is made for deferred taxation at the rates of tax prevailing at the period-end dates unless future rates have been substantively enacted. Deferred tax assets are recognized where it is probable that they will be recovered, based on estimates of future taxable profits for each tax jurisdiction. The actual profitability may be different depending on local financial performance in each tax jurisdiction.

Share-based payments (see also Note 21)

The Group issues equity-settled share-based payments to certain employees under the terms of the long-term incentive plans. The charges related to equity-settled share-based payments, options to purchase ordinary shares, are measured at fair value at the date of grant. The fair value at the grant date is determined using the Black Scholes model and is expensed over the vesting period. The value of the expense is dependent upon certain assumptions including the expected future volatility of the Group’s share price at the date of grant.

Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (see also Note 19)

The Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are valued at amortized costs. The Senior Secured Notes due 2020 indenture includes optional redemption provisions, which allow us to redeem the Notes prior to their stated maturity. As part of the initial measurement of the amortized cost value of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020, we have assumed that the Notes will be held to maturity. If we redeem all or part of the Notes prior to their stated maturity the liability will be re-measured based on the original effective interest rate. The difference between the liability of excluding a change in assumed early redemption and the liability compared to including a change in assumed early redemption, will be reflected in our profit and loss.

Change in estimated useful lives of certain property, plant and equipment

A substantial amount of property, plant and equipment is recorded on the Group’s consolidated balance sheet. The majority of our property, plant and equipment represent the costs incurred to build out our data centers. We depreciate our property, plant and equipment using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of the respective assets. The Company reviews the estimated useful lives annually.

In the fourth quarter of the year 2013 the Company completed its review of the estimated useful lives of its property, plant and equipment. As a result of the review we concluded that we were generally using certain of our existing assets longer than originally anticipated. The estimated useful lives of certain of our property, plant and equipment have, therefore, been extended. This change was accounted for as a change in accounting estimate on a prospective basis effective October 1, 2013 under IAS 8 “Change in Accounting Estimates”.

In the fourth quarter of the year 2013, we recorded approximately €2 million lower depreciation expenses as a result of the changes in the estimated useful lives of certain of our property, plant and equipment. On an annualized basis, the depreciation charges would have been approximately €8 million lower.

A further outcome of the review was to enhance the classification and grouping of the different property, plant and equipment for which reference is made to in Note 10 “Property, plant and equipment”.

 

F-10


Table of Contents

The changes in useful lives are reflected in the tables below:

 

Prior year’s disclosure                              
Asset Category   Depreciation term  
Data center freehold land   Not depreciated  
Data center building and equipment   10-30 years  
Office buildings   10-15 years  
Office equipment   3-5 years  
Updated Disclosure                              
Asset Category   Depreciation term  
Data center freehold land   Not depreciated  
Data center buildings   15-30 years  
Data center infrastructure and equipment   5-20 years  
Office and other equipment   3-15 years  

Functional and presentation currency

These consolidated financial statements are presented in euro, the Company’s functional and presentation currency. All information presented in euros has been rounded to the nearest thousand, except when stated otherwise.

 

3 Significant accounting policies

Basis of consolidation

The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and all entities that are directly or indirectly controlled by the Company. Subsidiaries are entities that are controlled by the Group. The Group controls an entity when it is exposed to, or has the right to, variable returns from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date on which control commences until the date on which control ceases.

The accounting policies set out below have been applied consistently by all subsidiaries to all periods presented in these consolidated financial statements.

Loss of control

When the Group loses control over a subsidiary, the Company de-recognizes the assets and liabilities of the subsidiary, any non-controlling interests and the other components of equity related to the subsidiary. Any surplus or deficit arising on the loss of control is recognized in profit or loss.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation

Intercompany balances and transactions, and any unrealized income and expenses arising from intercompany transactions, are eliminated in preparing the consolidated financial statements.

Subsidiaries

With the exception of Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, all the subsidiary undertakings of the Group as set out below are wholly owned. Stichting Administratiekantoor is part of the consolidation based on the Group’s control over the entity.

 

F-11


Table of Contents
    Interxion HeadQuarters B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Nederland B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Trademarks B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Österreich GmbH, Vienna, Austria;

 

    Interxion Real Estate VII GmbH, Vienna, Austria;

 

    Interxion Belgium N.V., Brussels, Belgium;

 

    Interxion Real Estate IX N.V., Brussels, Belgium;

 

    Interxion Denmark ApS, Copenhagen, Denmark;

 

    Interxion Real Estate VI ApS, Copenhagen, Denmark;

 

    Interxion France SAS, Paris, France;

 

    Interxion Real Estate II SARL, Paris, France;

 

    Interxion Real Estate III SARL, Paris, France;

 

    Interxion Deutschland GmbH, Frankfurt, Germany;

 

    Interxion Ireland Ltd, Dublin, Ireland;

 

    Interxion Telecom SRL, Milan, Italy;

 

    Interxion España SA, Madrid, Spain;

 

    Interxion Sverige AB, Stockholm, Sweden;

 

    Interxion (Schweiz) AG, Zurich, Switzerland;

 

    Interxion Real Estate VIII AG, Zurich, Switzerland;

 

    Interxion Carrier Hotel Ltd., London, United Kingdom;

 

    Interxion Europe Ltd., London, United Kingdom;

 

    Interxion Real Estate Holding B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Real Estate I B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Real Estate IV B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Real Estate V B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Real Estate X B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Operational B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

    Interxion Datacenters B.V., The Hague, The Netherlands (formerly Centennium Detachering B.V.);

 

    Interxion Consultancy Services B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands (dormant);

 

    Interxion Telecom B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands (dormant);

 

    Interxion Trading B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands (dormant);

 

    Interxion B.V., Amsterdam, The Netherlands (dormant);

 

    Interxion Telecom Ltd., London, United Kingdom (dormant);

 

    Stichting Administratiekantoor Management Interxion, Amsterdam, The Netherlands.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

Foreign currency

Foreign currency transactions

The individual financial statements of each Group entity are presented in the currency of the primary economic environment in which the entity operates (its functional currency). For the purpose of the consolidated financial statements, the results and the financial position of each entity are expressed in euros, which is the functional currency of the Company and the presentation currency for the consolidated financial statements.

In preparing the financial statements of the individual entities, transactions in foreign currencies other than the entity’s functional currency are recorded at the rates of exchange prevailing at the dates of the transactions. At each balance sheet date, monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are retranslated at the rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are not retranslated. The income and expenses of foreign operations are translated to euros at average exchange rates.

Foreign operations

For the purpose of presenting consolidated financial statements, the assets and liabilities of the Group’s foreign operations are expressed in euros using exchange rates prevailing at the balance sheet date. Income and expense items are translated at average exchange rates for the period. Exchange differences, if any, arising on net investments including receivables from or payables to a foreign operation for which settlement is neither planned nor likely to occur, are recognized directly in the foreign currency translation reserve (FCTR) within equity. When control over a foreign operation is lost, in part or in full, the relevant amount in the FCTR is transferred to profit or loss.

Borrowing costs

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use or sale, are added to the cost of those assets, until such time as the assets are substantially ready for their intended use or sale. All other borrowing costs are recognized in profit or loss in the period in which they are incurred.

Borrowing costs are capitalized based on the effective interest rate of the Senior Secured Notes.

Statement of cash flows

The consolidated statement of cash flows is prepared using the indirect method. The cash flow statement distinguishes between operating, investing and financing activities.

Cash flows in foreign currencies are converted at the exchange rate at the dates of the transactions. Currency exchange differences on cash held are separately shown. Payments and receipts of corporate income taxes and interest paid are included as cash flow from operating activities.

Financial instruments

Derivative financial instruments

Derivatives are initially recognized at fair value; any attributable transaction costs are recognized in profit and loss as they are incurred. Subsequent to initial recognition, derivatives are measured at their fair value, and changes therein are generally recognized in profit and loss.

When a derivative is designated as a cash flow hedging instrument, the effective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is recognized in OCI and accumulated in the hedging reserve. Any ineffective portion of changes in the fair value of the derivative is recognized immediately in profit or loss.

The amount accumulated in equity is retained in OCI and reclassified to the profit or loss in the same period, or periods, during which the hedged item affects profit or loss.

 

F-13


Table of Contents

If the hedging instrument no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, expires, is sold, terminated or exercised, or the designation is revoked, hedge accounting is discontinued prospectively. If the forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the amount accumulated in equity is reclassified to profit or loss.

Fair values are obtained from quoted market prices in active markets or, where an active market does not exist, by using valuation techniques. Valuation techniques include discounted cash flow models.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Non-derivative financial instruments comprise trade and other receivables, cash and cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other payables.

Non-derivative financial instruments are recognized initially at fair value, net of any directly attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial recognition, non-derivative financial instruments are measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

The Group de-recognizes a financial asset when the contractual rights to the cash flows from the asset expire, or it transfers the right to receive the contractual cash flows in a transaction in which substantially all the risk and rewards of ownership of the financial asset are transferred. Any interest in such transferred financial assets that is created or retained by the Group is recognized as a separate asset or liability.

Financial assets and liabilities are offset and the net amount presented in the statement of financial position when, and only when, the Group has a legal right to offset the amounts and intends either to settle on a net basis or to realize the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Financial assets are designated as at fair value through profit and loss if the Group manages such investments and makes purchase and sale decisions based on their fair value in accordance with the Group’s risk management or investment strategy. Attributable transactions costs are recognized in profit and loss as incurred. Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss are measured at fair value and changes therein, which takes into account any dividend income, are recognized in profit and loss.

The fair values of investments in equity are determined with reference to their quoted closing bid price at the measurement date or, if unquoted, using a valuation technique.

Trade receivables and other current assets

Trade receivables and other current assets are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method, less provision for impairment.

A provision for impairment of trade receivables and other current assets is established when there is objective evidence that the Group will not be able to collect all amounts due according to the original term of the receivables. Significant financial difficulties of the debtor, probability that the debtor will enter bankruptcy or financial reorganization, and default or delinquency in payments are considered indicators that the trade receivable is impaired.

The amount of the provision is the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows, discounted at the original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use of an allowance account, and the amount of the loss is recognized in the income statement.

When a trade receivable and other current asset is uncollectable, it is written off against the allowance account for trade receivables. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited in the income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents includes cash in hand, deposits held at call with banks and other short-term highly liquid investments with original maturities of three months or less. Cash and cash equivalents, including short-term investments, is valued at face value, which equals its fair value.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the issue of ordinary shares and share options are recognized as a deduction from equity, net of any tax effects.

Preference share capital, no longer applicable since the IPO in January 2011, is classified as equity if it is non-redeemable and any dividends are discretionary. Dividends thereon are recognized as distributions within equity on approval by the Group’s shareholders.

Trade payables and other current liabilities

Trade payables and other current liabilities are recognized initially at fair value and subsequently measured at amortized cost using the effective interest method.

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment are measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses.

Cost includes expenditure that is directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of the asset and comprises purchase cost, together with the incidental costs of installation and commissioning. These costs include external consultancy fees, capitalized borrowing costs, rent and associated costs attributable to bringing the assets to a working condition for their intended used and internal employment costs that are directly and exclusively related to the underlying asset. Where it is probable that the underlying property lease will not be renewed, the cost of self-constructed assets includes the estimated costs of dismantling and removing the items and restoring the site on which they are located.

When parts of an item of property, plant and equipment have different useful lives, they are accounted for as separate items (major components) of property, plant and equipment.

Gains and losses on disposal of an item of property, plant and equipment are determined by comparing the proceeds from disposal with the carrying amount of property, plant and equipment and are recognized within income.

The cost of replacing part of an item of property, plant and equipment is recognized in the carrying amount of the item if it is probable that the future economic benefits embodied within the part will flow to the Group and its cost can be measured reliably. The carrying amount of the replaced part is de-recognized. The costs of the day-to-day servicing of property, plant and equipment are recognized in profit or loss as incurred.

Depreciation is calculated from the date an asset becomes available for use and is depreciated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of each part of an item of property, plant and equipment. Leased assets are depreciated on the same basis as owned assets over the shorter of the lease term and their useful lives. Following the change in estimated useful lives, the principal periods, prospectively applied as of October 1, 2013, used for this purpose are:

 

Data center freehold land    Not depreciated
Data center buildings    15-30 years
Data center infrastructure and equipment    5-20 years
Office and other equipment    3-15 years

Depreciation methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually.

Data center freehold land consists of the land owned by the Company. The data center buildings consist of the core and shell in which we have constructed a data center. Data center infrastructure and equipment comprises of data center structures, leasehold improvements, data center cooling and power infrastructure, including infrastructure for advanced environmental controls such as ventilation and air conditioning, specialized heating, fire detection and suppression equipment and monitoring equipment. Office and other equipment comprises of office leasehold improvements and office equipment consisting of furniture, computer equipment and software.

 

F-15


Table of Contents

Intangible assets

Intangible assets represent power grid rights, software and other intangible assets, and are recognized at cost less accumulated amortization and accumulated impairment losses. Other intangible assets principally consist of lease premiums (paid in addition to obtain rental contracts).

Software includes development expenditure, which is capitalized only if development costs can be measured reliably, the product or process is technically and commercially feasible, future economic benefits are probable, and the Group intends to and has sufficient resources to complete development and to use the asset. The expenditure capitalized includes the cost of material, services and direct labor costs that are directly attributable to preparing the asset for its intended use.

Amortization is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful lives of the intangible asset. Amortization methods, useful lives and residual values are reviewed annually.

 

The estimated useful lives are:   
Power grid rights    10–15 years
Software    3–5 years
Other intangibles    3–12 years

Impairment of non-financial assets

The carrying amounts of the Group’s non-financial assets, other than deferred tax assets, are reviewed at each reporting date to determine whether there is any indication of impairment. If any such indication exists, then the asset’s recoverable amount is estimated. For intangible assets that are not yet available for use, the recoverable amount is estimated at each reporting date.

The recoverable amount of an asset or cash-generating unit is the greater of either its value in use or its fair value less costs to sell. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows are discounted to their present value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the asset. For the purpose of impairment testing, assets are grouped together into the smallest group of assets that generates cash inflows from continuing use that are largely independent of the cash inflows of other assets or groups of assets (the “cash-generating unit”).

Considering the Company manages its data centers by country, and, given the data center campus structures, the financial performance of data centers within a country is highly inter-dependent, the Company has determined that the cash-generating unit for impairment-testing purposes should be the group of data centers per country, unless specific circumstances would indicate that a single data center is a cash-generating unit.

An impairment loss is recognized if the carrying amount of an asset or its cash-generating unit exceeds its estimated recoverable amount. Impairment losses are recognized in profit or loss. Impairment losses recognized in respect of cash-generating units are to reduce the carrying amount of the assets in the unit (group of units) on a pro-rata basis.

Impairment losses recognized in prior periods are assessed at each reporting date for any indications that the loss has decreased or no longer exists. An impairment loss is reversed if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amount. An impairment loss is reversed only to the extent that the asset’s carrying amount does not exceed the carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation or amortization, if no impairment loss had been recognized.

Borrowings

Borrowings are recognized initially at fair value, net of transaction costs incurred. Borrowings are subsequently stated at amortized cost; with any difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value recognized in the income statement over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

 

F-16


Table of Contents

Borrowings are classified as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement of the liability for at least 12 months after the balance sheet date. The Group de-recognizes a borrowing when its contractual obligations are discharged, cancelled or expired.

As part of the initial measurement of the amortized costs value of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020 it is assumed that the Notes will be held to maturity. If an early redemption of all or part of the Notes is expected the liability will be re-measured based on the original effective interest rate. The difference between the liability, excluding a change in assumed early redemption and the liability, including a change in assumed early redemption, will go through the profit and loss.

Provisions

A provision is recognized in the statement of financial position when the Group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event; it is probable that an outflow of economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be estimated reliably. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and, where appropriate, the risks specific to the liability. The discount rate arising on the provision is amortized in future years through interest.

A provision for site restoration is recognized when costs for restoring leasehold premises to their original condition at the end of the lease need to be made and the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be probable. The discounted cost of the liability is included in the related assets and is depreciated over the remaining estimated term of the lease. If the likelihood of this liability is estimated to be possible, rather than probable, it is disclosed as a contingent liability in Note 24.

A provision for onerous lease contracts is recognized when the expected benefits to be derived by the Group from a contract are lower than the unavoidable cost of meeting its obligations under the contract. The provision is measured at the discounted amount of future losses expected to be incurred in respect of unused data center sites over the term of the leases. Where unused sites have been sublet or partly sublet, management has taken account of the contracted sublease income expected to be received over the minimum sublease term, which meets the Group’s revenue recognition criteria in arriving at the amount of future losses. Before a provision is established, the Group recognizes any impairment loss on the assets associated with that contract.

Leases

Leases, in which the Group assumes substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, are classified as finance leases. On initial recognition, the leased asset is measured at an amount equal to the lower of either its fair value or the present value of the minimum lease payments. Subsequent to initial recognition, the asset is accounted for in accordance with the accounting policy applicable to that asset.

Other leases are operating leases and the leased assets are not recognized on the Group’s statement of financial position. Payments made under operating leases are recognized in the income statement, or capitalized during construction, on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease. Lease incentives received are recognized as an integral part of the total lease expense, over the term of the lease.

Minimum finance lease payments are apportioned between the finance charge and the reduction of the outstanding liability. The finance charge is allocated to each period during the lease term so as to produce a constant periodic rate of interest on the remaining balance of the liability.

At inception or modification of an arrangement, the Group determines whether such an arrangement is, or contains, a lease. This will be the case if the following two criteria are met:

 

    the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets; and

 

    the arrangement contains the right to use an asset(s).

At inception or on reassessment of the arrangement, the Group separates payments and other consideration required by such an arrangement into those for the lease and those for other elements on the basis of their relative fair values.

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Segment reporting

The segments are reported in a manner consistent with internal reporting provided to the chief operating decision-maker, identified as the Board of Directors. There are two segments: the first segment is France, Germany, The Netherlands and the United Kingdom, the second segment is Rest of Europe , which comprises Austria, Belgium, Denmark, Ireland, Spain, Sweden and Switzerland. Shared expenses such as corporate management, general and administrative expenses, loans and borrowings and related expenses and income tax assets and liabilities are stated in Corporate and other .

Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a reasonable basis. Unallocated items presented as Corporate and other principally comprise loans and borrowings and related expenses; corporate assets and expenses (primarily the Company’s headquarters); and income tax assets and liabilities.

Segment capital expenditure is defined as the net cash outflow during the period to acquire property, plant and equipment, and intangible assets other than goodwill.

EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA, as well as recurring revenue, are additional indicators of our operating performance, and are not required by or presented in accordance with IFRS. EBITDA is defined as operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets. We define Adjusted EBITDA as EBITDA adjusted to exclude share-based payments, increase/decrease in provision for onerous lease contracts, IPO transaction costs and income from subleases on unused data center sites. We present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA as additional information because we understand that they are measures used by certain investors and because they are used in our financial covenants in our €100 million Revolving Facility Agreement and €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020. Other companies may, however, present EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA differently. EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA are not measures of financial performance under IFRS and should not be considered as an alternative to operating profit or as a measure of liquidity or an alternative to net income as indicators of our operating performance or any other measure of performance derived in accordance with IFRS.

This information, provided to the chief operating decision-maker, is disclosed to permit a more complete analysis of our operating performance. Exceptional items are those significant items that are separately disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence to enable a full understanding of the Group’s financial performance.

Revenue recognition

Revenue is recognized when it is probable that future economic benefits will flow to the Group and that these benefits, together with their related costs, can be measured reliably. Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable taking into account any discounts or volume rebates.

The Group reviews transactions for separately identifiable components and, if necessary, applies individual recognition treatment, revenues are allocated to separately identifiable components based on their relative fair values.

The Group earns colocation revenue as a result of providing data center services to customers at its data centers. Colocation revenue and lease income are recognized in profit or loss on a straight-line basis over the term of the customer contract. Incentives granted are recognized as an integral part of the total income, over the term of the customer contract. Customers are usually invoiced quarterly in advance and income is recognized on a straight-line basis over the quarter. Initial setup fees payable at the beginning of customer contracts are deferred at inception and recognized in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the initial term of the customer contract. Power revenue is recognized based on customers’ usage.

Other services revenue, including managed services, connectivity and customer installation services including equipment sales are recognized when the services are rendered. Certain installation services and equipment sales, which by their nature have a non-recurring character, are presented as non-recurring revenues and are recognized on delivery of service.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

Deferred revenues relating to invoicing in advance and initial setup fees are carried on the statement of financial position as part of trade payables and other liabilities. Deferred revenues due to be recognized after more than one year are held in non-current liabilities.

Cost of sales

The cost of sales consists mainly of rental costs for the data centers and offices, power costs, maintenance costs relating to the data center equipment, operation and support personnel costs and costs related to installations and other customer requirements. In general, maintenance and repairs are expensed as incurred. In cases where maintenance contracts are in place, the costs are recorded on a straight-line basis over the contractual period.

Sales and marketing costs

The operating expenses related to sales and marketing consist of costs for personnel (including sales commissions), marketing and other costs directly related to the sales process. Costs of advertising and promotion are expensed as incurred.

General and administrative costs

General and administrative costs are expensed as incurred.

Employee benefits

Defined contribution pension plans

A defined contribution pension plan is a post-employment plan under which an entity pays fixed contributions into a separate entity and has no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to defined contribution plans are recognized as an employee benefit expense in the income statement in the periods during which the related services are rendered by employees. Prepaid contributions are recognized as an asset to the extent that a cash refund or a reduction in future payments is available. Contributions to a defined contribution plan that are due more than 12 months after the end of the period in which the employees render the service are discounted to their present value.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits are recognized as an expense when the Group is demonstrably committed, without realistic possibility of withdrawal, to a formal detailed plan to either terminate employment before the normal retirement date, or to provide termination benefits as a result of an offer made to encourage voluntary redundancy. Termination benefits for voluntary redundancy are recognized as an expense if the Group has made an offer of voluntary redundancy, it is probable that the offer will be accepted, and the number of acceptances can be estimated reliably. If benefits are payable more than 12 months after the reporting date, they are discounted to their present value.

Share-based payments

The share-option programme enables Group employees to acquire shares (and before the IPO share certificates) of the Company. The fair value at the date of grant to employees of share options, as determined using the Black Scholes model, is recognized as an employee expense, with a corresponding increase in equity, over the period that the employees become unconditionally entitled to the options. The amount recognized as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of share options that vest.

Finance income and expense

Finance expense comprises interest payable on borrowings calculated using the effective interest rate method, fair value losses on financial assets at fair value through profit and loss and foreign exchange gains and losses. Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition or construction of data center assets, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to get ready for their intended use, are added to the costs of those assets, until such time as the assets are ready for their intended use.

 

F-19


Table of Contents

Interest income is recognized in the income statement as it accrues, using the effective interest method. The interest expense component of finance lease payments is recognized in the income statement using the effective interest rate method.

Foreign currency gains and losses are reported on a net basis, as either finance income or expenses, depending on whether the foreign currency movements are in a net gain or a net loss position.

Income tax

Income tax on the profit or loss for the year comprises current and deferred tax. Income tax is recognized in the income statement except to the extent that it relates to items recognized directly in equity, in which case it is recognized in equity.

Current tax is the expected tax payable on the taxable income for the year, using tax rates enacted or substantially enacted at the balance sheet date, and any adjustment to tax payable in respect of previous years.

Deferred tax is recognized using the balance sheet liability method, providing for temporary differences between the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities for financial reporting purposes and the amounts used for taxation purposes. The following temporary differences are not provided for: the initial recognition of assets or liabilities that affect neither accounting nor taxable profit, and differences relating to investments in subsidiaries to the extent that they will probably not reverse in the foreseeable future. The amount of deferred tax provided is based on the expected manner of realization or settlement of the carrying amount of assets and liabilities, using tax rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date that are expected to be applied to temporary differences when they reverse or loss carry forwards when they are utilized.

A deferred tax asset is also recognized for unused tax losses and tax credits. A deferred tax asset is recognized only to the extent that it is probable that future taxable profits will be available against which the asset can be utilized. Deferred tax assets are reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable that the related tax benefit will be realized.

Additional income taxes that arise from the distribution of dividends are recognized at the same time as the liability to pay the related dividend.

In determining the amount of current and deferred tax the Company takes into account the impact of uncertain tax positions and whether additional taxes and interest may be due. The Company believes that its accruals for tax liabilities are adequate for all open tax years based on its assessment of many factors, including interpretations of tax law and prior experience. This assessment relies on estimates and assumptions and may involve a series of judgments about future events. New information may become available that causes the Company to change its judgment regarding the adequacy of existing tax liabilities; such changes to tax liabilities will have an impact on tax expense in the period that such a determination is made.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are offset if there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax liabilities and assets, and they relate to taxes levied by the same tax authority on the same taxable entity, or on different tax entities, but they intend to settle current tax liabilities and assets on a net basis of their tax assets and liabilities will be realized simultaneously.

Earnings per share

The Group presents basic and diluted earnings per share (EPS) data for its ordinary shares. Before the IPO, ordinary shares shared on an equal basis in profits with preference shares. Basic EPS is calculated by dividing the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders of the Company by the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding during the year. Diluted EPS is determined by adjusting the profit or loss attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders and the weighted average number of ordinary and preference shares outstanding for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares, which comprise the share options granted.

 

F-20


Table of Contents

New standards, amendments and interpretations not yet adopted

The new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations listed below were available for early adoption in the annual period beginning January 1, 2013. The Group has yet to adopt the following new standards, amendments to standards and interpretations, as they were not compulsory:

 

Effective date

  

New standard or amendments

January 1, 2014    Amendments to IAS32: Off-setting financial assets and financial liabilities;
   Amendments to IFRS10, IFRS12 and IAS27: Investment entities;
   Amendments to IAS36: Recoverable amount disclosures for non-financial assets.

 

4 Financial risk management

Overview

The Group has exposure to the following risks from its use of financial instruments:

 

    Credit risk

 

    Liquidity risk

 

    Market risk

 

    Other risks

This note presents information about the Group’s exposure to each of the above risks, the Group’s goals, policies and processes for measuring and managing risk, and the its management of capital. Further quantitative disclosures are included throughout these consolidated financial statements.

The Board of Directors has overall responsibility for the oversight of the Group’s risk management framework.

The Group continues developing and evaluating the Group’s risk management policies with a view to identifying and analyzing the risks it faces, to setting appropriate risk limits and controls, and to monitoring risks and adherence to limits. Risk management policies and systems are reviewed regularly to reflect changes in market conditions and the Group’s activities. The Group, through its training and management standards and procedures, aims to develop a disciplined and constructive control environment in which all employees understand their roles and obligations.

The Board of Directors oversees the way management monitors compliance with the Group’s risk management policies and procedures and reviews the adequacy of the risk management framework in relation to the risks the Group faces.

Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of financial loss to the Group if a customer, bank or other counterparty to a financial instrument fails to meet its contractual obligations. This risk principally arises from the Group’s receivables from customers. The Group’s most significant customer, serviced from multiple locations and under multiple service contracts, accounts for less than 10% of the recurring revenues for 2013, 2012 and 2011.

Trade and other receivables

The Group’s exposure to credit risk is mainly influenced by the individual characteristics of each customer. The demographics of the Group’s customer base, including the default risk of the industry and the country in which customers operate, has less of an influence on credit risk.

The Group has an established credit policy under which each new customer is analyzed individually for creditworthiness before it begins to trade with the Group. If customers are independently rated, these ratings are used. If, there is no independent rating, the credit quality of the customer is analyzed taking its financial position, past experience and other factors into account.

 

F-21


Table of Contents

The Group’s standard terms require contracted services to be paid in advance of these services being delivered. In the event that a customer fails to pay amounts that are due, the Group has a clearly defined escalation policy that can result in a customer’s access to their equipment being denied or service to the customer being suspended.

In 2013, 95% (2012: 94% and 2011: 93%) of the Group’s revenue was derived from contracts under which customers paid an agreed contracted amount, including power on a regular basis (usually monthly or quarterly) or from deferred initial setup fees paid at the outset of the customer contract.

As a result of the Group’s credit policy and the contracted nature of the revenues, losses have occurred infrequently (see Note 20). The Group establishes an allowance that represents its estimate of potential incurred losses in respect of trade and other receivables. This allowance is entirely composed of a specific loss component relating to individually significant exposures.

Bank counterparties

The Group has certain obligations under the terms of its revolving loan agreement and Senior Secured Notes which limit disposal with surplus cash balances. Term risk is limited to short-term deposits. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our facilities. The Company grants rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases (see Note 24).

Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will not be able to meet its financial obligations as they fall due. The Group’s approach to managing liquidity is to ensure, as far as possible, that it will always have sufficient liquidity to meet its liabilities when due, under both normal and stressed conditions, without incurring unacceptable losses or risking damage to the its reputation or jeopardizing its future.

The majority of the Group’s revenues and operating costs are contracted, which assists it in monitoring cash flow requirements, which is done on a daily and weekly basis. Typically, the Group ensures that it has sufficient cash on demand to meet expected normal operational expenses, including the servicing of financial obligations, for a period of 60 days; this excludes the potential impact of extreme circumstances, such as natural disasters, that cannot reasonably be predicted.

All significant capital expansion projects are subject to formal approval by the Board of Directors, and material expenditure or customer commitments are only made once the management is satisfied that the Group has adequate committed funding to cover the anticipated expenditure (see Note 22).

On July 3, 2013, the Company issued an aggregate principal amount of €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (the “Senior Secured Notes due 2020”). The net proceeds of the offering were used to purchase all of the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017, which were tendered in the offer for those notes and to redeem the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017 which remained outstanding following the expiration and settlement of the tender offer and consent solicitation, to pay all related fees, expenses and premiums and for other general corporate purposes.

The €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are governed by an indenture dated July 3, 2013, between the Company, as issuer, and The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Trustee. The indenture contains customary restrictive covenants, including but not limited to limitations or restrictions on our ability to incur debt, grant liens, make restricted payments and sell assets. The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions and are governed by a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest) to exceed 2.00 and a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00.

 

F-22


Table of Contents

The obligations under the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are guaranteed by certain of the Company’s subsidiaries.

On June 17, 2013, the Company entered into a new €100 million revolving facility agreement with ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, Credit Suisse AG, Banc of America Securities Limited, as arrangers, the lenders thereunder, Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee. This new €100 million revolving facility agreement replaced the €60 million revolving facility agreement.

On July 3, 2013, in connection with the issuance of the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020, all conditions precedent to the utilization of this revolving facility agreement were satisfied.

The revolving facility agreement contains customary restrictive covenants, including but not limited to limitations or restrictions on our ability to incur debt, grant liens, make restricted payments and sell assets. The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions and are governed by a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 and a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00. The revolving facility also requires Interxion Holding N.V., each borrower and each guarantor to observe certain customary affirmative covenants (subject to certain agreed exceptions, qualifications and thresholds) and requires the Company to comply with a leverage ratio financial covenant (calculated as the ratio of total net debt at each quarter end to pro forma EBITDA for the twelve months ending on that quarter end) not to exceed 4.00 to 1.00.

On November 5, 2012, the Company secured a five-year mortgage bank loan of €10 million, which is secured by mortgages on the AMS6 property, owned by Interxion Real Estate IV B.V. The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points. Interest is due quarterly in arrears. No covenants apply to this loan next to the repayment schedule.

On January 18, 2013, the Group entered into two mortgage financings totaling €10 million. The loans are secured by mortgages on the PAR3 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl and the PAR5 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, pledges on the lease agreements, and are guaranteed by Interxion France SAS. The repayment of principal under the mortgage loans are required to be repaid in quarterly instalments collectively amounting to €167,000 commencing on April 18, 2013. The mortgages have a maturity of fifteen years and have a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The interest rates have been fixed through an interest rate swap for 75% of the principal outstanding amount for a period of ten years.

On June 26, 2013, the Group entered into a €6 million mortgage financing. The loan is secured by a mortgage on the AMS3 property, owned by Interxion Real Estate V B.V. and a pledge on the lease agreement. The principal is to be repaid in annual instalments of €400,000 commencing May 1, 2014 and a final repayment of €4,400,000 due on May 1, 2018. The mortgage has a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 275 basis points. The loan contains a minimum of 1.1 debt service capacity covenant ratio based on the operations of Interxion Real Estate V B.V.

Further details are in the Borrowing section (see Note 19).

Market risk

Currency risk

The Group is exposed to currency risk on sales, purchases and borrowings that are denominated in a currency other than the respective functional currencies of Group entities, primarily the euro, but also pounds sterling (GBP), Swiss francs (CHF), Danish Kroner (DKK) and Swedish Kronor (SEK). The currencies in which these transactions are primarily denominated are EUR, GBP, CHF, DKK and SEK.

Historically, the revenues and operating costs of each of the Group’s entities have provided an economic hedge against foreign currency exposure and have not required foreign currency hedging.

It is anticipated that a number of capital expansion projects will be funded in a currency that is not the functional currency of the entity in which the associated expenditure will be incurred. In the event that this occurs and is material to the Group, the Group will seek to implement an appropriate hedging strategy.

 

F-23


Table of Contents

The majority of the Group’s borrowings are euro denominated and the Company believes that the Interest on these borrowings will be serviced from the cash flows generated by the underlying operations of the Group, the functional currency of which is the euro. The Group’s investments in subsidiaries are not hedged.

Interest rate risk

Following the issue, in 2010, of Senior Secured Notes due 2017 and the repayment of the old bank facilities, the Group was no longer exposed to significant variable interest rate expense for borrowings. In 2013, as a result of the issue of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020 this was continued.

On November 5, 2012, the Company secured a five-year mortgage €10 million on the AMS6 data center property. The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points per annum. Interest is due quarterly in arrears.

On January 18, 2013, the Group entered into two mortgage financings totaling €10 million. The loans are secured by mortgages, on the PAR3 land owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl, and the PAR5 land owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, pledges on the lease agreements, and are guaranteed by Interxion France SAS. The mortgages have a maturity of fifteen years and have a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The interest rates have been fixed through an interest rate swap for 75% of the principal outstanding amount for a period of 10 years.

On June 26, 2013, the Group entered into a €6 million mortgage financing. The loan is secured by a mortgage on the AMS3 property owned by Interxion Real Estate V B.V. and a pledge on the lease agreement. The mortgage loan has a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 275 basis points.

As at December 31, 2013, the interest payable under the Revolving Facility on (i) any EUR amounts drawn would be at the rate of EURIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (ii) any Danish Kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of CIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, (iii) any Swedish Kroner amounts drawn would be at the rate of STIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum and (iv) other applicable currencies including GBP amounts drawn at the rate of LIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum. The Revolving Facility was undrawn as at December 31, 2013.

As at December 31, 2013, the interest rate risk was very limited.

Other risks

Price risk

There is a risk that changes in market circumstances, such as strong unanticipated increases in operational costs, construction of new data centers or churn in customer contracts, will negatively affect the Group’s income. Customers individually have medium-term contracts that require notice prior to termination. The objective of market risk management is to manage and control market risk exposures within acceptable parameters, while optimizing the return.

The Group is a significant user of power and has exposure to increases in power prices. It uses independent consultants to monitor price changes in electricity and seeks to negotiate fixed-price term agreements with the power supply companies, not more than for own use, where possible. The risk to the Group is mitigated by the contracted ability to recover power price increases through adjustments in the pricing for power services.

Capital management

The Group has a capital base comprising its equity, including reserves, Senior Secured Notes, mortgage loan, finance leases and committed debt facilities. It monitors its solvency ratio, financial leverage, funds from operations and net debt with reference to multiples of its previous twelve months’ Adjusted EBITDA levels. The Company’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base and access to capital in order to sustain the future development of the business and maintain shareholders’, creditors’ and customers’ confidence.

The principal use of capital in the development of the business is through capital expansion projects for the deployment of further equipped space in new and existing data centers. Major capital expansion projects are not started unless the Company has access to adequate capital resources at the start of the project to complete the project, and they are evaluated against target internal rates of return before approval. Capital expansion projects are continually monitored before and after completion.

 

F-24


Table of Contents

There were no changes in the Group’s approach to capital management during the year.

 

5 Information by segment

Operating segments are to be identified on the basis of internal reports about components of the Group that are regularly reviewed by the chief operating decision maker in order to allocate resources to the segments and to assess their performance. Management monitors the operating results of its business units separately for the purpose of making decisions about performance assessments.

The performance of the operating segments is primarily based on the measures of revenue, EBITDA and Adjusted EBITDA. Other information provided, except as noted below, to the Board of Directors is measured in a manner consistent with that in the financial statements.

 

F-25


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2013

 

     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     182,165        109,109        291,274        —          291,274   

Non-recurring revenue

     10,293        5,544        15,837        —          15,837   

Total revenue

     192,458        114,653        307,111        —          307,111   

Cost of sales

     (71,944     (44,522     (116,466     (7,675     (124,141
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     120,514        70,131        190,645        (7,675     182,970   

Other income

     341        —          341                  341   

Sales and marketing costs

     (7,200     (5,212     (12,412     (10,406     (22,818

General and administrative costs

     (47,074     (23,437     (70,511     (19,623     (90,134
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     66,581        41,482        108,063        (37,704     70,359   

Net finance expense

             (57,453
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             12,906   
          

 

 

 

Total assets

     619,356        223,274        842,630        68,145        910,775   

Total liabilities

     148,884        39,708        188,592        334,281        522,873   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (93,676     (47,016     (140,692     (2,689     (143,381

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (37,371     (17,269     (54,640     (3,030     (57,670

Adjusted EBITDA

     104,373        59,097        163,470        (31,633     131,837   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

 

* Capital expenditures, including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, as recorded in the consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2012

 

     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     159,136        100,113        259,249        —          259,249   

Non-recurring revenue

     12,640        5,232        17,872        —          17,872   

Total revenue

     171,776        105,345        277,121        —          277,121   

Cost of sales

     (66,367     (40,559     (106,926     (6,156     (113,082
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     105,409        64,786        170,195        (6,156     164,039   

Other income

     463        —          463                  463   

Sales and marketing costs

     (6,039     (4,259     (10,298     (9,802     (20,100

General and administrative costs

     (36,497     (21,558     (58,055     (21,188     (79,243
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     63,336        38,969        102,305        (37,146     65,159   

Net finance expense

             (17,746
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             47,413   
          

 

 

 

Total assets

     546,842        197,802        744,644        74,580        819,224   

Total liabilities

     139,576        48,183        187,759        255,891        443,650   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (145,080     (29,014     (174,094     (4,237     (178,331

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (25,686     (15,691     (41,377     (2,616     (43,993

Adjusted EBITDA

     90,121        55,068        145,189        (30,174     115,015   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

 

* Capital expenditures, including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, as recorded in the consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Information by segment, 2011

 

     FR, DE,
NL and
UK
    Rest of
Europe
    Subtotal     Corporate
and other
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Recurring revenue

     136,460        91,868        228,328        —          228,328   

Non-recurring revenue

     10,352        5,630        15,982        —          15,982   

Total revenue

     146,812        97,498        244,310                  244,310   

Cost of sales

     (58,969     (37,685     (96,654     (5,112     (101,766
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Gross profit/(loss)

     87,843        59,813        147,656        (5,112     142,544   

Other income

     487        0        487        0        487   

Sales and marketing costs

     (4,730     (3,876     (8,606     (9,074     (17,680

General and administrative costs

     (30,014     (17,956     (47,970     (19,288     (67,258
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit/(loss)

     53,586        37,981        91,567        (33,474     58,093   

Net finance expense

             (22,784
          

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

             35,309   
          

 

 

 

Total assets

     412,160        181,186        593,346        150,935        744,281   

Total liabilities

     97,779        40,774        138,553        275,167        413,720   

Capital expenditures, including intangible assets*

     (122,880     (35,366     (158,246     (3,710     (161,956

Depreciation, amortization and impairments

     (21,289     (12,371     (33,660     (1,892     (35,552

Adjusted EBITDA

     74,774        50,676        125,450        (27,813     97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Note:—

 

* Capital expenditures, including intangible assets, represent payments to acquire property, plant and equipment and intangible assets, as recorded in the consolidated statement of cash flows as “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” and “Purchase of intangible assets” respectively.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Reconciliation Adjusted EBITDA

Consolidated

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year attributable to shareholders

     6,824        31,631        25,572   

Income tax expense

     6,082        15,782        9,737   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     12,906        47,413        35,309   

Finance income

     (484     (907     (2,290

Finance expense

     57,937        18,653        25,074   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Operating profit

     70,359        65,159        58,093   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     57,670        43,993        35,552   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     128,029        109,152        93,645   

Share-based payments

     4,149        5,488        2,736   

Increase/(decrease) in provision of onerous lease contracts (2)

     —          838        18   

IPO transaction costs

     —          —          1,725   

Income from sublease of unused data center sites

     (341     (463     (487
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     131,837        115,015        97,637   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

France, Germany, The Netherlands and UK

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     66,581        63,336        53,586   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     37,371        25,686        21,289   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     103,952        89,022        74,875   

Share-based payments

     762        724        368   

Increase/(decrease) in provision onerous lease contracts (2)

     —          838        18   

Income from sublease of unused data center sites

     (341     (463     (487
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     104,373        90,121        74,774   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Rest of Europe

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     41,482         38,969         37,981   

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     17,269         15,691         12,371   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     58,751         54,660         50,352   

Share-based payments

     346         408         324   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     59,097         55,068         50,676   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.
(2) Before deduction of income from subleases on unused data center sites.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

Corporate and other

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Operating profit

     (37,704     (37,146     (33,474

Depreciation, amortization and impairment

     3,030        2,616        1,892   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

EBITDA (1)

     (34,674     (34,530     (31,582

Share-based payments

     3,041        4,356        2,044   

IPO transaction costs

               —          1,725   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Adjusted EBITDA

     (31,633     (30,174     (27,813
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Operating profit plus depreciation, amortization and impairment of assets.

In 2013, the share-based payments include an amount of €559,000 related to taxes and social security charges (2012: €2,078,000).

In 2011, the IPO transaction costs represented the write-off of the proportion of the IPO costs allocated to the selling shareholders at the Initial Public Offering.

 

6 Revenue

Revenue consists of colocation revenue derived from the rendering of data center services, which includes customer installation services and equipment sales.

 

7 Employee benefit expenses

The Group employed an average of 425 employees (full-time equivalents) during 2013 (2012: 385 and 2011: 347). Costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Salaries and bonuses

     32,369         30,229         26,540   

Social security charges

     5,535         5,295         4,364   

Contributions to defined contribution pension plans

     2,051         1,776         1,487   

Other personnel-related costs

     8,309         5,233         6,155   

Share-based payments

     4,149         5,488         2,736   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     52,413         48,021         41,282   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The following income statement line items include employee benefit expenses of:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Costs of sales

     19,963         16,634         15,147   

Sales and marketing costs

     14,942         12,300         11,352   

General and administrative costs

     17,508         19,087         14,783   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     52,413         48,021         41,282   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-30


Table of Contents

The Group operates a defined contribution scheme for most of its employees. The contributions are made in accordance with the scheme and are expensed in the income statement as incurred.

In 2013 and 2012, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers. The total charge in 2013, included in General and administrative costs, amounted to €417,000 (2012: €1,854,000).

 

8 Finance income and expense

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Bank and other interest

     484        907        2,271   

Net foreign currency exchange gain

               —          19   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance income

     484        907        2,290   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Interest expense on Senior Secured Notes, bank and other loans

     (22,594     (16,680     (23,302

Interest expense on finance leases

     (1,642     (61     (57

Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts

     (334     (428     (518

Other financial expenses

     (32,751     (1,221     (1,197

Net foreign currency exchanges loss

     (616     (263     —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Finance expense

     (57,937     (18,653     (25,074
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net finance expense

     (57,453     (17,746     (22,784
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In 2013, the “Interest expense on Senior Secured Notes, bank and other loans” increased principally as result of €7.5 million lower capitalized borrowing costs.

As a result of the refinancing completed on July 3, 2013, the Company incurred costs, presented in “Other financial expenses”, of approximately €31 million of which €26.5 million in cash related to the tender and redemption premiums and consent fees for the 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017 (the “Senior Secured Notes due 2017”) and €4.5 million non-cash expenses from the deferred financing costs related to the former €60 million Revolving Facility Agreement and the unamortized costs of the Senior Secured Notes due 2017.

The “Interest expense on provision for onerous lease contracts” related to the unwinding of the discount rate used to calculate the “Provision for onerous lease contracts”.

 

9 Income taxes

Income tax benefit/(expense)

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Current taxes

     (7,888     (6,219     (5,033

Deferred taxes

     1,806        (9,563     (4,704
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Total income tax (expense)/benefit

     (6,082     (15,782     (9,737
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-31


Table of Contents

Reconciliation of effective tax rate

A reconciliation between income taxes calculated at the Dutch statutory tax rate of 25% in 2013 (25% in 2012 and 25% in 2011) and the actual tax benefit/(expense) with an effective interest rate of 47.1% (33.3% in 2012 and 27.6% in 2011) is as follows:

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Profit for the year

     6,824        31,631        25,572   

Income tax expense

     (6,082     (15,782     (9,737
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Profit before taxation

     12,906        47,413        35,309   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax using Company’s domestic tax rate

     (3,227     (11,854     (8,827

Effect of tax rates in foreign jurisdictions

     (1,007     (1,308     (1,300

Change in tax rate and legislation

     305        (1,042     (325

Non-deductible expenses

     (2,041     (1,372     (1,494

Recognition of previously unrecognized tax losses

               355        2,741   

Current year results for which no deferred tax asset was recognized

     25        (328     219   

Prior year adjustments included in current year tax

     344        201        (243

Change in previously unrecognized temporary differences

               —          37   

Other

     (481     (434     (545
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Income tax (expense)/benefit

     (6,082     (15,782     (9,737
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Recognized deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

The movement in recognized deferred tax assets during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment,
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
    Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
    Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2011

     296        5,248        4,693        38,374        48,611   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     14,526        (866     (2,635     (15,316     (4,291

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          3,225        3,225   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     (74     —          (10     197        113   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     14,748        4,382        2,048        26,480        47,658   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2012

     210        (743     2,547        (8,013     (5,999

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          (571     (571

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     21        —          5        255        281   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

     14,979        3,639        4,600        18,151        41,369   

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2013

     (990     (1,022     869        5,924        4,781   

Recognized in equity

     —          —          —          544        544   

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     2        —          —          (104     (102
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

December 31, 2013

     13,991        2,617        5,469        24,515        46,592   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax liabilities

     (7,696     —          (693     (3,757     (12,146
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     6,295        2,617        4,776        20,758        34,446   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-32


Table of Contents

Accumulated tax losses in The Netherlands available as at December 31, 2010, which were due to expire by December 31, 2011, have been preserved and renewed, resulting in a temporary valuation difference for intangible assets.

In 2011, a total of €3,225,000 in deferred taxes was recognized directly in equity to account for the deferred tax impact of fiscally deductible IPO costs directly recognized in equity.

The movement in recognized deferred tax liabilities during the year is as follows:

 

     Property,
plant and
equipment,
and
Intangibles
    Provision
onerous
contracts
     Other     Tax loss
carry-
forward
     Total  
     (€’000)  

January 1, 2011

     (8,627     —           (803     —           (9,430

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2011

     (163     —           (250     —           (413
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

     (8,790     —           (1,053     —           (9,843

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2012

     (3,501     —           (63     —           (3,564
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

     (12,291     —           (1,116     —           (13,407

Recognized in profit/(loss) for 2013

     (3,398     —           423        —           (2,975
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Effects of movements in exchange rates

     89        —           —          —           89   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2013

     (15,600     —           (693     —           (16,293
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Offset deferred tax assets

     7,696        —           693        3,757         12,146   
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

Net deferred tax assets/(liabilities)

     (7,904     —           —          3,757         (4,147
  

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

    

 

 

 

The deferred tax assets and liabilities are presented as net amounts as far as the amounts can be offset.

The estimated utilization of carried-forward tax losses in future years is based on management’s forecasts of future profitability by tax jurisdiction.

The following net deferred tax assets have not been recognized:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Deductible temporary differences, net

     117         46         67   

Tax losses

     1,303         1,501         2,054   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,420         1,547         2,121   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-33


Table of Contents

The accumulated recognized and unrecognized tax losses expire as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     3,159         3,798         4,204   

Between 1 and 5 years

     4,949         7,057         10,974   

After 5 years

     24,775         5,918         7,140   

Unlimited

     79,754         69,403         77,491   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     112,637         86,176         99,809   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The accumulated tax losses expiring within one year include tax losses in Switzerland. The expiration of accumulated tax losses was part of the assessment of the valuation of deferred tax assets.

 

10 Property, plant and equipment

 

     Freehold
land and
buildings
    Infra-
structure
and
equipment
    Assets
under
construction
    Total
data
center
assets
    Office and
other
equipment
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Cost:

            

As at January 1, 2013

     87,157        709,722        30,553        827,432        28,883        856,315   

Additions

     16,558        27,206        89,770        133,534        2,373        135,907   

Exchange differences

     —          (3,735     —          (3,735     (122     (3,857

Disposals

     —          (1,021     —          (1,021     (106     (1,127

Transfers

     —          33,110        (33,110     —          —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013

     103,715        765,282        87,213        956,210        31,028        987,238   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

            

As at January 1, 2013

     (4,594     (211,882     —          (216,476     (18,908     (235,384

Depreciation

     (2,714     (49,941     —          (52,655     (2,435     (55,090

Exchange differences

     —          790        —          790        67        857   

Disposals

     —          1,021        —          1,021        106        1,127   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013

     (7,308     (260,012     —          (267,320     (21,170     (288,490
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2013

     96,407        505,270        87,213        688,890        9,858        698,748   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

            

As at January 1, 2012

     38,710        506,847        101,173        646,730        24,830        671,560   

Additions

     48,447        41,590        89,431        179,468        3,973        183,441   

Exchange differences

     —          2,862        —          2,862        112        2,974   

Disposals

     —          (1,628     —          (1,628     (32     (1,660

Transfers

     —          160,051        (160,051     —          —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     87,157        709,722        30,553        827,432        28,883        856,315   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

            

As at January 1, 2012

     (3,042     (174,116     —          (177,158     (16,604     (193,762

Depreciation

     (1,552     (38,668     —          (40,220     (2,275     (42,495

Exchange differences

     —          (726     —          (726     (61     (787

Disposals

     —          1,628        —          1,628        32        1,660   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     (4,594     (211,882     —          (216,476     (18,908     (235,384
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2012

     82,563        497,840        30,553        610,956        9,975        620,931   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-34


Table of Contents
     Freehold
land and
buildings
    Infra-
structure
and
equipment
    Assets
under
construction
    Total
data
center
assets
    Office and
other
equipment
    Total  
     (€’000)  

Cost:

            

As at January 1, 2011

     1,388        467,228        16,346        484,962        21,598        506,560   

Additions

     19,057        43,229        103,245        165,531        3,150        168,681   

Exchange differences

     —          2,783        (42     2,741        149        2,890   

Disposals

     —          (6,504     —          (6,504     (67     (6,571

Transfers

     18,265        111        (18,376     —          —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     38,710        506,847        101,173        646,730        24,830        671,560   

Accumulated depreciation and impairment:

            

As at January 1, 2011

     —          (149,425     —          (149,425     (14,715     (164,140

Depreciation

     —          (33,340     —          (33,340     (1,862     (35,202

Impairment reversal

     —          783        —          783        —          783   

Exchange differences

     —          (774     —          (774     (63     (837

Disposals

     —          5,598        —          5,598        36        5,634   

Transfers

     (3,042     3,042        —          —          —          —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31. 2011

     (3,042     (174,116     —          (177,158     (16,604     (193,762
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     35,668        332,731        101,173        469,572        8,226        477,798   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In 2013, the Group changed the classification and grouping of the assets in the table above and the comparative disclosures have been amended to reflect this change.

In December 2012, the Group exercised its option to purchase the PAR7 data center land. The actual legal transaction will become effective in 2019. As a result of this modification, in accordance with IAS17, as of December 20, 2012, the lease, which was previously reported as an operating lease is reported as a financial lease. The carrying amount of the land amounts to €20,832,000 (2012: €20,832,000). In addition, the Group leases data center equipment under a number of finance lease agreements. At December 31, 2013, the carrying amount of the leased equipment classified in data centers was €202,000 (2012: €224,000 and 2011: €1,048,000).

 

F-35


Table of Contents

Capitalized interest relating to borrowing costs for 2013 amounted to €1,701,000 (2012: €9,195,000 and 2011: €2,577,000). The cash effect of the interest capitalized for 2013 amounted to €3,681,000, which is presented in the Statement of Cash Flows under “Purchase of property, plant and equipment” (2012: €8,224,000 and 2011: €1,298,000).

As at December 31, 2013, the carrying value of freehold land included in the category “Freehold land and buildings” amounts to €51,663,000 (2012: €44,092,000 and 2011: €20,445,000).

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated statement of income.

At December 31, 2013 properties with a carrying value of €44,017,000 (2012: €17,568,000 and 2011: nil) were subject to a registered debenture to secure mortgages (see Note 19).

In 2011, the Group reversed the impairment of data center assets in Sweden, as recognized in 2007, for an amount of €783,000, resulting from improved profitability and the future potential of the Swedish company.

 

11 Intangible assets

The components of intangible assets are as follows:

 

     Power grid
rights
    Software     Other
intangibles
    Total  
           (€’000)              

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2013

     11,833        9,059        2,165        23,057   

Additions

     296        1,678        —          1,974   

Exchange differences

     (149     (14     —          (163
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013

     11,980        10,723        2,165        24,868   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2013

     (612     (2,882     (925     (4,419

Amortization

     (331     (2,063     (186     (2,580

Exchange differences

     —          9        —          9   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013

     (943     (4,936     (1,111     (6,990
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2013

     11,037        5,787        1,054        17,878   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2012

     7,378        6,246        1,835        15,459   

Additions

     4,300        2,822        330        7,452   

Disposals

     —          (9     —          (9

Exchange differences

     155        —          —          155   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     11,833        9,059        2,165        23,057   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2012

     (350     (1,820     (747     (2,917

Amortization

     (249     (1,071     (178     (1,498

Disposals

     —          9        —          9   

Exchange differences

     (13     —          —          (13
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2012

     (612     (2,882     (925     (4,419
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2012

     11,221        6,177        1,240        18,638   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

F-36


Table of Contents
     Power grid
rights
    Software     Other
intangibles
    Total  
           (€’000)              

Cost:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     1,711        4,220        1,835        7,766   

Additions

     5,653        2,026        —          7,679   

Exchange differences

     14        —          —          14   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     7,378        6,246        1,835        15,459   

Amortization:

        

As at January 1, 2011

     (198     (980     (583     (1,761

Amortization

     (138     (840     (164     (1,142

Exchange differences

     (14     —          —          (14
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2011

     (350     (1,820     (747     (2,917
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Carrying amount as at December 31, 2011

     7,028        4,426        1,088        12,542   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Amortization of intangible assets is disclosed as general and administrative cost in the consolidated income statement.

 

12 Financial asset

The financial asset consists of a 1.6% equity shareholding in IStreamPlanet Inc. The financial asset was designated as a financial asset measured at fair value through profit and loss.

 

13 Trade and other (non-) current assets

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Data-center-related prepaid expenses

     11,500         —           —     

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,093         2,254         2,536   

Deferred financing costs

     1,258         1,371         667   

Deferred rent related stamp duties

     556         606         638   

Cash flow hedge

     90         —           —     

Other non-current assets

     1,039         728         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     16,536         4,959         3,841   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013, an amount of €11,500,000 is related to cash prepaid to a notary account from which the acquisition of our Brussels data center building subsequent to year-end has been paid.

The deferred financing costs relate to the costs incurred for the Revolving Facility Agreement. On June 17, 2013, the Company entered into a new €100 million revolving facility agreement with ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, Credit Suisse AG, Banc of America Securities Limited, as arrangers, the lenders thereunder, Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee. This new €100 million revolving facility agreement replaced the €60 million revolving facility agreement. The deferred financing costs balance of previous year was charged to the income statement in full in 2013 as a result of the refinancing (see also note 8).

 

F-37


Table of Contents

On July 3, 2013, in connection with the issue of the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020, all conditions precedent to the utilization of this revolving facility agreement were satisfied. As of December 31, 2013 the Revolving Facility remained undrawn. In 2012, the Company amended the terms of its existing Revolving Facility Agreement. The amended facility, originally scheduled to expire on February 1, 2013, extended the termination date to May 12, 2016, expanded the credit commitment from €50 million to €60 million and aligned the incurrence covenants with those contained in the indenture of the former 9.50% Senior Secured Notes due 2017. The capitalized costs are amortized over the duration period of the facility agreement.

 

Current

        

Trade receivables – net (Note 20)

     58,405         51,119         43,350   

Taxes

     7,093         3,052         7,474   

Accrued revenue

     21,234         10,778         2,970   

Prepaid expenses and other current assets

     9,971         9,905         14,080   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     96,703         74,854         67,874   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Accrued revenue relate to service fee holidays provided in relation to our long-term customer contracts.

Prepaid expenses and other current assets principally comprise accrued income, prepaid insurances, rental and other related operational data center and construction-related prepayments.

 

14 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents include €4,078,000 (2012: €5,017,000 and 2011: €4,813,000) that is restricted and held as collateral to support the issuance of bank guarantees on behalf of a number of subsidiary companies.

 

15 Shareholders’ equity

Share capital and share premium

 

     Ordinary shares      2002 Series A preference shares  
     2013      2012      2011      2013      2012      2011  
     (In thousands of shares, post-reverse stock split)  

On issue at January1,

     68,176         66,129         9,546         —           —           34,808   

Issue/conversion of shares

     691         2,047         56,583         —           —           (34,808
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

On issue at December 31,

     68,867         68,176         66,129         —           —           —     

On January 28, 2011, the Company issued 16,250 thousand new shares (post reverse stock split) at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. On completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of €0.10 per ordinary shares. The 34,808 thousand Preferred Shares were converted into ordinary shares and the Liquidation Price of €1.00 (post reverse stock split) per Preferred A Share was either paid out in cash or converted in ordinary shares (3.3 million ordinary shares). In 2013, approximately 0.7 million (2012: 2.0 million, 2011: 2.2 million) of options were exercised.

At December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, the authorized share capital comprised 200,000,000 (post reverse stock split as at 18 January 2012) ordinary shares at par value of €0.10. All issued shares are fully paid. Prior to the IPO and the reverse stock split, all the shares had a par value of €0.02.

The net proceeds of the Initial Public Offering in 2011 amounted to €138.6 million, which is used for general corporate purposes including, without limitation, capital expenditures relating to expansion of existing data centers and construction of new data centers.

 

F-38


Table of Contents

Voting

On completion of the initial public offering in January 2011, the Company entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of our outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of our Board of Directors, including the right to nominate the Chairman of our Board of Directors. As a result, these shareholders have, and will continue to have, directly or indirectly, the power, among other things, to affect our legal and capital structure and our day-to-day operations, as well as the ability to elect and change our management and to approve other changes to our operation. The interests of Baker Capital and its affiliates could conflict with your interests, particularly if we encounter financial difficulties or are unable to pay our debts when due. Affiliates of Baker Capital also have an interest in pursuing acquisitions, divestitures, financings or other transactions that, in their judgment, could enhance their equity investments, although such transactions might involve risks to you as a holder of ordinary shares. In addition, Baker Capital or its affiliates may, in the future, own businesses that directly compete with ours or do business with us. The concentration of ownership may further have the effect of delaying, preventing or deterring a change of control of our Company, could deprive our shareholders of an opportunity to receive a premium for their ordinary shares as part of a sale of our company and might ultimately affect the market price of our ordinary shares.

Prior to the initial public offering in January 2011, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to vote, together with holders of the Company’s ordinary shares, on all matters submitted to shareholders for vote. Each share equals one vote. In addition to voting privileges, holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to certain prior-consent rights against certain actions proposed by the Board of Directors.

Dividends

Prior to the IPO, dividends that are paid from the profits of the Company and, if permitted under Dutch law, as a result of a sale by the Company of shares or assets of the Company or a subsidiary other than pursuant to an IPO, sale or liquidation event shall be distributed in the following priority: first to holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in an amount equal to the purchase price of the 2002 Series A preference shares (reduced by any dividend previously received on the 2002 Series A preference shares) and second to the extent any residual amount exits thereafter, pro rata amongst all holders of ordinary shares and 2002 Series A preference shares. On the completion of an IPO or a sale, the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares were entitled to receive the 2002 Series A Share Purchase Price of €0.20 per share (pre-reverse stock split) less any dividends exclusively paid to the holders of the 2002 Series A preference shares in cash or in ordinary shares.

Foreign currency translation reserve

The foreign currency translation reserve comprises of all foreign exchange differences arising from the translation of the financial statements of foreign operations as well as from the translation of intergroup balances with a permanent nature.

 

16 Earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

The calculation of basic earnings per share at December 31, 2013, was based on the profit of €6,824,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2012: €31,631,000 and 2011: €25,572,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2013 of 68,584,000 (and including preference shares outstanding for the years; 2012: 67,309,000 and 2011: 64,176,000). Profit is attributable to ordinary and preference shares (pre-IPO) on an equal basis.

Diluted earnings per share

The calculation of diluted earnings per share at December 31, 2013 was based on the profit of €6,824,000 attributable to ordinary shareholders and pre-IPO the preference shareholders (2012: €31,631,000 and 2011: €25,572,000) and a weighted average number of ordinary shares and the impact of options outstanding during the year ended December 31, 2013 of 69,345,000 (and including preference shares outstanding for the years; 2012: 68,262,000 and 2011: 65,896,000) post reverse stock split.

 

F-39


Table of Contents

In January 2011, the Company issued new shares at the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol INXN. On completion of the offering, the Company did a reverse stock split 5:1, which resulted in nominal value of €0.10 per ordinary share. The 5:1 reverse stock split effectuated is presented in the basic earnings per share calculation and the diluted earnings per share calculation.

Profit attributable to ordinary and preference shareholders

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Profit attributable to ordinary and (pre-IPO) preference shareholders

     6,824         31,631         25,572   

 

F-40


Table of Contents

Weighted average number of ordinary shares and preference shares

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (in thousands of shares, post reverse
stock split)
 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares (basic)

     68,584         67,309         61,506   

Weighted average number of (pre-IPO) preference shares

     —           —           2,670   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and (pre-IPO) preference shares at December 31,

     68,584         67,309         64,176   

Dilution effect of share options on issue

     761         953         1,720   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Weighted average number of ordinary and (pre-IPO) preference shares (diluted) at December 31,

     69,345         68,262         65,896   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

17 Trade payables and other liabilities

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Deferred revenue

     4,605         5,014         4,801   

Other non-current liabilities

     6,932         6,180         5,493   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     11,537         11,194         10,294   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Current

        

Trade payables

     28,175         21,087         34,090   

Tax and social security

     8,778         10,788         4,180   

Customer deposits

     18,507         18,274         16,942   

Deferred revenue

     44,550         41,516         38,110   

Accrued expenses

     32,083         36,113         34,317   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     132,093         127,778         127,639   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Trade payables include €20,074,000 (2012: €10,319,000 and 2011 €20,877,000) accounts payable in respect of purchases of property, plant and equipment.

 

F-41


Table of Contents

Accrued expenses are analyzed as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Data-center-related costs

     7,158         9,959         7,951   

Personnel and related costs

     8,769         8,060         7,973   

Professional services

     1,824         2,083         2,476   

Customer implementation and related costs

     2,199         3,039         2,237   

Financing-related costs

     9,994         9,625         9,650   

Other

     2,139         3,347         4,030   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     32,083         36,113         34,317   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013, the accrued financing-related costs principally relate to interest expenses on the Senior Secured Notes and mortgages.

 

18 Provision for onerous lease contracts

As at December 31, 2013, the provision for onerous lease contracts relates to two unused data center sites in Germany, one in Munich terminating in March 2016 and one in Dusseldorf terminating in August 2016.

The provision is calculated based on the discounted future contracted payments net of any sublease revenues.

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

As at January 1,

     11,826        13,726        16,333   

Increase in provision

               838        —     

Unwinding of discount

     334        428        518   

Utilization of provision

     (3,285     (3,166     (3,125
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

As at December 31,

     8,875        11,826        13,726   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Non-current

     4,855        7,848        10,618   

Current

     4,020        3,978        3,108   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     8,875        11,826        13,726   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Discounted estimated future losses are calculated using a discount rate based on the five-year euro-area government benchmark bond yield prevailing at the balance sheet date.

 

F-42


Table of Contents
19 Borrowings

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Non-current

        

Senior Secured Notes 6.0%, due 2020

     317,610         —           —     

Senior Secured Notes 9.5%, due 2017

     —           256,268         255,560   

Mortgages

     22,524         9,903         —     

Finance lease liabilities

     20,470         20,309         102   

Other loans

     1,605         1,605         1,605   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     362,209         288,085         257,267   

Current

        

Mortgages

     1,733         52         235   

Finance lease liabilities

     50         52         235   

Other loans

     —           —           568   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     1,783         52         803   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total borrowings

     363,992         288,137         258,070   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The carrying amounts of the Group’s borrowings are principally denominated in euros. The face value of the Senior Secured Notes as at December 31, 2013 was €325,000,000 (2012 and 2011: €260,000,000).

The face value of the mortgages amounted to €24,833,000 as per December 31, 2013 (2012: €10,000,000).

Senior Secured Notes and bank borrowings

Mortgages

In November 2012, the Group entered into a five-year mortgage for €10 million. The loan is secured by a mortgage on the PAR6 property owned by Real Estate IV BV, and a pledge on the lease agreement. The loan is subject to a floating interest rate of EURIBOR plus an individual margin of 275 basis points.

In January 2013, the Group entered into two mortgage financings totaling €10 million. The loans are secured by mortgages on the PAR3 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl, and the PAR5 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl, pledges on the lease agreements, and are guaranteed by Interxion France SAS. The repayment of principal under the mortgage loans are required to be repaid in quarterly instalments collectively amounting to €167,000 commencing on April 18, 2013. The mortgages have a maturity of fifteen years and have a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The interest rates have been fixed for 75% of the principal outstanding amount for a period of 10 years.

In June 2013, the Group entered into a €6 million mortgage financing. The loan is secured by a mortgage on the AMS3 property owned by Interxion Real Estate V B.V. and a pledge on the lease agreement. The principal is to be repaid in annual instalments of €400,000 commencing May 1, 2014 and a final repayment of €4,400,000 due on May 1, 2018. The mortgage has a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 275 basis points. The loan contains a minimum of 1.1 debt service capacity covenant ratio based on operations of Interxion Real Estate V B.V.

Acquiring the mortgages did not conflict with the restrictions of the Indenture and the Revolving Facility Agreement.

Senior Secured Notes due 2017

On June 3, 2013, the Company announced an offer to purchase for cash any and all of its outstanding euro-denominated €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017.

 

F-43


Table of Contents

On June 28, 2013, holders of €256,962,000 aggregate principal amount of the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017, representing 98.8% of the outstanding Notes, had validly tendered their Notes.

The total consideration for each €1,000 principal amount of the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017 validly tendered prior to the consent deadline was €1,102 and after the consent deadline €1,092 plus the accrued and unpaid interest up to, but not including, the day of settlement.

On July 3, 2013, the tender was completed and the Company discharged its obligations with respect to the remaining €3,038,000 outstanding €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017 not purchased in the offer in accordance with the satisfaction and discharge provisions of the indenture governing the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017. These Notes were redeemed on August 2, 2013 at a redemption price equal to a “make-whole” amount of €1,094 for each €1,000 principal amount, as calculated in accordance with the terms of the indenture governing the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017, plus accrued and unpaid interest up to, but not including, the redemption date.

The total redemption fees amounted to approximately €26.5 million; in addition, the Company incurred approximately €4.5 million in non-cash expenses from the deferred financing costs relating to the former €60 million Revolving Facility Agreement and the unamortized costs of the Senior Secured Notes due 2017.

Senior Secured Notes due 2020

On July 3, 2013, the Company issued an aggregate principal amount of €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (the “Senior Secured Notes due 2020”).

The net proceeds of the offering were used to purchase all of the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017, which were tendered in the offer for those notes and to redeem the €260 million Senior Secured Notes due 2017 which remained outstanding following the expiration and settlement of the tender offer and consent solicitation, to pay all related fees, expenses and premiums and for other general corporate purposes.

The €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are governed by an indenture dated July 3, 2013, between the Company, as issuer, and The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Trustee. The indenture contains customary restrictive covenants, including but not limited to limitations or restrictions on our ability to incur debt, grant liens, make restricted payments and sell assets. The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions and are governed by a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 and a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00.

The obligations under the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020 are guaranteed by certain of the Company’s subsidiaries.

The Company may redeem all or part of the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020. The Company has the following redemption rights:

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016 upon an equity offering

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, the Company may on any one or more occasions redeem up to 35% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price of 106.000% of their principal amount, plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, with the net proceeds from one or more equity offerings. The Company may only do this, however, if:

 

  (a) at least 65% of the aggregate principal amount of Senior Secured Notes that were initially issued (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any additional notes) would remain outstanding immediately after the proposed redemption; and

 

  (b) the redemption occurs within 90 days after the closing of such equity offering.

 

F-44


Table of Contents

Optional Redemption prior to July 15, 2016

Prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, the Company may during each 12-month period commencing on the issue date redeem up to 10% of the aggregate principal amount of the Senior Secured Notes (calculated after giving effect to the issuance of any additional notes) at a redemption price equal to 103% of the principal amount redeemed plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date.

At any time prior to July 15, 2016, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, the Company may also redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes at a redemption price equal to 100% of the principal amount thereof plus the applicable redemption premium and accrued and unpaid interest to the redemption date.

Optional Redemption on or after July 15, 2016

At any time on or after July 15, 2016 and prior to maturity, upon not less than 10 nor more than 60 days’ notice, the Company may redeem all or part of the Senior Secured Notes. These redemptions will be in amounts of €100,000 or integral multiples of €1,000 in excess thereof at the following redemption prices (expressed as percentages of their principal amount at maturity), plus accrued and unpaid interest, if any, to the redemption date, if redeemed during the 12-month period commencing on July 15 of the years set forth below.

 

Year

   Redemption Price  

2016

     104.500

2017

     103.000

2018

     101.500

2019 and thereafter

     100.000

€100 Million Revolving Facility Agreement

On June 17, 2013, the Company entered into a new €100 million revolving facility agreement with ABN AMRO Bank N.V., Barclays Bank PLC, Citigroup Global Markets Limited, Credit Suisse AG, Banc of America Securities Limited, as arrangers, the lenders thereunder, Barclays Bank PLC, as agent and Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee. This new €100 million revolving facility agreement replaced the €60 million revolving facility agreement.

On July 3, 2013, in connection with the issue of the €325 million Senior Secured Notes due 2020, all conditions precedent to the utilization of this revolving facility agreement were satisfied.

 

F-45


Table of Contents

Maturity profile

The maturity profile of the gross amounts of Senior Secured Notes and Mortgages is set out below:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Within one year

     —           —           —     

Between 1 and 5 years

     15,333         270,000         —     

Over 5 years

     334,500         —           260,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     349,833         270,000         260,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group has the following undrawn bank borrowing facilities:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Expiring within one year

     —           —           —     

Expiring between 1 and 5 years

     100,000         60,000         50,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     100,000         60,000         50,000   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Covenants

The Revolving Facility Agreement contains various covenants that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

    create certain liens;

 

    incur debt and/or guarantees;

 

    enter into transactions other than on arm’s-length basis;

 

    pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

    engage, in relation to the Company, in any business activity or own assets or incur liabilities not authorized by the Revolving Facility Agreement;

 

    sell certain kinds of assets;

 

    enter into any sale and leaseback transactions;

 

    make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

    substantially change the nature of the Company or the Group’s business;;

 

    designate unrestricted subsidiaries; and

 

    effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets.

The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions including, in relation to the incurrence of additional debt, a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt and, if such debt is Senior Debt, a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) to be less than 4.00 to 1.00 on a pro forma basis for the four full fiscal quarters (taken as one period) for which financial statements are available immediately preceding the incurrence of such debt. The Revolving Facility Agreement also includes a leverage ratio financial covenant (tested on a quarterly basis) requiring total net debt (calculated as a ratio to pro

 

F-46


Table of Contents

forma EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00 to 1.00. In addition, the Company must ensure that the guarantors represent a certain percentage of adjusted EBITDA of the Group as a whole and a certain percentage of the consolidated net assets of the Group as a whole. The breach of any of these covenants by the Company or the failure by the Company to maintain its leverage ratio could result in a default under the Revolving Facility Agreement. As of December 31, 2013, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Revolving Facility Agreement. In addition, the Company does not anticipate any such breach or failure and believes that its ability to borrow funds under the Revolving Facility Agreement will not be adversely affected by the covenants in the next 12 months.

The Senior Secured Notes due 2020 Indenture contains covenants for the benefit of the holders of the Notes that restrict, among other things and subject to certain exceptions, the ability of the Company and its subsidiaries to:

 

    incur debt;

 

    enter into certain transactions with, or for the benefit of, an affiliate;

 

    create or incur certain liens;

 

    incur changes in control;

 

    pay dividends or make certain distributions or payments;

 

    engage in any business activity not authorized by the Indenture;

 

    sell certain kinds of assets;

 

    impair any security interest on the assets serving as collateral for the Notes;

 

    enter into any sale and leaseback transaction;

 

    make certain investments or other types of restricted payments;

 

    designate unrestricted subsidiaries;

 

    effect mergers, consolidations or sale of assets; and

 

    guarantee certain debt.

The restrictive covenants are subject to customary exceptions and are governed by a consolidated fixed charge ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) to exceed 2.00 and a consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) not to exceed 4.00.

The breach of any of these covenants by the Company could result in a default under the Indenture. As of December 31, 2013, the Company was in compliance with all covenants in the Indenture.

The Company remained in full compliance with its Senior Secured Notes covenants and Revolving Facility Agreement covenants. As of December 31, 2013, the leverage ratio (calculated as ratio of total net debt to pro forma EBITDA) and the consolidated senior leverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of outstanding net Senior Debt of the Company and its restricted subsidiaries (on a consolidated basis) to pro forma adjusted EBITDA) were 2.51 compared to the maximum allowable threshold of 4.00. The Company’s consolidated fixed charge coverage ratio (calculated as a ratio of adjusted EBITDA to consolidated interest expense) was 5.40 as of December 31, 2013, compared to a required ratio of greater than 2.00.

 

F-47


Table of Contents

Financial lease liabilities

Financial lease liabilities relate to the acquisition of property, plant and equipment with the following repayment schedule:

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Gross lease liabilities:

      

Within one year

     1,726        1,659        236   

Between 1 and 5 years

     7,492        7,215        132   

More than 5 years

     21,443        23,442        —     
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     30,661        32,316        368   

Future interest payments

     (10,141     (11,955     (31
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Present value of minimum lease payments

     20,520        20,361        337   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

In December 2012, the Group exercised its option to purchase the PAR7 data center land. The actual legal transaction will come into effect in 2019. As a result of this modification, in accordance with IAS17, as of December 20, 2012, the lease, which was previously reported as an operating lease is treated as a financial lease. The carrying amount of the land amounts to €20,832,000.

Other loans

The Group has a loan facility with the landlord of one of its unused data center sites in Germany to allow the Group to invest in improvements to the building to meet the requirements of sub-lessees. The non-current loan bears interest at 6% per annum and is repayable at the end of the lease term. As at December 31, 2013, the balance of the landlord loan was €1,605,000 (2012 and 2011: €1,605,000).

In 2010, the Group entered into a supplier loan amounting to approximately €800,000, which bears an interest at 7%. The loan was fully repaid as at December 31, 2013 (2012: nil and 2011: €568,000).

 

20 Financial instruments

Credit risk

Exposure to credit risk

The carrying amount of financial assets represents the maximum credit exposure. The maximum exposure to credit risk at the reporting date was:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Trade receivables

     58,405         51,119         43,350   

Rental and other supplier deposits

     2,093         2,254         2,536   

Cash and cash equivalents

     45,690         68,692         142,669   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     106,188         122,065         188,555   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group seeks to minimize the risk related to cash and cash equivalents by holding cash as widely as possible across multiple bank institutions. Term risk is limited to deposits of no more than two weeks. The Group monitors its cash position, including counterparty and term risk, daily.

The credit exposure on the trade receivables is limited by the deferred revenue balance of €49,155,000 as presented in Note 17 (2012: €46,530,000 and 2011: €42,911,000).

 

F-48


Table of Contents

The maximum exposure to credit risk for trade receivables at the reporting date by geographic region was:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

UK, France, Germany and The Netherlands

     44,025         36,960         31,336   

Rest of Europe

     14,380         14,159         12,014   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     58,405         51,119         43,350   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The Group’s most significant customer, serviced from multiple locations under multiple service contracts, accounts for less than 10% of the trade receivables carrying amount as at December 31, 2013, as at December 31, 2012 and as at December 31, 2011.

The aging of trade receivables as at the reporting date was:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance      Gross      Allowance  
     (€’000)  

Not past due

     50,061         —           42,184         —           36,533         —     

Past due 1–30 days

     4,312         —           5,369         —           3,549         —     

Past due 31–120 days

     3,540         —           2,913         39         3,009         35   

Past due 121 days–1 year

     361         —           763         108         609         358   

More than 1 year

     370         239         219         182         267         224   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     58,644         239         51,448         329         43,967         617   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The movement in the allowance for impairment in respect of trade receivables during the year was as follows:

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Balance as at January 1,

     329        617        480   

Impairment loss recognized

     156        372        281   

Write-offs

     (246     (660     (144
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Balance as at December 31,

     239        329        617   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Based on historic default rates, the Group believes that no impairment allowance is necessary in respect of trade receivables other than those that have been specifically provided for.

Liquidity risk

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including interest payments and excluding the impact of netting agreements.

 

F-49


Table of Contents

December 31, 2013

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash

flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     317,610         462,150         20,150         78,000         364,000   

Finance lease liabilities

     20,520         30,661         1,726         7,492         21,443   

Mortgages

     24,257         29,148         2,552         19,398         7,198   

Other loans

     1,605         1,822         96         1,726         —     

Trade and other payables (1)

     80,225         80,225         80,225         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     444,217         604,006         104,749         106,616         392,641   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2012

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash

flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     256,268         371,150         24,700         346,450         —     

Finance lease liabilities

     20,361         32,316         1,659         7,215         23,442   

Mortgages

     9,903         11,327         938         10,389         —     

Other loans

     1,605         1,918         96         1,822         —     

Trade and other payables (1)

     88,517         88,517         88,517         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     376,654         505,228         115,910         365,876         23,442   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

December 31, 2011

 

     Carrying
amount
     Contractual
cash

flows
     Less than
1 year
     Between
1 - 5 years
     More
than
5 years
 
     (€’000)  

Financial liabilities

              

Senior Secured Notes

     255,560         395,850         24,700         98,800         272,350   

Finance lease liabilities

     337         368         263         105         —     

Other loans

     2,173         2,623         729         1,894         —     

Trade and other payables (1)

     89,529         89,529         89,529         —           —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     347,599         488,370         115,221         100,799         272,350   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Notes:—

 

(1) Excludes deferred revenues and rental holidays.

 

F-50


Table of Contents

Market risk

Exposure to currency risk

The following significant exchange rates applied during the year:

 

     Average rate      Report date
mid-spot rate
 
     2013      2012      2011      2013      2012      2011  

Euro

                 

GBP 1

     1.179         1.233         1.152         1.198         1.222         1.193   

CHF 1

     0.813         0.830         0.812         0.816         0.828         0.822   

DKK 1

     0.134         0.134         0.134         0.134         0.134         0.135   

SEK 1

     0.116         0.115         0.111         0.113         0.116         0.112   

Sensitivity analysis

A 10% strengthening of the euro against the following currencies at December 31 would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by approximately the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular interest rates, remained constant and was performed on the same basis for 2012 and 2011.

 

     Equity     Profit or
loss
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2013

    

GBP

     (1,337     (420

CHF

     (4,015     4   

DKK

     (1,587     (148

SEK

     (345     32   

December 31, 2012

    

GBP

     (849     (622

CHF

     (1,192     146   

DKK

     (1,434     (149

SEK

     (390     43   

December 31, 2011

    

GBP

     (219     (561

CHF

     (1,321     71   

DKK

     (1,279     (149

SEK

     (416     (384

A 10% weakening of the euro against the above currencies at December 31 would have had the equal, but opposite, effect on the above currencies to the amounts shown above, on the basis that all other variables remained constant.

 

F-51


Table of Contents

Interest rate risk

Profile

At the reporting date, the interest rate profile of the Group’s interest-bearing financial instruments was:

 

     Carrying amount  
     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Fixed-rate instrument

        

Senior Secured Notes

     317,610         256,268         255,560   

Finance lease liabilities

     20,520         20,361         337   

Mortgages

     6,801         —           —     

Other loans

     1,605         1,605         2,173   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     346,536         278,234         258,070   

Variable-rate instruments

        

Mortgages

     17,456         9,903         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     363,992         288,137         258,070   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

The mortgages on the PAR3 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate II Sarl, and the PAR5 land, owned by Interxion Real Estate III Sarl have variable interest rates based on EURIBOR plus an individual margin ranging from 240 to 280 basis points. The interest rates have been fixed by using cash flow hedges for 75% of the principal outstanding amount for a period of ten years, which has been reflected in the table above.

Cash flow sensitivity analysis for fixed-rate instruments

The Group does not account for any fixed-rate financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit and loss, and does not designate derivatives (interest rate swaps) as hedging instruments under a fair value hedge accounting model. Therefore a change in interest rates at the end of the reporting period would not affect profit or loss.

Cash flow sensitivity analysis for variable rate instruments

A change of 100 basis points in interest rates payable at the reporting date would have increased (decreased) equity and profit or loss by the amounts shown below. This analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular foreign currency rates, remained constant. For 2011 there were no variable rate instruments.

 

     Profit or loss      Equity  
     100 bp
increase
    100 bp
decrease
     100 bp
increase
    100 bp
decrease
 
     (€’000)  

December 31, 2013

         

Variable rate instruments

     (152     152         (51     51   

December 31, 2012

         

Variable rate instruments

     (40     40         —          —     

Fair values and hierarchy

Fair values versus carrying amounts

As of December 31, 2013, the market price of the €325 million 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 was 106.51 (December 31, 2012: not applicable). Using this market price, the fair value of the Senior Secured Notes due 2020 would have been approximately €346 million (December 31, 2012: not applicable) compared with its nominal value of €325 million.

 

F-52


Table of Contents

As of December 31, 2013, the fair value of the PAR7 finance lease liability would have been €23.4 million compared with its carrying amount of €20.5 million.

The carrying amounts of other financial assets and liabilities approximate their fair value.

Fair value hierarchy

As at December 31, 2013, there are no liabilities related to financial instruments which are carried at fair value. The company uses three levels of valuation method as defined below:

 

Level 1:    quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities

Level 2:

   inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly (i.e. as prices) or indirectly (i.e. derived from prices)
Level 3:    inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

At December 31, 2013, the Group had a financial asset carried at fair value, its investment in Istream Planet Inc., and a cash flow hedge to hedge the interest rate risk of a mortgage. In 2011, the Group had no financial instruments carried at fair value.

 

December 31, 2013    Level 1      Level 2      Level 3  

Cash flow hedge

     —           90         —     

Financial asset

     —           —           774   
December 31, 2012    Level 1      Level 2      Level 3  

Financial asset

     —           —           774   

No significant changes in levels of hierarchy, or transfers between levels, occurred in the reporting period. Fair values were obtained from quoted market prices in active markets or, where no active market exists, by using valuation techniques. Valuation techniques include discounted cash flow models.

Capital management

The Board’s policy is to maintain a strong capital base so as to maintain investor, creditor and market confidence and to sustain future development of the business. The Board of Directors monitors the return on capital.

 

F-53


Table of Contents

The Group’s net debt to equity ratio at the reporting date was as follows:

 

     2013     2012     2011  
     (€’000)  

Net debt

      

Total liabilities

     522,873        443,650        413,720   

Less: cash

     (45,690     (68,692     (142,669
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 
     477,183        374,958        271,051   

Equity

      

Total equity

     387,902        375,574        330,561   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Net debt to equity ratio

     1.23        1.00        0.82   
  

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

21 Share-based payments

Summary of outstanding options and restricted shares

Share options to acquire a fixed number of shares are granted to employees and others based on a number of factors. The exercise price is fixed at the date of the grant. The numbers of options listed below are post the reverse stock split 5:1, which was effected on completion of the initial public offering on January 28, 2011.

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with a euro exercise price, were as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in €
     Options
granted
outstanding
     Options
granted
outstanding,
vested
 
          (in thousands)  

2009

   Key management      5.00         20         20   

2010

   Key management      5.00         10         8   
   Senior employees      5.00-7.50         82         64   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
   Total share options         112         92   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

F-54


Table of Contents

The terms and conditions of the grants, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 and 2013 Option Plans with an USD exercise price, were as follows:

 

Grant date

  

Employees entitled

   Exercise
price in $
     Outstanding      Exercisable  
          (in thousands)  

2011

   Key management (Executive Director)      14.74         600         600   
   Non-executive Directors      13.00-14.74         30         20   
   Senior employees      10.00-14.65         472         216   

2012

   Key management      10.00-11.50         180         38   
   Non-executive Directors      13.92         15         5   
   Senior employees      10.00-22.64         248         78   

2013

   Key management      10.00         20         —     
   Non-executive Directors      18.01         15         15   
   Senior employees      10.00-22.50         212         —     
        

 

 

    

 

 

 
   Total share options         1,792         972   
        

 

 

    

 

 

 

Share options granted before the year 2012, under the 2008 Option Plan, vest over four years and can be exercised up to five years after the date of grant. Share options granted in the years 2011, 2012 and 2013, under the 2011 and 2013 Option Plans generally, vest over four years and can be exercised up to eight years after the date of grant. The options granted in 2011 to the Company’s Executive Director, Non-executive Directors and certain employees as well as the options granted in 2012 to the Non-executive Directors have an accelerated vesting term.

The General Meeting of Shareholders held on June 26, 2013 approved the award to each Non-executive Director of restricted shares equivalent to a value of €40,000 under the terms and conditions of the Company’s 2013 International Equity Based Incentive Plan (the “2013 Option Plan”) and containing the following key terms:

 

    the number of restricted shares will be set on the basis of the Company’s share value at the closing of the New York Stock Exchange on the day of this Annual General Meeting;

 

    all of these restricted shares will vest on the day of the next Annual General Meeting subject to the Non-executive Director having served for the entire period;

 

    the restricted shares will be locked up (be non-exercisable) for a period that will end three years from the date of award or on the date the Non-executive Director ceases to be a director of the Company, whichever is sooner;

 

    on change of control, these restricted shares will vest immediately and any lock provisions will expire.

In total 12,282 restricted shares were granted to the Non-executive Directors (2,047 restricted shares each). All restricted shares outstanding were granted at a share price of $25.41 and with an exercise price of nil. As at December 31, 2013, the restricted shares were not vested.

 

F-55


Table of Contents

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2008 Option Plan with euro exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average exercise price in
     Number of options in thousands  
     2013      2012      2011      2013     2012     2011  

Outstanding at January 1,

     4.98         3.94         2.91         597        2,554        4,733   

Granted

     —           —           —           —          —          —     

Exercised

     4.79         3.61         1.61         (458     (1,939     (2,156

Expired

     —           —           —           —          —          —     

Forfeited

     6.12         5.22         5.76         (27     (18     (23
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding –December 31,

     5.46         4.98         3.94         112        597        2,554   

Exercisable – December 31,

     5.36         4.76         3.72         92        456        2,231   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The number and weighted average exercise prices of outstanding share options, post reverse stock split, under the 2011 and 2013 Option Plans, excluding the 12,282 restricted shares, with US dollar exercise prices are as follows:

 

     Weighted average exercise price in
$
     Number of options in thousands  
     2013      2012      2011      2013     2012     2011  

Outstanding at January 1,

     13.64         13.65         —           1,818        1,336        —     

Granted

     16.75         13.43         13.65         247        609        1,336   

Exercised

     13.11         12.76         —           (232     (92     —     

Expired

     —           —           —           —          —          —     

Forfeited

     13.86         13.00         —           (41     (35     —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

Outstanding – December 31,

     14.13         13.64         13.65         1,792        1,818        1,336   

Exercisable –December 31,

     14.05         14.01         14.41         972        666        247   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

   

 

 

   

 

 

 

The options and restricted shares outstanding at December 31, 2013 have a weighted average remaining contractual life of 5.7 years (2012: 5.5 years and 2011: 3.2 years).

Employee expenses

In 2013, the Company recorded employee expenses of €4,149,000 related to share-based payments (2012: €5,488,000 and 2011: €2,736,000). The 2013 share-based payments related expenses include an amount of €559,000 related to taxes and social security charges (2012: €2,078,000 and 2011: nil).

The weighted average fair value at grant date of options and restricted shares granted during the period was determined using the Black-Scholes valuation model. At the grant of options the following inputs were used:

 

     2013     2012     2011  

Share price in € at grant date (post reverse stock split)

     17.94-20.72        10.65-16.47        8.02-9.71   

Exercise price in € (post reverse stock split)

     7.65-16.94        7.71-17.45        9.01-10.95   

Dividend yield

     0     0     0

Expected volatility

     40     40     40

Risk-free interest rate

     0.7%-0.8     0.7%-2.0     2.0

Expected life weighted average

     5.1 years        5.1 years        5.1 years   

 

F-56


Table of Contents

The significant inputs into the model were:

 

    expected volatility is based on a combination of the performance of the Company and, given the relatively short period that the shares of the Company are traded publicly, other companies that are considered to be comparable to the Group;

 

    the risk-free interest rate based on the yield on zero coupon bonds issued by the European Central Bank for European Union government debt rates with a maturity similar to the expected life of the options;

 

    dividend yield is considered to be nil;

 

    expected life is considered to be equal to the average of the share option exercise and vesting periods.

 

22 Financial commitments

Operating lease commitments

At December 31, the Group has future minimum commitments for operating leases with terms in excess of one year as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     31,793         28,755         25,529   

Between 1 and 5 years

     122,087         118,418         102,741   

After 5 years

     218,161         223,635         167,428   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     372,041         370,808         295,698   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

As at December 31, 2013, of the operating leases an amount of €8,319,000 (2012: €11,557,000 and 2011: €13,668,000) related to the lease contracts, which were provided for as part of the provision for onerous lease contracts.

Of the total operating leases, as at December 31, 2013, an amount of €75,188,000 (2012: €76,188,000 and 2011: nil) is cancellable until January 1, 2016.

The total gross operating lease expense for the year 2013 was €24,700,000 (2012: €22,900,000 and 2011: €22,000,000).

 

F-57


Table of Contents

Future committed revenues receivable

The Group enters into initial contracts with its customers for periods of at least one year and generally between three and five years resulting in future committed revenues from customers. At December 31, the Group had contracts with customers for future committed revenues receivable as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011 1)
as adjusted
 
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     219,300         204,164         174,263   

Between 1 and 5 years

     301,600         240,951         207,549   

After 5 years

     101,800         105,069         104,236   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     622,700         550,184         486,048   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1) The future committed revenue receivables for the year ended December 31, 2011 have been adjusted compared with the amounts previously reported. If at the end of the reporting date, we have not received a termination notice within the notice period for the contracts with an automatic renewal clause, the Company has assumed that the customers will use and commit to our services for an extended term. This has increased the 2011 total future committed future revenue receivable by €41.0 million from €445.0 million.

Commitments to purchase power

Where possible, for its own use, the Group seeks to purchase power on fixed-price term agreements with local power supply companies in the cities in which it operates. In some cases the Group also commits to purchase certain minimum volumes of power at fixed prices. At December 31, the Group had entered into non-cancellable power purchase commitments as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Within 1 year

     25,900         21,600         15,800   

Between 1 and 5 years

     32,100         11,600         —     
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     58,000         33,200         15,800   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

23 Capital commitments

At December 31, 2013, the Group had outstanding capital commitments totalling €83,800,000 (2012: €17,900,000 and 2011: €102,000,000). These commitments are expected to be settled in the following financial year. The increase results from the timing of expansion projects.

 

24 Contingencies

Guarantees

Certain of our subsidiaries have granted guarantees to our lending banks in relation to our borrowings. The Company has granted rent guarantees to landlords of certain of the Group’s property leases. Financial guarantees granted by the Group’s banks in respect of operating leases amount to €5,175,000 (2012: €6,456,000 and 2011: €6,350,000) and other guarantees amounting to €53,000 (2012: €211,000 and 2011: €1,027,000).

 

F-58


Table of Contents

Site restoration costs

As at December 31, 2013, the estimated discounted cost and recognized provision relating to the restoration of data center leasehold premises was €1,177,000 (2012: €716,000 and 2011: €701,000).

In accordance with the Group’s accounting policy site restoration costs have only been provided in the financial statements in respect of premises where the liability is considered probable and the related costs can be estimated reliably. As at December 31, 2013, the Group estimated the possible liability to range from nil to €21,100,000 (2012: nil to €19,600,000 and 2011: nil to €17,000,000).

 

25 Related-party transactions

There are no material transactions with related parties, other than as disclosed below, and all transactions are conducted at arm’s length.

Shareholders Agreement

On completion of the IPO, the Company entered into a shareholders agreement with affiliates of Baker Capital. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of Interxion’s outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination a majority of the members of the Board of Directors, including the right to nominate the Chairman of our Board of Directors.

If Baker Capital or its affiliates continues to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 25% but more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination three of the seven members of the Board, at least one of whom shall satisfy the criteria for independent directors. For so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing less than or equal to 15% but more than 10% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination two of the seven members of our Board, none of whom shall be required to be independent. At such time that the ownership of Baker Capital or its affiliates is less than or equal to 10% but more than 5% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right to designate for nomination one of the seven members of our Board, who shall not be required to be independent.

In addition, for so long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 25% of the outstanding ordinary shares, Baker Capital will have the right, but not the obligation, to nominate the Chairman of our Board.

So long as Baker Capital or its affiliates continue to be the owner of shares representing more than 15% of the outstanding ordinary shares, at least one of Baker Capital’s Director nominees shall be appointed to each of our standing committees, provided that such Baker Capital nominees shall meet any independence or other requirements of the applicable listing standards.

In a letter dated February 26, 2014, Lamont Finance, N.V. and Baker Communications Fund II, L.P., the private equity funds affiliated with Baker Capital (collectively “Baker”), notified the board of directors of the Company that, pursuant to the shareholders’ agreement, they intend to designate two additional individuals to be elected at the Company’s 2014 Annual General Meeting, each of whom must meet the standards for independence under the requirements of the NYSE. The letter further states. “Baker believes all stakeholders would benefit from a newly constituted Board that is focused on enhancing corporate governance and is open to all avenues for creating and maximizing shareholder value.” As of the date of this report, the Company has not received the names of any additional nominees from Baker.

As at March 1, 2014, private equity investment funds affiliated with Baker Capital indirectly own 30%, on a fully diluted basis, of Interxion’s equity.

 

F-59


Table of Contents

Key management compensation

The total compensation of key management was as follows:

 

     2013      2012      2011  
     (€’000)  

Short-term employee benefits (salaries and bonuses)

     2,376         2,510         3,406   

Post-employment benefits

     60         60         44   

Share-based payments

     1,299         1,219         1,263   

Crisis wage tax

     125         1,565         —     

Termination benefits

     53         —           115   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 
     3,913         5,354         4,828   
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Key management’s share-based payment compensation is disclosed in Note 21.

In 2013 and 2012, the Dutch Government imposed a crisis wage tax payable by employers over the total compensation including the benefit from options exercised. The crisis wage tax payable over key management compensation including the benefit from options exercised is presented as “Crisis wage tax” in the table above.

France IX loan

Interxion France is a member and co-founder of the France IX association, founded in 2010, the mission of which is to reinforce Paris as a global peering point by developing a panel of services that meets the various, and current, needs of the market, and by gathering together French and foreign ISPs and Internet services, and content providers. In 2011, Interxion France incurred costs which were recharged to France IX association, receipt of which has been formalized in a loan agreement, of which €427,000 was outstanding as at December 31, 2013 (2012: €620,000). The receivable is presented as an other non-current asset for €230,000 and the remainder is presented as a current asset.

In November 2013, an additional short term loan of €100,000 was granted which was fully repaid as per March 1, 2014. This loan is presented as a current asset.

 

26 Events subsequent to the balance sheet date

Subsequent to the year ended December 31, 2013, as at April 8, 2014, we have drawn €30.0 million under our €100.0 million Revolving Facility to fund our data center expansions.

On April 1, 2014, the Group completed a €9.2 million financing. The facility is secured by a mortgage on the data center property in Zaventem (Belgium), acquired by Interxion Real Estate IX N.V. on January 9, 2014, a pledge on the lease agreement, and is guaranteed by Interxion Real Estate Holding B.V. The facility with a maturity of fifteen years has a variable interest rate based on EURIBOR plus 200 basis points. The principal is to be repaid in 59 quarterly installments of €153,330 of which the first quarterly installment is due on July 31, 2014, and a final repayment of €153,530 on April 30, 2029.

 

F-60

Exhibit 2.3

Supplemental Indenture dated as of December 17, 2013

SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE

SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE (this “ Supplemental Indenture ”), dated as of December 17, 2013, among InterXion Sverige AB (the “ Guaranteeing Entity ”), InterXion Holding N.V. (the “ Issuer ”), the Guarantors and The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch, as trustee under the Indenture referred to below (the “ Trustee ”).

W I T N E S S E T H

WHEREAS, the Issuer has heretofore executed and delivered to the Trustee an indenture (the “ Indenture ”), dated as of July 3, 2013 providing for the issuance of 6.00% Senior Secured Notes due 2020 (the “ Notes ”);

WHEREAS, the Indenture provides that under certain circumstances the Guaranteeing Entity shall execute and deliver to the Trustee a supplemental indenture pursuant to which the Guaranteeing Entity shall unconditionally guarantee all of the Issuer’s Obligations under the Notes and the Indenture on the terms and conditions set forth herein (the “ Guarantee ”); and

WHEREAS, pursuant to Article Nine of the Indenture, the Trustee is authorized and is hereby directed to execute and deliver this Supplemental Indenture.

NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the foregoing and for other good and valuable consideration, the receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, the Guaranteeing Entity and the Trustee mutually covenant and agree for the equal and ratable benefit of the Holders of the Notes as follows:

 

1. CAPITALIZED TERMS. Capitalized terms used herein without definition shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Indenture.

 

2. AGREEMENT TO GUARANTEE. The Guaranteeing Entity hereby agrees to provide an unconditional Guarantee on the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in the Guarantee and in the Indenture including but not limited to Article Ten thereof. Such guarantee includes the limitations set out in Article Ten and may include limitations to the extent a similar guarantee is also made to holders of other Indebtedness and such guarantee includes such limitations.

 

3. NO RECOURSE AGAINST OTHERS. No director, member of any supervisory or management board, shareholders’ committee, officer, employee, incorporator, or shareholder of the Guaranteeing Entity, as such, shall have any liability for any obligations of the Issuer or any of its Subsidiaries or any parent of the Issuer under the Notes, the Intercreditor Agreement, any Guarantee, the Indenture or this Supplemental Indenture or for any claim based on, in respect of, or by reason of, such obligations or their creation. Each Holder of the Notes by accepting a Note waives and releases all such liability. The waiver and release are part of the consideration for the issuance of the Notes. Such waiver may not be effective to waive liabilities under the U.S. federal securities laws and it is the view of the Commission that such a waiver is against public policy.

 

4. GOVERNING LAW. THE INTERNAL LAW OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK SHALL GOVERN AND BE USED TO CONSTRUE THIS SUPPLEMENTAL INDENTURE WITHOUT GIVING EFFECT TO APPLICABLE PRINCIPLES OF CONFLICTS OF LAW TO THE EXTENT THAT THE APPLICATION OF THE LAWS OF ANOTHER JURISDICTION WOULD BE REQUIRED THEREBY.

 

5. COUNTERPARTS. The parties may sign any number of copies of this Supplemental Indenture. Each signed copy shall be an original, but all of them together represent the same agreement.

 

6. EFFECT OF HEADINGS. The Section headings herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction hereof.

 

7. THE TRUSTEE. The Trustee shall not be responsible in any manner whatsoever for or in respect of the validity or sufficiency of this Supplemental Indenture or for or in respect of the recitals contained herein, all of which recitals are made solely by the Guaranteeing Entity and the Issuer.

 

8. The Guarantee or any other guarantee by the Guaranteeing Entity under this Supplemental Indenture or the Indenture in respect of obligations owed by parties other than itself and its wholly-owned subsidiaries (as defined in the Swedish Companies Act ( Aktiebolagslagen )) shall be limited if (and only if) and to the extent required by an application of the provisions of the Swedish Companies Act regulating distribution of assets (including profits and dividends and any other form of transfer of value ( värdeöverföring ) within the meaning of the Swedish Companies Act) provided that all steps open to the Guaranteeing Entity and all its shareholders to authorise its obligations under this Supplemental Indenture or the Indenture have been taken. It is agreed that the Guarantee or any other guarantee only applies to the maximum extent permitted by the above mentioned provisions of the Swedish Companies Act.


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Supplemental Indenture to be duly executed and attested, all as of the date first above written.

Dated: December 17, 2013

InterXion Sverige AB

By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Holding N.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Belgium N.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Danmark ApS
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Carrier Hotel Limited
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Datacenters B.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Deutschland GmbH
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion España S.A.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion France SAS
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion HeadQuarters B.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
Given under the common seal of
InterXion Ireland Limited

 

Director

 

Director / Secretary


InterXion Nederland B.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
InterXion Operational B.V.
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  
The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Trustee
By:  

 

Name:  
Title:  

Exhibit 2.5

Amendment Letter to the Intercreditor Agreement dated December 17, 2013

Amendment Letter

InterXion Holding N.V.

Tupolevlaan 24

1119NX Schiphol-Rijk

(the “ Company ”)

17 December 2013

Dear Sirs,

Intercreditor Agreement (the “Intercreditor Agreement”) dated 3 July 2013 between, amongst others, InterXion Holding N.V. as Company, the Original Debtors and Financial Institutions as listed therein, The Bank of New York Mellon, London Branch as Original Senior Secured Notes Trustee and Barclays Bank PLC as Original Hedge Counterparty, Revolving Agent and Security Trustee.

We refer to the Intercreditor Agreement.

Unless otherwise specified herein, terms defined and references construed in the Intercreditor Agreement shall have the same meaning and construction when used in this letter. Unless otherwise stated, references in this letter to Clauses are references to clauses of the Intercreditor Agreement.

You have requested certain amendments to the Intercreditor Agreement. Pursuant to Clause 25.1(b) ( Required consents ) of the Intercreditor Agreement, we are pleased to inform you that we consent to amend the Intercreditor Agreement as set out in Schedule 1 to this letter.

The amendments set out on Schedule 1 are conditional, and shall only become effective when we receive, in form and substance satisfactory to us, the conditions precedent set out in Schedule 2 to this letter.

On the date that you countersign this Letter and on the satisfaction of the conditions precedent set out in Schedule 2 to this letter, the Company makes the following representations and warranties:

 

1. Status

 

  (a) It is a public limited liability company or a corporation, duly incorporated and validly existing under the law of its respective jurisdiction of incorporation.

 

  (b) It has the power to own its assets and carry on its business as it is being conducted.

 

2. Binding obligations

The obligations expressed to be assumed by it in each Finance Document (as defined under the Original Revolving Facility Agreement) are, subject to any general principles of law as at the date of this letter limiting its obligations that are specifically referred to in any legal opinion delivered pursuant to Clause 4 ( Conditions of Utilisation ) or Clause 26 ( Changes to the Obligors ) of the Original Revolving Facility Agreement, legal, valid, binding and enforceable obligations.

 

3. Non-conflict with other obligations

The entry into and performance by it of, and the transactions contemplated by, the Finance Documents and the granting of the Transaction Security do not and will not conflict with:

 

  (a) any material law or regulation applicable to it;

 

  (b) the constitutional documents of it; or


  (c) any agreement or instrument binding upon it or any of its assets or constitute a default or termination event (however described) under any such agreement or instrument in a manner which has or is reasonably likely to have a Material Adverse Effect (as defined in the Original Revolving Facility Agreement).

 

4. Power and authority

 

  (a) It has the power to enter into, perform and deliver, and has taken all necessary action to authorise its entry into, performance and delivery of, the Finance Documents to which it is a party and the transactions contemplated by those Finance Documents.

 

  (b) No limit on its powers will be exceeded as a result of the borrowing, grant of security or giving of guarantees or indemnities contemplated by the Finance Documents to which it is a party.

Clauses 23 ( Notices ), 24 ( Preservation ), 27 ( Counterparts ) and 29 ( Enforcement ) of the Intercreditor Agreement shall be deemed incorporated in this Amendment Letter (with such conforming amendments as the context requires) as if set out herein with each reference to the “Agreement” being deemed to be a reference to this Amendment Letter.

This letter shall constitute a Debt Document. The Intercreditor Agreement shall remain in full force and effect in all respects save as expressly amended by this letter.

A person who is not a party to this letter has no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce or enjoy the benefit of any term of this letter.

This letter is governed by and shall be construed in accordance with English law. Any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with this letter are governed by English law.

We should be grateful if you would sign and return to us the enclosed copy of this letter by way of your acknowledgement and acceptance of the contents of this letter and the Schedules.

Yours faithfully

THIS AMENDMENT LETTER has been entered into on the date stated beneath the counter signature of the Company below and has been executed and delivered by the Company as deed.

SCHEDULE 1

Amendment Provisions to the Intercreditor Agreement

The Intercreditor Agreement shall be amended as set out below (all references in this Schedule to Clauses or Schedules being to clauses of, or schedules to, the Intercreditor Agreement).

 

1. A new Clause 1.4 will be inserted as follows:

 

  “1.4 Swedish Security

Notwithstanding any other provision in the Debt Documents, the release of any Transaction Security over assets subject to a Transaction Security Document governed by Swedish law will always be subject to the prior written consent of the Security Trustee (in its sole discretion) unless (i) the assets to be released are disposed of in cash for their full market value to a third party independent purchaser; (ii) the purchase price is paid directly by that purchaser to the Security Trustee in application towards repayment and/or prepayment of the Secured Obligations (or are paid directly by the relevant purchaser into a blocked account pledged to the Security Trustee as cash collateral for the Secured Obligations); and (iii) the release is not


otherwise prohibited under the terms of any of the Debt Documents. The Security Trustee’s consent shall be given on a case by case basis and at the sole discretion of the Security Trustee. Notwithstanding the above, the Transaction Security Documents governed by Swedish law will not operate to automatically release any asset subject to such Transaction Security other than following the full discharge of the Secured Obligations.”

 

2. In order to correct certain typographical errors:

 

  (a) the reference in Clause 6.2(b) ( Restriction on Payment and dealings: Senior Unsecured Notes Liabilities ) to “Clause 6.3 ( Permitted Senior Unsecured Notes Payments )” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 6.3 ( Permitted Payments: Senior Unsecured Notes Liabilities )”;

 

  (b) the reference in Clause 6.2(b) (Restriction on Payment and dealings: Senior Unsecured Notes Liabilities) to “Clause 6.7” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 6.8”;

 

  (c) the reference in Clause 13.7 (Duties owed) to “this Clause 12.7” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “this Clause 13.7”;

 

  (d) the reference in Clause 13.7 (Duties owed) to “this Clause 12” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “this Clause 13”;

 

  (e) any reference in Clause 14.3 (Creditors’ and Debtors’ actions) to “this Clause 13” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “this Clause 14”;

 

  (f) the reference in Clause 16.17 (Belgian Guarantee Limitation) to “Clause 15” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 16”;

 

  (g) the reference in Clause 17.6 (French Security) to “Clause 17.7” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 17.8”;

 

  (h) the reference in Clause 17.7 (Appointment of the Security Trustee in relation to Belgian Security Documents) to “this Clause 16.7” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “this Clause 17.7”;

 

  (i) the reference in Clause 18.1(f) (Resignation of the Security Trustee) to “Clauses 0” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clauses 17”;

 

  (j) the reference in Clause 19.7 (New Ancillary Lender) to “clause 9.8” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “clause 7.8”;

 

  (k) the reference in Clause 25.4(c) (Exceptions) to “Clause 13” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 14”;

 

  (l) the reference in paragraph 5 of Schedule 3 (Form of Debtor Accession Deed) to “Clause 29” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 30”;

 

  (m) the reference in paragraph 5 of Schedule 3 (Form of Debtor Accession Deed) to “Clause 15” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 16”; and

 

  (n) the reference in paragraph 5 of Schedule 3 (Form of Debtor Accession Deed) to “Clause 16.5” shall be deleted and replaced with a reference to “Clause 17.5”.


3. Clause 17.6 (French Security) shall be deleted and replaced in its entirety by the following:

 

  “17.6     French Security and Swedish Security

 

  (a) The Security Trustee is hereby appointed as agent (mandataire) of the Secured Parties pursuant to Article 1984 et seq. of the French Code Civil, to represent and act on behalf of each Secured Party in relation to any actions required or advisable in connection with the entry into, performance, management and foreclosure of, and in respect of any dispute arising from or in connection with, any French Security Interest created pursuant to any French Security Document, pursuant and subject to the provisions of Clauses 17.7 ( No independent power ) to 17.23 ( Winding up of trust ) (inclusive), which shall apply mutatis mutandis for the purposes of the Security Trustee acting as agent ( mandataire ) of the Secured Parties pursuant to Article 1984 et seq. of the French Code Civil .

 

  (b) Each Secured Party (other than the Security Trustee) hereby (i) appoints the Security Trustee to act as its agent under or in connection with any Security Documents governed by Swedish law, (ii) authorises the Security Trustee to sign, execute and enforce each Security Document governed by Swedish law on its behalf and (iii) authorises the Security Trustee on its behalf to perform the duties and to exercise the rights, powers, authorities and discretions that are specifically given to it under or in connection with the Security Documents governed by Swedish law, together with any other incidental rights, powers, authorities and discretions.”

SCHEDULE 2

Conditions Precedent

 

1. A certified copy of the constitutional documents of the Company including any up-to-date registry extracts (if necessary).

 

2. A certified copy of a meeting of the board of directors of the Company approving the Amendment Letter and designating authorised officers of it to execute the Amendment Letter and any other documents required in connection with the transactions contemplated thereby.

 

3. A certificate of an authorised signatory of the Company setting out the names and signatures of the persons authorised to sign on behalf of it the Amendment Letter and all other documents to be executed in connection herewith.

 

4. The following legal opinions, each addressed to Barclays Bank PLC in its capacity as Agent and Security Trustee for Finance Parties (each as defined in the Original Revolving Facility Agreement):

 

  (a) a legal opinion of Shearman & Sterling (London) LLP as to matters of English law.

 

  (b) a legal opinion of Van Doorne N.V. (capacity and enforceability) as to matters of Dutch law.

Exhibit 4.2

Accession Letter to the Senior Multicurrency Revolving Facility Agreement dated December 17, 2013

ACCESSION LETTER

 

To: Barclays Bank PLC as Agent for the Finance Parties (each as defined in the Facility Agreement referred to below); and

Barclays Bank PLC as Security Trustee for itself and each of the other parties to the Intercreditor Agreement referred to below.

 

From:     InterXion Sverige AB and InterXion Holding N.V.
Dated:    17 December 2013

Dear Sirs

InterXion Holding N.V. – EUR 100,000,000 Facility Agreement

dated 17 June 2013 (as amended or as amended and restated

from time to time) (the “Facility Agreement”)

Intercreditor agreement (the “Intercreditor Agreement”) dated 3 July 2013

(as amended or as amended and restated from time to time) between, amongst others,

Barclays Bank PLC as security trustee and as Revolving Agent, the Creditors

and the Debtors (each as defined in the Intercreditor Agreement).

 

1. We refer to the Facility Agreement and to the Intercreditor Agreement. This deed (the “ Accession Letter ”) shall take effect as an Accession Letter for the purposes of the Facility Agreement and as a Debtor Accession Deed for the purposes of the Intercreditor Agreement (and as defined in the Intercreditor Agreement). Terms defined in the Facility Agreement have the same meaning in paragraphs 1 to 3 of this Accession Letter unless given a different meaning in this Accession Letter.

 

2. InterXion Sverige AB agrees to become an Additional Guarantor and to be bound by the terms of the Facility Agreement and the other Finance Documents (other than the Intercreditor Agreement) as an Additional Guarantor pursuant to Clause 26.4 ( Additional Guarantors ) of the Facility Agreement. InterXion Sverige AB is a company duly incorporated under the laws of Sweden and is a limited liability company and registered number 556580-9588.

Any guarantee by InterXion Sverige AB under any Finance Document (including but not limited to Clause 19 of the Facility Agreement) (a “ Guarantee ”) in respect of obligations owed by parties other than itself and its wholly-owned subsidiaries (as defined in the Swedish Companies Act ( Aktiebolagslagen )) shall be limited if (and only if) and to the extent required by an application of the provisions of the Swedish Companies Act regulating distribution of assets (including profits and dividends and any other form of transfer of value ( värdeöverföring ) within the meaning of the Swedish Companies Act) provided that all steps open to InterXion Sverige AB and all its shareholders to authorise its obligations under the Finance Documents have been taken. It is agreed that a Guarantee only applies to the maximum extent permitted by the above mentioned provisions of the Companies Act.

 

3. InterXion Sverige AB’s administrative details for the purposes of the Facility Agreement and the Intercreditor Agreement are as follows:

Address: Esbogatan 11, 164 74 Akalla Kista, Sweden

Fax No.: +46 859 464 051

Attention: Peder Bank


4. InterXion Sverige AB (for the purposes of this paragraph 4, the “ Acceding Debtor ”) intends to give a guarantee, indemnity or other assurance against loss in respect of Liabilities under the Intercreditor Agreement (the “ Relevant Document ”).

IT IS AGREED as follows:

 

  (a) Terms defined in the Intercreditor Agreement shall, unless otherwise defined in this Accession Letter, bear the same meaning when used in this paragraph 4.

 

  (b) The Acceding Debtor and the Security Trustee agree that the Security Trustee shall hold:

 

  (i) any Security in respect of Liabilities created or expressed to be created pursuant to the Relevant Document;

 

  (ii) all proceeds of that Security; and

 

  (iii) all obligations expressed to be undertaken by the Acceding Debtor to pay amounts in respect of the Liabilities to the Security Trustee (in the Relevant Document or otherwise) and secured by the Transaction Security together with all representations and warranties expressed to be given by the Acceding Debtor (in the Relevant Document or otherwise) in favour of the Security Trustee,

on trust or as agent for the Secured Parties on the terms and conditions contained in the Intercreditor Agreement.

 

  (c) The Acceding Debtor confirms that it intends to be party to the Intercreditor Agreement as a Debtor, undertakes to perform all the obligations expressed to be assumed by a Debtor under the Intercreditor Agreement and agrees that it shall be bound by all the provisions of the Intercreditor Agreement as if it had been an original party to the Intercreditor Agreement.

This Accession Letter and any non-contractual obligations arising out of or in connection with it are governed by English law.

THIS ACCESSION LETTER has been signed on behalf of the Security Trustee (for the purposes of paragraph 4 above only) and signed on behalf of the Obligors’ Agent and executed as a deed by InterXion Sverige AB and is delivered on the date stated above.

EXECUTED AS A DEED

 

InterXion Sverige AB

By:

in the presence of

  Signature of Witness
 

Name of Witness

Address of Witness

Occupation of Witness

InterXion Holding N.V.

By:

Barclays Bank PLC

By:

Exhibit 4.23

Management Agreement Managing Director InterXion Holding N.V. dated July 15, 2013

MANAGEMENT AGREEMENT

THE UNDERSIGNED:

 

1. InterXion Holding N.V. (the “ Company ”), a company incorporated under the laws of the Netherlands, having its registered seat in Amsterdam and its principal place of business in (1119 NX) Schiphol, Tupolevlaan 24, registered in the Trade Register of the Chamber of Commerce, under number 33301892;

 

   and,

 

2. Mr. D. Ruberg (the “ Manager ”), residing at Nicolaas Maesstraat 100, 1071 RG Amsterdam.

 

  a) WHEREAS:

 

a. the Manager and the Company currently have an employment agreement which will terminate by mutual agreement on 11 July 2013;

 

b. parties have decided to continue the relationship;

 

c. since the Management and Supervision Act does not allow parties to continue their relationship based on an employment agreement, parties have decided to enter into a management agreement;

 

d. the Manager has been be re-appointed for a three year term as a Managing Director ( statutair bestuurder ) of the Company in a resolution adopted by the General Meeting of Shareholders on 26 June 2013;

 

e. in accordance with article 2:129 of the Dutch Civil Code (“ DCC ”), the non-executive directors have given their prior approval to this management agreement;

 

f. the Manager has accepted the appointment as a Managing Director of the Company and is prepared and capable of rendering the services and of giving advice to the Company as is further defined in this agreement (the “ Agreement ”).

DECLARE AND HAVE AGREED AS FOLLOWS:

Article 1 Services

 

1.1 The Company hereby assigns to the Manager the performance of the general management in respect of the Company (the “ Services ”), which assignment the Manager hereby accepts.

 

1.2 Parties explicitly intend to enter into a service agreement ( overeenkomst van opdracht ) pursuant to article 7:400 DCC and further or any similar provision to other applicable law and do not intend to enter into an employment contract.


1.3 If the Manager should be incapable of performing the Services for an uninterrupted period of more than 6 weeks, he shall arrange an adequate substitute, provided that the Company has the sole discretion to determine whether the substitute is suitable for the performance of the Services or not.

 

1.4 Whilst acknowledging the ultimate responsibility of the Company, the Manager shall be free to perform the Services at his own discretion, provided that the Services are performed consciously on a level that may reasonably be expected of the Manager. The Manager commits himself to carry out the Services to the best of his knowledge and ability, and to refrain from carrying out acts that could directly or indirectly harm the assignment and/or the Company.

 

1.5 From time to time Parties will discuss the exact scope of the Services. Parties expect the Services to require 40 hours a week to fulfil. Given the nature of the Services and the function of the Manager, a flexible nature is expected from the Manager regarding performance of services outside business hours and/or exceeding the usual daily or weekly number of hours of work, without any additional compensation in return.

 

1.6 The Manager has all the rights and obligations of a Managing Director provided under Dutch law and the articles of association ( statuten ) of the Company.

 

1.7 If the Manager is a member of a Supervisory Board of another company within the same group by virtue of his position as Managing Director of the Company (so-called “q.q.-supervisory directorships”), or if the Manager is employed in any other position by virtue of his position as Managing Director of the Company (so-called “q.q.-positions”) he will pay the income derived from this position to the Company, unless the Company decides otherwise. The Manager will not suffer any tax disadvantage.

Article 2 Duration of the Agreement

 

2.1 The Agreement commences on 12 July 2013 and is entered into for a definite period of three years. This means that this Agreement will terminate by operation of law on 30 June 2016, without any notice being required.

 

2.2 Without prejudice to the provisions under Article 11, the Agreement can at all times be terminated prematurely by either party towards the end of a calendar month, with due observance of a term of notice of 1 month for the Manager and 2 months for the Company.

 

2.3 At the termination of this Agreement the Manager shall resign from any q.q.-supervisory directorship(s) and from any so-called q.q.-position(s) held by him as referred to in Article 1.7 of this Agreement.


Article 3 Remuneration

 

3.1 The Company will pay the Manager a fixed annual fee of EUR 500,000 gross (in words: five hundred thousand Euros), for the Services provided. The aforementioned fee will be paid in twelve monthly arrears on the last day of each month, after withholding the taxes and contributions as mentioned in Article 7.

 

3.2 If the Manager is unable to perform the Services as a result of illness or occupational disability or for any other reason, and no suitable substitute is provided in accordance with Article 1.3, the Manager will not be entitled to the remuneration referred to in Article 3.1.

Article 4 Annual bonus

 

4.1 The Manager will be entitled to an on-target bonus of 100% of his fixed annual fee, subject to achieving certain targets as set annually by the Compensation Committee. The goal of the Compensation Committee is to set the bonus targets by 1 March of the year the targets apply to. Such annual bonus scheme becomes effective immediately after the bonus targets have been set .

 

4.2 Over the year his Agreement commences or terminates, the Manager will be entitled to a pro rata part of his bonus, in so far as the pro rata targets for that year have been met.

Article 5 Severance

 

5.1 If this Agreement ends by operation of law pursuant to Article 2.1 or by a decision of the Company pursuant to Article 2.2, the Manager is entitled to receive compensation equal to the fixed annual fee as mentioned in Article 3.1. If a court might award any form of compensation, this contractually agreed compensation will be reduced by the same amount as awarded by the court. This means that this contractual severance arrangement serves as a minimum and that the Manager will not be entitled to any contractual severance payment if a court awards a severance payment equal to or more than the fixed annual fee.

 

5.2 The Manager will not be entitled to any contractual severance payment as set out in Article 5.1, if the Agreement between the Company and the Manager is terminated because of urgent cause ( dringende reden ) or the gross or wilful misconduct of the Manager.

 

5.3 The Manager will not be entitled to the contractual severance payment as set out in Article 5.1, if he terminates this Agreement or takes the initiative thereto.

Article 6 Expenses

 

6.1 If, and to the extent that, the Company has given prior approval for such expenses, the Company shall reimburse all reasonable expenses incurred by the Manager in the performance of his duties upon submission of all the relevant invoices and vouchers.

 

6.2 The Company shall pay the Manager a car allowance of EUR 40,000 gross per annum as compensation for using his own car for company matters, or the Manager can lease a car on the basis of the InterXion company car policy up to a maximum amount of EUR 40,000.


6.3 The Company shall make available to the Manager a mobile phone and laptop, as well as any other means of communication provided to members of the Company’s senior management.

Article 7 Fiscal qualification

 

7.1 Based on article 3, paragraph 1, section i of the Wages and Salaries Tax Act 1964 (“ Wet op de loonbelasting 1964 ”) the relationship between the Company and the Manager will be considered a fictitious employment relationship. Therefore, the Company is obliged to withhold payroll taxes from the payments referred to in Article 3.1.

 

7.2 Based on article 6 of the Social Insurance Funding Act (“ Wet financiering sociale verzekeringen ”) the Manager will be considered to be an insured employee (“ verzekerde”) . Therefore the Company is also obliged to withhold national insurance contributions from the payments referred to in Article 3.1.

 

7.3 Based on article 59 of the Social Insurance Funding Act (“ Wet financiering sociale verzekeringen ”), the Company is also obliged to withhold employee benefit contributions from payments referred to in Article 3.1.

 

7.4 With respect to the application made by the Manager for the 30%-facility, the following will be taken into account:

 

  a. If, and insofar, the Manager is, based on article 9 of the ‘Uitvoeringsbesluit loonbelasting 1965’, entitled to receive a tax-free cost reimbursement for extraterritorial costs, it has been agreed with the Manager that his current employment income (‘loon uit tegenwoordige dienstbetrekking’) as described in article 9 of the ‘Uitvoeringsbesluit loonbelasting 1965’, will be reduced according to labour law so that 100/70 of his current employment income equals the originally agreed employment income.

 

  b. If, and insofar, subsection a. is applicable, the Manager will receive a cost reimbursement for extraterritorial costs from the Employer equal to 30/70 of the current employment income as agreed in subsection a.

 

  c. The Managing Director acknowledges the fact that an adjustment to the agreed level of remuneration of subsection a. may influence all employment income related payments and benefits such as pension and social security benefits.

Article 8 Non-competition/non-solicitation

 

8.1 The Manager shall throughout the duration of this Agreement and for a period of one year after termination hereof, not be engaged or involved in any manner, directly or indirectly, whether for the account of the Manager or for the account of or employed by others, in any enterprise which conducts activities in a field similar to or otherwise competes with that of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or affiliated companies nor act as intermediary in whatever manner directly or indirectly. This obligation applies solely to any work activities or involvement of the Manager within the territory of any member state of the European Union.


8.2 In the event the Manager breaches the obligations as expressed in paragraph 1 of this Article, the Manager shall, without notice of default being required, pay to the Company for each such breach a penalty equal to an amount of EUR 100,000, plus a penalty of EUR 2,500 for each day such breach occurs and continues. Alternatively, the Company will be entitled to claim full damages.

Article 9 Non disclosure

 

9.1 The Manager shall throughout the duration of this Agreement and after this Agreement has been terminated for whatever reason, refrain from disclosing in any manner to any individual (including other personnel of the Company or of other companies affiliated with the Company unless such personnel must be informed in connection with their work activities for the Company) any information of a confidential nature concerning the Company or other companies affiliated with the Company, which has become known to the Manager as a result of his employment with the Company and of which the Manager knows or should have known to be of a confidential nature for as long as this information has not become publicly known through no wrongful act or negligence of the Manager.

 

9.2 If the Manager breaches the obligations pursuant to paragraph 1 of this Article, the Manager shall, without any notice of default being required, pay a penalty of EUR 2,500 to the Company for each breach thereof. Alternatively, the Company will be entitled to claim full damages.

Article 10 Documents

The Manager shall not have, nor keep in his possession, any documents and/or correspondence and/or data carriers and/or copies thereof in any manner whatsoever, which belong to the Company or to other companies affiliated with the Company and which have been made available to the Manager as a result of the Services, except insofar as and for as long as is necessary for the performance of his work for the Company. In any event the Manager will be obliged to return to the Company immediately, without necessitating the need for any request to be made in this regard, any and all such documents and/or correspondence and/or data carriers and/or copies thereof upon termination of this Agreement or suspension of the Manager from active duty for whatever reason.

Article 11 Termination

 

11.1 The Company is entitled to terminate this Agreement - by giving notice in writing to the Manager - without having to observe the notice period mentioned in Article 2.2 if:

 

  a. a material breach of this Agreement is made by the Manager and the breach is not remedied within 20 days after notification thereof, without prejudice to any other rights of the Company in connection with such breach;

 

  b. the Manager becomes bankrupt, requests a suspension of payment, is declared commercially incompetent by order of the court, enters into liquidation, compounds with his creditors or is unable to pay his debts as they mature or is involved in any insolvency or reorganisation proceedings supervised by a court;


  c. the Manager is incapable of performing the Services for an uninterrupted period of more than 6 weeks, regardless of the reason thereof;

 

  d. the substitute suggested by the Manager pursuant to Article 1.3 is – in the opinion of the Company - not suitable for the performance of the Services;

 

  e. the Manager resigns or is dismissed as statutory director of the Company.

 

11.2 The Parties hereby agree that the Manager will not be entitled to any compensation of whatever nature if the Company terminates the Agreement pursuant to Article 11.1.

Article 12 Gifts

The Manager shall not, in connection with the performance of his duties, directly or indirectly, accept or demand commissions, contributions or reimbursements in any form whatsoever from third parties. This does not apply to customary promotional gifts of little value.

Article 13 Miscellaneous

 

13.1 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between the Manager on the one hand and the Company on the other hand in respect of the matters set forth herein. This Agreement supersedes and, to the extent applicable, replaces all relevant previous agreements between the Manager on the one hand and the Company on the other hand. After this Agreement is signed, the Manager on the one hand and the Company on the other hand can no longer derive any rights from agreements which have been superseded hereby, including any previous employment agreements between the Manager and the Companies.

 

13.2 Neither Party hereto is entitled to assign its rights or obligations pursuant to this Agreement without the prior written approval of the other Party.

 

13.3 All costs that Parties have incurred by the development of this Agreement shall be borne by the Company

 

13.4 This Agreement is governed by the laws of the Netherlands.

 

13.5 Any disputes arising out of the Agreement or ensuing agreements and any disputes relating thereto shall be settled initially by the competent Court in Amsterdam.

SIGNATORIES

In witness whereof, this Agreement has been signed and executed in duplicate this 15 July 2013.

 

 

   

 

 
InterXion Holding N.V.     Mr. D. Ruberg  
Mr. D. Lister      

On 11 July 2013 the Board has resolved to authorize Mr. D. Lister to sign this Agreement on behalf of the Company.

Exhibit 4.26

Lease Agreement between InterXion Netherlands B.V. and ProLogis Netherlands VII SarL dated April 15, 2013.

Reference number: AB8374620

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

 

LOGO

 

 

LEASE AGREEMENT OF OFFICE SPACE

and other industrial premises within the meaning of Article 7:230a of the Dutch Civil Code

 

 

Model laid down by the Council for Real Estate Matters [ Raad voor Onroerende Zaken ] (ROZ) on 30 July 2003.

Reference to and use of this model are only permitted in the event that the filled in, the added or the varying text is clearly recognizable as such. Additions and variations must preferably be placed under the heading ‘exceptional terms and conditions’.

ROZ excludes all liability for adverse effects flowing from the use of the text of the model.

 

 

THE UNDERSIGNED

ProLogis Netherlands VII Sarl , a company incorporated under the laws of Luxembourg, with its registered office at 34-38 Avenue de la Liberte, L-1930 Luxembourg, registration number B69253, duly represented by the authorized representative Mr. G.J. Meerkerk (the “ Lessor ”);

and

Interxion Nederland B.V. , a company organised and existing under the laws of the Netherlands, with its registered office at Cessnalaan 1-33, 1119 NJ Schiphol-Rijk, registration number 34116837, VAT registration number 34116837, duly represented by the authorized representative Mr M.L.H. van den Assem (the “ Lessee ”),

and

InterXion Holding N.V. , a company with limited liability, having its registered office and place of business at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, registered with the Chamber of Commerce nr. 33301892, duly represented for the purpose hereof by Mr. D.C. Ruberg, hereinafter to be referred to as the “ Parent ”;

together referred to as the “Parties” and “party” shall mean either of them,

Whereas:

 

a. The Lessor is the owner of the industrial premises located at Cessnalaan 50, Schiphol Rijk, known as Schiphol Distribution Center 2, Units A, B, and C, recorded in the land registry as Municipality of Haarlemmermeer, section AK, number 2213, comprising a total of appr. 20,305 sq m, and as further indicated in appendix 1 (the “ Leased Premises ”);

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    1


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

b. The Lessee has visited, inspected and reviewed the industrial premises as described in article 1 and concluded that it is suitable to perform the activities related to its business and as set out in article 1.2;

 

c. Furthermore, the Lessee has checked and verified of all necessary permits to conduct its business in the Leased Premises can be obtained, whereas the Parties agreed that if one or more of the permits (including if the Leased Premises can be used in accordance with article 1.2) cannot be obtained or will be withdrawn, this does not qualify as a defect (“gebrek”) and will be for the account and risk of the Lessee;

 

d. The Lessee has carried out a due diligence regarding the Leased Premises. The Lessor shall repair and execute for its own account the defects and necessary maintenance as set out in appendix 12 . The works for the repair will start after that this lease is unconditionally and will be executed as set out in article 9. After that the works as set out in appendix 12 are completed, the Leased Premises will be delivered to the Lessee ‘as is’. After the Lease Commencement Date, any defects that might appear will be for the account of the Lessee. The Lessee will however not be liable for (the repair of) any hidden defects to the Leased Premises that were present at the Lease Commencement Date and that were known or should have been known by the Lessor or that the Lessor did not mention to the Lessee (indien het gebrek bij het aangaan van de overeenkomst aanwezig was en de verhuurder het toen kende of had behoren te kennen, of toen aan de huurder heeft te kennen gegeven dat de zaak het gebrek niet had”);

 

e. The Parties agreed that the Agreement will be a “triple net lease”, meaning that all costs for maintenance of the Leased Premises (including property taxe, insurances premiums and all other expenses that are normally borne by the Lessor) shall be for the account and risk of the Lessee as set out in this Agreement;

 

f. The Parties wish to conclude a lease agreement with respect to the Leased Premises on the terms as set out and mutually agreed upon in this agreement (this “ Agreement ”).

HAVE AGREED

 

1 The Leased Premises, Intended Use

 

1.1 The Lessor will lease to the Lessee and the Lessee will lease from the Lessor the industrial premises located at Cessnalaan 50, Schiphol Rijk, known as Schiphol Distribution Center 2, Units A, B, and C, recorded in the land registry as Municipality of Haarlemmermeer, section AK, number 2213, comprising a total of appr. 20,305 m² (the “ Leased Premises ”), as further indicated on the drawings attached to this Agreement as appendix 1 (Plan of the Site) and appendix 2 (Drawings of the Leased Premises) and further described in the Outline Specifications ( appendix 3 ) and in the Delivery Statement (as defined in this article 1.1).

The Leased Premises consist of in total appr. 11,720 m² (eleven thousand seven hundred and twenty square meters) of warehouse/data centre space and appr. 1,950 m² (one thousand nine hundred fifty square meters) of office space (all measurements in this Agreement being net square meters)), surrounding grounds and parking spaces as indicated on the drawings ( appendix 1 and 2 ), divided as follows:

Unit A:

 

    Appr. 3,227 m² (three thousand two hundred twenty-seven square meters) of warehouse/data centre space,

 

   

Appr. 377 m² (three hundred seventy-seven square meters) of office space,

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    2


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Unit B:

 

    Appr. 4,214 m² (four thousand two hundred fourteen square meters) of warehouse/ data centre space,

 

    Appr. 1,089 m² (one thousand eighty-nine square meters) of office space,

Unit C:

 

    Appr. 4,279 m² (four thousand two hundred seventy-nine square meters) of warehouse/ data centre space,

 

    Appr. 484 m² (four hundred eighty-four square meters) of office space,

The Lessor has executed a measurement to calculate the actual Net Lettable m² of the warehouse/data centre and office space (excluding car and truck parking) in accordance with the NEN 2580 norm that is in force on the date of the report as attached to this Agreement as appendix 4 .

As the Site and parking area as indicated on the drawings will only be used by the Lessee, all parking spaces will be exclusive for the Lessee and its visitors. Approximately 86 parking spaces are situated in front and aside the Leased Premises. This area is partly closed off by a fence, as indicated on the drawings ( appendix 2 ).

The Leased Space and the Site shall be accessible 24 hours per day, 7 days a week.

Within 15 working days of the Lease Commencement Date the Parties will sign a delivery statement (the “ Delivery Statement ”), which will include photos and a description of the condition of the Leased Premises as of the Lease Commencement Date. The Delivery Statement will be attached to this Agreement as appendix 5 .

 

1.2 The Lessee will be permitted to use the Leased Premises for the development and exploitation as a data centre with ancillary offices and parking spaces in the broadest sense of the word as long as these activities are in accordance with the (environmental) permits obtained by the Lessee and/or special requirements of the building as set out in the Outline Specifications ( appendix 3 ).

The Lessee will be permitted to occupy the Leased Premises for a different use as stated above after the written approval of the Lessor. The Lessor will not withhold its approval on unreasonable grounds or delay its approval on unreasonable grounds.

The Lessee is solely responsible for obtaining all necessary permits and approvals from the (local) authorities and other regulatory agencies and utility providers associated with the intended use of the Leased Premises. Furthermore, the Lessee is solely responsible for verifying if all necessary permits and approvals for its intended use of the Leased Premises can be obtained.

All costs associated with getting the required permits and approvals for the intended use will be borne by the Lessee. Unless specifically agreed upon otherwise in this Agreement, not obtaining any of the required approvals or permits will not be seen as a default (“gebrek”) in the broadest sense of the word and will therefore not be a reason to (prematurely) terminate the Agreement or get any compensation whatsoever from the Lessor. The Lessee explicitly acknowledges its sole responsibility in this matter.

 

1.3 The Lessee is not permitted to use the Leased Premises for another purpose than that described above without prior written consent from the Lessor. The Lessor will not withhold its approval on unreasonable grounds or delay its approval on unreasonable grounds.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    3


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

1.4 The maximum permissible load on the floors of the Leased Premises is as set out in the Outline Specifications ( appendix 3 ).

 

2 General Terms and Conditions

 

2.1 The General Terms and Conditions of the tenancy agreement for office space and other industrial premises in the sense of Article 7:230a of the Civil Code, filed at the office of the court in The Hague on 11 July 2003 and registered under number 72/2003 (the “ General Terms and Conditions ”) constitute a part of this Agreement ( appendix 6 ) . The Parties are familiar with the content of the General Terms and Conditions and have received a copy thereof.

 

2.2 The General Terms and Conditions are applicable except in so far as this Agreement explicitly states otherwise or except if application thereof with respect to the Leased Premises is not possible.

 

2.3 In case of conflict between the Dutch text in this Agreement, including the Dutch text of the General Terms and Conditions and the English translation thereof, the Dutch text will prevail. The English version of the General Terms and Conditions is for information purposes only and in no way relevant for the legal relationship between the Lessor and the Lessee and their intent.

 

3 Term, Extension and Termination

 

3.1 This Agreement is entered into for a period of 10 (ten) years, commencing on 1 May 2013 (the “ Lease Commencement Date ”) and ending on 30 April 2023.

 

3.2 Following the expiry of the period referred to in article 3.1, this Agreement will be automatically extended for 4 (four) subsequent periods of 5 (five) years, unless the Lessee terminates this Agreement by writ served by bailiff or by registered letter or by courier with due observance of a notice period of 12 (twelve) months prior to the end of the period referred to in article 3.1 or to the end of one of the 5 (five) year prolongation periods thereafter.

 

3.3 Following the expiry of the periods referred to in article 3.2 (extension periods) (so as per 1 May 2043), this Agreement will be extended for subsequent periods of 5 (five) years, unless the Lessee and/or Lessor terminates this Agreement by writ served by bailiff or by registered letter or by courier with due observance of a notice period of 12 (twelve) months following the expiry of the periods referred to in article 3.2 (extension periods) (so as per 1 May 2043) or to the end of any 5 (five) year prolongation periods thereafter.

 

4 Rent, VAT, Rent Adjustment, Payment Obligation, Term of Payment

 

4.1 The rent will amount to an annual sum of € [***] ([***] euro). This amount is exclusive of VAT. The rent is a fixed sum and not based on the lettable floor surface as mentioned in the NEN 2580 measurement report ( appendix 4 ), but is for the Leased Premises, surrounding grounds and outside parking spaces as is.

 

4.2 The Parties agree that the rent will be subject to value added tax.

As the Lessor has its registered place of business in Luxembourg, the Lessee will declare the VAT due over the rent directly to the Dutch tax authorities in accordance with Article 12 paragraph 3 of the Turnover Tax Act of 1968 (“Wet op de Omzetbelasting 1968”).

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    4


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

4.3 In the event that Parties agree on rent subject to value added tax, the Lessee and the Lessor herewith declare, with reference to art. 11 § 1 preamble under b part 5 of the Turnover Tax Act, that they agreed that the rent will be subject to value added tax. By undersigning this Agreement, the Lessee declares, also for the legal successor(s) of the Lessor, that it will permanently make use of the Leased Premises or cause the Leased Premises to be used for purposes in connection with which there is a full or virtually a full right to deduct value added tax as set out in Article 15 of the 1968 Turnover Tax Act (“Wet op de omzetbelasting”).

 

4.4 The fiscal year of the Lessee will run from 1 January up to and including 31 December.

 

4.5 The rent will be adjusted annually on each anniversary of the Lease Commencement Date, in accordance with Articles 9.1 to 9.4 of the General Terms and Conditions, for the first time on 1 May 2014. Notwithstanding Article 9.1 of the General Terms and Conditions, the Parties agree that the consumer price index series for all households, published by the Central Bureau of Statistics (CBS) 2006=100 will be applicable. The annual rent adjustment (indexation) shall never be less than 2%. Indexation increases up to and including 4% will be charged at 100%. Indexation increases above 4% will be charged at 50%, whereby the first 4% will be charged at 100%.

 

4.6 Intentionally deleted.

 

4.7.1 The payment obligation of the Lessee consists of:

 

    the rent;

 

    the value added tax payable over the rent if the Parties have agreed on rent subject to value added tax;

 

4.7.2 The Lease will no longer be VAT taxed in the event that this is no longer permitted. In this case, the sums in compensation for the value added tax referred to in Article 19.3.a of the General Terms and Conditions will be due and the sum in compensation to be paid by the Lessee as referred to in Article 19.3.a under I of the General Terms and Conditions will be determined at its actual damage, whereas an advance payment of 5 % of the current rent shall be due by the Lessee, to be paid to the Lessor together with the rent. The Lessor will calculate the damage annually and invoice the amount of damage to the Lessee, including the costs of calculation.

 

4.8 On the Lease Commencement Date, the total amount payable per 3 (three) calendar months is:

 

- the rent

    [***
  

 

 

 

total

    [***

in words: ([***] euros).

  

 

4.9 The periodic payments payable by the Lessee to the Lessor under article 4.8 shall be made quarterly in advance in one lump sum payment in Euros on the bank account indicated by the Lessor and shall be paid in full prior to or on the first day of each calendar quarter subject to Lessee receiving an invoice at least 30 days prior to each calendar quarter.

Unless otherwise stated, all sums in this Agreement and the General Terms and Conditions are exclusive of value added tax.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    5


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

5 Supplies and services

 

5.1 The Parties hereby agree that the Lessor will not provide additional supplies and services (“leveringen en diensten”) regarding the Leased Premises in accordance with Article 16 of the General Terms and Conditions. Lessor shall therefore not charge any service charges to Lessee.

The Lessee shall obtain its own direct supply of electricity and gas and water and waste and any other possible services from the relevant utility company in respect of the Leased Premises.

 

6 Security

 

6.1 On or before the date of this Agreement, the Lessee shall provide to the Lessor a bank guarantee issued by a Dutch bank with a licence of De Nederlandsche Bank as a guarantee for the performance of the Lessee’s obligations under this Agreement . The bank guarantee will be attached to this Agreement as appendix 7 and will be in conformity with the model which is attached as appendix 8 . The provisions of Article 12 of the General Terms and Conditions will apply to such bank guarantee. The amount of the bank guarantee is hereby established between the Parties at 3 (three) months’ rent plus value added tax. As long as the value added tax is reversed to the Lessee and therefore not payable, this amounts to EUR [***]. When the reversed charge mechanism is no longer applicable, and the Lessee pays the value added tax to the Lessor, Lessee will increase the amount up to EUR [***].

 

6.2 In addition to the bank guarantee, the Lessee is obliged to have Parent co-signing this Agreement. Parent declares by undersigning this Agreement that it is jointly and severally liable for the entire due financial performance of this Agreement. The Parties agree that the Parent is not obliged to operate the Leased Premises. However the Parent is entitled to operate the Leased Premises and to continue this Agreement if the Lessee (or its trustee) does not terminate the lease agreement in case of bankruptcy or suspension of payment of the Lessee.

 

6.3 The Parent herewith explicitly states that it is independently liable to the Lessor for all damage, costs and interests as a result of early termination or annulment of the Agreement including early termination due to (filing for) suspension of payment (surseance van betaling) or bankruptcy (faillissement) of the Lessee, which are understood to comprise, but not exclusively, any payment that would have been due by the Lessee to the Lessor during the term of this Agreement as if this Agreement had not been terminated.

 

6.4 At payment of any amount because of this article 6.2 and 6.3, the Parent will refrain for these amounts of (partial) recourse on the Lessee or the assets of the bankrupt Lessee, including but not limited to claims of i.a. but not limited to recourse (‘regres’) / subrogation (‘subrogatie’) / set off (‘verrekening’) , foreclosure of a security right (‘uitwinning van zekerheidsrechten’). The Parent will not accept any deposits or other payments of the Lessee related to this liability.

 

7 Manager

 

7.1 Until the Lessor announces otherwise, the following entity will act as manager: ProLogis Management B.V.

 

7.2 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, in so far as the content and all further matters with regard to this Agreement are concerned, the Lessee will come to an understanding with the manager.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    6


Reference number: AB8374620

 

SPECIFIC TERMS AND CONDITIONS

Triple net

 

8 The Lessee shall, contrary to article 13.3 of the General Terms and Conditions, at its own account and risk, be responsible for all fitting-out works, maintenance, repairs and replacements with regard to the Leased Premises and the Site, including the technical installations, the roof (after installation of the new roof by the Lessor as set out in 14), the façade and any other structural parts of the Leased Premises and the Site. An indicative list – for clarification purposes: this not a limited list, therefore, the Lessee should execute more works if reasonable and necessary – will be attached as appendix   13 (“Triple net Supply and Services”).

The Lessee will furthermore be responsible for all other Landlord’s expenses to the Leased Premises, such as (but not limited to) property taxes (i.e.“triple net” lease agreement). The minimal required maintenance will be agreed by the Parties and monitored with the Lessor’s property management team and will be set out in appendix 13 (“Triple net Supply and Services”). The Lessee will inform the Lessor annually what maintenance works will be executed.

Due diligence report and Delivery

 

9 The Lessee is a professional and experienced party and has conducted a full due diligence of the Leased Premises. The Lessee therefore accepts the Leased Premises in “as is” condition and declares that it is aware of and does not object to all special obligations and restrictions relating to the Leased Premises as (e.g.) mentioned in the zoning plan and other applicable regulations, including, but not limited to, restricted rights and qualitative obligations.

Based on the due diligence executed by the Lessee, the Lessee has requested the Lessor to execute some works as described in appendix 12 (hereinafter: ‘the Works’). This is a limited list. The Lessor shall carry out at its own expense all the Works within 6 (six) months after the Lease Commencement Date. In the event that the Lessor has not finished the Works within the aforementioned period of 6 (six) months, the Lessee is entitled to carry out/finish the Works itself for the account of the Lessor.

The Lessor will start executing the Works after that this Agreement is unconditional. Therefore, the Parties agree that some of the Works might not be finished before the Lease Commencement Date. The Lessor and the Lessee will agree upon a reasonable time schedule to have the Lessor executing the Works during the 6 (six) months period after the Lease Commencement Date.

After that the Works are completed, the Leased Premises will be delivered by the Lessor to the Lessee ‘as is’ (nothwithstanding the works on the roof as set out in article 14). The Lessor will not execute any other works to improve the Leased Premises other than explicitly stated in this Agreement. If any defects will appear during Agreement, this will be for the account of the Lessee. The Lessee will however not be liable for (the repair of) any hidden defects to the Leased Premises that were present at the Lease Commencement Date and that were known or should have been known by the Lessor or that the Lessor did not mention to the Lessee (het gebrek bij het aangaan van de overeenkomst aanwezig was en de verhuurder het toen kende of had behoren te kennen, of toen aan de huurder heeft te kennen gegeven dat de zaak het gebrek niet had”). The state of the Leased Premises will be set out in the Delivery Statement, the drawings and the Outline Specifications. ( appendices 1, 2, 3, and 5 ).

 

10 The Leased Premises will be delivered with a full automatic and certified K14 sprinkler system as set out in the Outline Specifications. The sprinkler system will be in good working order and certification and proof of annual maintenance is included in appendix 14 .

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    7


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Alterations to the fit-out of the Leased Premises

A) Alterations to the leased space

 

11 The Lessor is aware that the Lessee will install a data centre in the warehouse space according to a so called “box in a box” principle which concerns a self-supporting construction adding inside the building which shall not affect the structural specifications of the building and which shall not prevent Lessee to properly reinstate the Leased Premises at the end of the Leased Term following article 1.1 and article 22. The Lessee will also change the office space (together defined as: “non-structural alterations”). The Lessee is allowed to execute these non-structural alterations without the Lessor’s consent, whereas the Parties agree that nonstructural alterations constitute all those adjustments, that do not impact the basic supporting structure of the building . Examples of these non-structural alterations are (the following list is by no means exhaustive):

 

    Roof penetrations for exhaust pipes, cooling water pipes, steel beams for chiller platform, data and power cabling, etc.

 

    Enforcing floor load

 

    Installing self supporting steel frames and separation walls

 

    Installing self supporting floors

 

    Changing layout of offices, reception area’s and warehouse

 

    Installing fencing around the perimeter

 

    Installing facades against outer walls

These non-structural alterations are set out on appendix 10 .

 

12 The Lessee is only allowed to carry out structural alterations to the Leased Premises, meaning all alterations that are not non-structural alterations as defined in article 11, with the Lessor’s prior written consent such consent not to be unreasonably withheld or delayed by the Lessor.

 

13 All relevant costs, as well as obtaining the required permits/notifications from (local) authorities etc., associated with the changes to be realized by the Lessee are for the full account, and responsibility of the Lessee. Therefore, not being able to realize these changes in the broadest sense of the word does not qualify as a default (‘gebrek’) under this Agreement.

Roof

 

14 Due to the type of operation of the Lessee, the Parties agreed that the Lessor will invest in a replacement of the roof on its own cost and account and in accordance with the requirements set out in appendix 11 . After the Lease Commencement Date, the Lessor will determine in good cooperation with the Lessee on the exact timing and details of the works on the roof. These works will be carried out in the first year of the Agreement (to be determined by both Parties). The works on the roof will however never start before that the Agreement is signed by the Parties, the bank guarantee is provided and the first rental payment is received by the Lessor.

The Lessor informed the Lessee that these works on the roof might cause hinder. The Lessee, however, stated that it prefers to occupy the Leased Premises before the works are executed. Therefore, the Parties agree that any hinder or disturbance due to these works cannot be qualified as a defect (“gebrek”) and therefore cannot be cause to any compensation/claim by the Lessee against the Lessor.

After the Lessor has completed the replacement of the roof according to the requirements set in appendix 11 , the Lessee will be responsible for all future maintenance, replacements and liabilities regarding the roof.

Fence

 

15 In order to secure the Leased Premises, the Lessee is allowed to place one or more new fences and/or change the existing fence around the entire Leased Premises without the Lessor’s consent. Article 13 applies to these works.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG   

8


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Chillers and Condensers

 

16 The Lessee will have the right to install so called “chillers” and “condensers” next to the Leased Premises and or on to be installed platforms on the roof of the Leased Premises. Clause 13 applies to these works.

Power generators

 

17 The Lessee will have the right to place so called “power generators” in front or aside of the Leased Premises. Article 13 applies to these works.

Cabling and satellite dishes

 

18 The Lessee has the right to install cabling in the Leased Premises and in the ground in the direct vicinity of the Leased Premises leading from/ to the Leased Premises. The Lessee is permitted to place satellite dishes on the Leased Premises. Article 13 applies to all these works.

Security system

 

19 The Lessee will have the right, but is not obliged to use the security system that is currently in place in the Leased Premises and/or install its own extensive security system, including but not limited to an electronic card access system, proximity cards, video monitoring equipment, CCTV, biometrics readers and patrols by a private security firm. Article 13 applies to these works.

Geothermal wells

 

20 The Lessee will have the exclusive right to drill for wells and utilize geothermal resources from the Leased Premises. Article 13 applies to these works.

 

21 The Lessor will perform an environmental review of the Leased Premises, a copy of which shall be attached to this Agreement as appendix 9 (the “ Review ’). The Review represents the so-called “zero situation” (“ nulsituatie ”) agreed by the Lessee and the Lessor.

The Lessee is obliged to have an environmental survey of the Leased Premises (the “ Environmental Survey ”) carried out by a reputable and well-known environmental survey company, which company needs to be approved by the Lessor, at the expiry or early termination of the Lease.

If this Environmental Survey shows that compared with the so-called “zero situation”, as indicated in the Review, there are substances in the soil and/or groundwater of the Leased Premises that exceed the criteria for further investigation pursuant to the Soil Protection Act (“Wet Bodembescherming”) then the Lessor may carry out such further investigation and /or take such safety and/ or remediation measures as it shall think fit and the Lessee will be liable for all damages, losses, costs or expenses that are incurred by the Lessor as a result thereof and the Lessee shall hold the Lessor harmless and/or indemnify the Lessor from and against such damages, losses, costs, or expenses. The Lessee will however not be liable for any damages, losses, costs or expenses related to pollution of soil and/or groundwater of the Leased Premises that were present at the Lease Commencement Date, but were not detected during the zero situation.

If the Lessor and/or the Lessee are ordered by the competent authorities under the Soil Protection Act (“Wet Bodembescherming” ) at the expiry of this Agreement or during the term of this Agreement to carry out investigations or to take safety or remediation measures with respect to the environmental situation of the soil and/or groundwater of the Leased Premises, then the Lessor may carry out such investigation and/or to take such safety and/or remediation measures as it shall think fit and the Lessee will be liable for damage, losses, costs or expenses that are incurred by the Lessor as a result thereof and the Lessee shall hold the

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    9


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Lessor harmless and/or indemnify the Lessor from and against such damages, losses, costs, or expenses. Lessee will however not be liable for any damages, losses, costs or expenses related to pollution of soil and/or groundwater of the Leased Premises that were present at the commencement of the lease, but were not detected during the zero situation.

The aforementioned provisions are not applicable if the Lessee proves that the pollution was not consistent with its business operations during the occupation of the Leased Premises nor are due to the Lessee’s fault or negligence or that of its personnel or persons or things under its supervision or persons who the Lessee has admitted onto the Leased Premises, including users of the parking spaces, nor to any circumstance which can be attributed to the Lessee.

Article 6.8.1 first sentence and Article 6.8.2 of the General Terms and Conditions are not applicable.

Re-instatement at the end of the lease

 

22 Following termination of this Agreement the Leased Premises must be delivered to Lessor in the same state as mentioned in the Delivery Statement as well as mentioned in The Review. The Lessee will be obliged to have all damage to the Leased Premises – other than damage as a result of normal wear and tear and ageing (“normaal gebruik en slijtages en ouderdom”) – repaired by a competent professional.

Subletting

 

23 The Lessee may sublet or give into use the whole or parts of the Leased Premises to affiliated companies and to third parties associated with its business as a datacenter and office space without the Lessor’s consent. In case the Lessee wants to sublease to a company not associated with its direct business as a datacenter and office space, for example to a logistics provider, prior written approval of Lessor is required which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. In case of sublease, Lessee will remain responsible for all the obligations deriving from the Agreement .

License / service agreement

 

24 In order to carry out its daily operations, the Lessee is allowed to offer services and facilities to customers, such as giving into use, via a service agreement, part(s) of the fitted out data centre, supply of several telecommunication services and giving into use, via a service agreement, office space. No consent from Lessor is required.

Assignment of the Agreement

 

25 The Lessee has the right to assign this Agreement to another party, after prior written approval from the Lessor. If the Lessee wishes to use this right, it will inform the Lessor thereof in writing and will provide all relevant information about the new lessee to the Lessor for review. The Lessor shall not delay or withhold its approval on unreasonable grounds. The Lessor will check amongst other things the morality, creditworthiness, liquidity and solvability of the new lessee as well as the capability of this new lessee to meet all obligations ensuing from the Agreement. If the new lessee is not at least equal to the Lessee with regard to one or more of the mentioned aspects, the Lessor is entitled to withhold its approval.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    10


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Purchase option

 

26 The Lessee has the one-time right to purchase the Leased Premises for a purchase price of EUR [***] (price level 1 May 2023), all costs to be borne by the Lessee (“Kosten Koper”) at the 10 th (tenth) anniversary of the Agreement. In case the Lessee wishes to exercise its option to purchase, the Lessee shall inform the Lessor in writing by registered letter ultimately 30 th  April 2022. The civil-law notary that will draw up the written sale and purchase agreement will be appointed by the Lessee. The transfer date of the Leased Premises will be May 1st 2023 at the latest. In case no transfer / closing is realized by this date, the right of purchase will be waived and the Agreement will remain in place provided that the Lease has not been terminated. In the event that this Agreement is assigned to a third party in conformity with article 25, this purchase option terminates, except in case Lessee assigns this Agreement to a company in which Parent directly or indirectly holds 100% of the voting rights and has the power to appoint the majority of the board. Furthermore, the Lessor informed the Lessee that it is only allowed to transfer the Leased Premises after that it obtained the written approval of the Schiphol authorities. Therefore, this one-time right to purchase the Leased Premises is subject to the approval of the Schiphol authorities.

Selling the Leased Premises

 

27 The Lessor shall inform the Lessee in writing in case Lessor has the intention to sell the Leased Premises. The Lessor shall inform the third party buyer of this Agreement. The Lessor is obligated to impose its obligations arising from this Agreement – including the obligations arising from the purchase option – to its successor by way of a perpetual clause (“kettingbeding”). The Lessor will have the Lessee’s purchase right as set out in article 26 registered as a perpetual clause in the land registry (“kadaster”). The costs of registration will be for the account of the Lessor.

Signage

 

28 The Lessee is allowed to have name signage put up on the Leased Premises. All name signage will require the prior written approval of the Lessor, which will not be withheld or delayed on unreasonable grounds. The Lessee will arrange the necessary permits and approvals from the municipality of Haarlemmermeer and any other competent authority. The signage may not be put up before all required permits and approvals have been obtained. All costs with regard to the placing of the signs, including costs for permits, installation, maintenance, removing and subsequent cleaning and repairing of the facade will be borne by the Lessee.

Exceptional terms and conditions (variations to the General Terms and Conditions)

 

29 With defect as referred to in Article 7:204 paragraph 2 of the Dutch Civil Code is also meant a defect as referred to in Article 3 of the General Terms and Conditions. With respect to all claims concerning such a defect, the Lessee will be obliged to show that it is not imputable with respect to the defect concerned.

 

30 Article 6.1 of the General Terms and Conditions: in the first sentence “will actually occupy the leased space in its entirety” shall be replaced by: “will occupy the leased space”. Background: Lessee might only occupy part of the leased space.

 

31 Article 6.1 of the General Terms and Conditions: “Lessee will ensure that the leased space has sufficient furniture and fixtures” shall be intentionally deleted.

 

32 Article 6.2 of the General Terms and Conditions: In the second sentence: “(…) that lessor has agreed to in advance and (…)” shall be intentionally deleted.

 

33 Article 6.11.2.1 to 6.11.2.5 and 6.11.2.9 of the General Terms and Conditions are intentionally deleted.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    11


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

34 Article 6.11.2.8 of the General Terms and Conditions shall be replaced by: “With respect to alterations and additions realised by or on behalf of the Lessee during the term of this Agreement that are not reversed at the end of this Agreement, the Lessee hereby waives all possible rights and claims to compensation from the Lessor for the value and /or the costs of these alterations and additions, all this in the broadest sense of the word, which is also understood to mean, although not exclusively, all rights and claims flowing from Article 6:212 of the Dutch Civil Code. This also applies to alterations and additions that are not required to be reversed as they had the approval of the Lessor or due to judicial authorization granted for this purpose.”

 

35 Parties agree to add to article 6.7.1 of the General Terms and Conditions the following phrase: “Tenant is also responsible for all notifications that are set or will be set by the authorities for the (use of the) Leased Premises, including notifications based on the Building Decree 2012 (“Bouwbesluit 2012”) and the Decree General Regulations for Establishment Environmental Control (“Besluit algemene regels voor inrichtingen milieubeheer (het Activiteitenbesluit)”).”

 

36 Article 11.3, 11.5, 11.6, 11.8 and 11.9 of the General Terms and Conditions shall be replaced by the following articles:

 

  a. The lessee is liable to the lessor for all damage and losses with respect to the leased premises, unless the lessee proves that it and the persons for whom it is responsible, are not to blame for the damage. (“ Huurder is jegens verhuurder aansprakelijk voor alle schade aan het gehuurde, tenzij huurder bewijst dat de schade hem en de personen waarvoor huurder verantwoordelijk is, niet is toe te rekenen .”)

 

  b. The lessee indemnifies the lessor for penalties imposed on the lessor as the result of the lessee’s actions or negligence. (“ Huurder vrijwaart verhuurder tegen boetes die verhuurder worden opgelegd door gedragingen of nalatigheden van huurder. ”)

 

  c. The lessor is not liable for damage or for loss of profits caused by a defect and the lessee is in case of a defect not entitled to rent reduction and set-off, except for the possibility of set-off as referred to in article 7:206 paragraph 3 of the Dutch Civil Code. (“ Verhuurder is niet aansprakelijk voor (bedrijfs)schade tengevolge van een gebrek en huurder kan in geval van een gebrek géén aanspraak maken op huurprijsvermindering en verrekening, behoudens de bevoegdheid tot verrekening als bedoeld in artikel 7:206 lid 3 Burgerlijk Wetboek. ”)

 

  d. The provisions of “a” do not apply in the following situations:

 

    If a defect is a consequence of a attributable serious shortcoming of the lessor;

 

    If the lessor knew or should have known the hidden defect at the conclusion of the lease agreement and did not any further arrangements about this defect with the lessee.

(“ d. Het gestelde in “a” is in de navolgende omstandigheden niet van toepassing:

 

    Indien een gebrek een gevolg is van een ernstig toerekenbare tekortkoming van verhuurder;

 

    Indien verhuurder een verborgen gebrek bij het aangaan van de huurovereenkomst kende of behoorde te kennen en met huurder daaromtrent geen nadere afspraken heeft gemaakt. ”)

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    12


Reference number: AB8374620

 

 

37 Insurance and Reinstatement

During the lease period, the Lessor shall, at its sole cost and expense, provide and maintain or cause to be provided and maintained (a) comprehensive general liability insurance with respect to its liability arising out of the Agreement, insuring the Lessee for loss because of bodily injury, property damage, contractual liability and personal injury with a minimum limit of EUR 2,000,000.- ( two million Euros) per occurrence, which can be achieved with any combination of primary and umbrella coverage, and (b) “all risks” property insurance: The Lessor shall insure the Leased Premises, including approved alterations not including the works mentioned in article 11, against fire and destruction in an amount equal to the full replacement value of the insured property ( opstalverzekering tegen herbouwwaarde ). The costs incurred because of this insurance are at the Lease Commencement Date euro 7,506.54 per annum and will be passed on to the Lessee and the Lessee shall pay these costs to the Lessor. Said policies shall be endorsed to provide that they shall not be cancelled by the Lessor without giving 30 (thirty) days prior written notice thereof to the Lessee. Such policies or certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the Lessee by the Lessor upon the Lease Commencement Date and upon each renewal of said insurance.

During the lease period, the Lessee shall, at its sole cost and expense, provide and maintain or cause to be provided and maintained (a) comprehensive general liability insurance with respect to its liability arising out of the Agreement, insuring the Lessee for loss because of bodily injury, property damage, contractual liability and personal injury with a minimum limit of EUR 2,000,000.- ( two million Euros) per occurrence, which can be achieved with any combination of primary and umbrella coverage, and (b) “all risks” property insurance on those of the Lessee improvements for which the Lessee has responsibility and on the Lessee’s equipment, trade fixtures, furnishings, inventory and other personal property located in or about the Leased Premises (Lessee Properties), in an amount equal to the full replacement value ( vervangingswaarde ) of the Lessee Properties. Said policies shall be endorsed to provide that they shall not be cancelled by the Lessee without giving 30 (thirty) days prior written notice thereof to the Lessor. Such certificates of insurance shall be delivered to the Lessor by the Lessee upon the Lease Commencement Date and upon each renewal of said insurance.

With the exception of any damages, losses, costs and expenses incurred as a result of the negligence of the Lessor, the Lessee will be liable and will fully compensate the Lessor for all damages, losses, costs and expenses resulting from claims by third parties for (i) injuries to any person and/or (ii) damage to, theft, misappropriation or loss of property occurring in or on Leased Premises, in either case arising from the use and occupancy of the Leased Premises or from any activity, work or anything done or permitted by the Lessee in or on the Leased Premises or due to any other act or omission of the Lessee.

If and to the extent that the Lessee is liable for any damage for which the Lessor is insured, the Lessee herewith declares and accepts that it is fully responsible and liable for the own risk ( eigen risico ) of the insured risk.

If and to the extent that the Lessor is liable for any damage for which the Lessee is insured, the Lessor herewith declares and accepts that it is fully responsible and liable for the own risk (eigen risico) of the insured risk.

Miscellaneous

 

38 This Agreement is subject to:

 

  (i) Approval of Schiphol Area Development Company for lessee to locate in Schiphol-Rijk;

 

  (ii) Lessee acquiring the all-in-one Permit for Physical Aspects (“omgevingsvergunning”) on or before April 10th 2013;

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    13


Reference number: AB8374620

 

  (iii) A for the Lessee satisfactory outcome of its due diligence including solving any issues found during the due diligence;

 

  (iv) Approval by the board of Interxion Holding N.V.;

 

  (v) Approval by the board of Prologis.

The Parties are not bound by this Agreement and bear their own costs and losses in case this clause is invoked.

 

39 The Lessor is only obliged to hand over the keys of the Leased Premises on or directly after the Lease Commencement Date and will grant the Lessee entrance to the Leased Premises after:

 

  (i) Signing of this Agreement by the Parties

 

  (ii) payment of the first rent and VAT on or before the Lease Commencement Date ;

 

  (iii) provision of the bank guarantee and parent guarantee under article 6 on or before the Lease Commencement Date;

However, prior to the Lease Commencement Date, the Lessee has a right to have access to the Leased Premises and is allowed to carry out fitting out works, however only after this Agreement has been signed by the Parties and both the bank guarantee and the parent guarantee have been issued to the Lessor.

 

40 All appendices form part of this Agreement. Amendments and/or additions to any provision under this Agreement will only apply if these amendments and/or additions are agreed upon between the Lessee and the Lessor in writing.

 

41 This Agreement, which cancels and supersedes all previous arrangements and agreements between the Lessor and the Lessee regarding the leasing of the Leased Premises, constitutes the entire agreement between the Parties.

 

42 This Agreement is subject to Dutch law. The civil court Noord Holland, location Haarlem will have exclusive jurisdiction to settle any disputes arising from or related to this Agreement. The Parties furthermore agree that English words used to describe Dutch legal concepts are intended to describe such legal concepts only and the (legal) consequences of those words under English law or any other foreign law, if any, shall be disregarded.

 

43 The Lessee explicitly chooses domicile at the Leased Premises in respect of all matters regarding this Agreement and all legal proceedings arising from this Agreement. The Lessor explicitly chooses domicile at 115 Schiphol Boulevard, (1118 BG) Schiphol, The Netherlands, in respect of all matters regarding this Agreement and all legal proceedings arising from this Agreement.

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    14


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Thus drawn up and signed in Schiphol-Rijk in triplicate

 

   

15 April, 2013

 

   

 

ProLogis Netherlands VII Sarl    

Interxion Nederland B.V.

By G.A. Gregory     By M. v.d. Assem
Authorised Representative     Authorised Representative
(signature of the Lessor)     (signature of the Lessee)

 

 

   
Interxion Holding N.V.    
By D.C. Ruberg    
Authorised Representative    
(signature of the Parent)    

Appendices:

 

1. Plan of the Site

 

2. Drawings of the Leased Premises

 

3. Outline Specifications

 

4. Calculation of net lettable square meters NEN 2580

 

5. Delivery Statement ( proces verbaal van oplevering ) – to be provided by the Lessor

 

6. General Terms and Conditions in Dutch and in English

 

7. Bank guarantee – to be provided by the Lessee

 

8. Model bank guarantee

 

9. Environmental review – to be provided by the Lessor

 

10. Drawings of the changes of the Lessee

 

11. Requirements of the roof

 

12. List of works to be executed by the Lessor / the Works

 

13. Triple Net Supplier & Services

 

14. Certification and proof of annual maintenance of the K14 sprinkler

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    15


Reference number: AB8374620

 

Separate signature of the Lessor and the Lessee for the receipt of its own copy of the General Terms and Conditions

 

  Signature the Lessee:

 

  Signature of the Lessor:

 

  Signature of the Parent:

 

Initials Lessee: MvdA  Initials Parent: DR  Initials Lessor: GAG    16

Exhibit 4.27

Lease Agreement among InterXion España, S.A.U. and Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. dated July 5, 2013.

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

 

En Madrid, a 5 de julio de 2013

 

  

TRANSLATION FOR INFORMATIVE

PURPOSES

 

In Madrid, on July 5, 2013

 

 

CONTRATO DE

ARRENDAMIENTO

 

DE LA PROPIEDAD SITA EN

CALLE EMILIO MUÑOZ 49-51

 

  

 

LEASE AGREEMENT

 

LEASE OF THE PROPERTY

LOCATED AT CALLE EMILIO

MUÑOZ 49-51

 

Reunidos,

 

DE UNA PARTE, Interxion España, S.A.U. , con domicilio legal en Calle Albasanz 71, 28037 Madrid, y CIF A-82517731 y representada por D. Robert J.M. Assink, en calidad de Administrador Solidario (en adelante “Arrendatario” )

 

Don Robertus Johannes Michael Assink con Tarjeta de Residencia en España N.I.E. Nº X-1589529-E, interviene en su calidad de Administrador Solidario en nombre y representación de INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U, con CIF A-82517731 , en virtud de escritura autorizada por el Notario de Madrid Don Carlos Pérez Baudín en fecha 18 de mayo de 2010, con protocolo nº 1.125 domiciliada en la Calle Albasanz, Nº71, 28037 Madrid, sociedad inscrita en el Registro Mercantil de Madrid, al Tomo 14.952 , Libro 0 , Folio 161 , Sección , Hoja M-249071 , Inscripción (15-06-2010),. En adelante, el “ Arrendatario ”.

 

y,

 

DE OTRA PARTE, Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. , con domicilio social en Madrid 28016, Avda. Pio XII, 44, bajo derecha, con CIF.: A-28122299, representada para este acto por D. Agustín Torrego Casado en calidad de Presidente del Consejo de Administración (en adelante, “Arrendador” ).

  

By and between,

 

ON THE ONE HAND, Interxion España, S.A.U. , with registered address at Calle Albasanz 71, 28037 Madrid, with Tax Identification Number A-82517731 and represented by Mr. Robert J.M. Assink, in his capacity as Joint Director (hereinafter “Lessee” )

 

Mr. Robertus Johannes Michael Assink with Green Card in Spain and foreign identification number (N.I.E) number X-1589529-E, acts in his capacity as Joint and Several Director in representation and on behalf of INTERXION ESPAÑA, S.A.U, with tax identification number A-82517731 , by virtue of a public deed granted by the Notary from Madrid Mr. Carlos Pérez Baudín on date 18 th May 2010 with registry number 1.125 of the abovementioned Notary, and with registered offices in Calle Albasanz, Nº71, 28037 Madrid, registered at the Commercial Registry of Madrid, Volume 14952 , Book 0 , Page 161 , Section 8 , Sheet M-249071 Entry 7 (15-06-2010). Hereinafter, the “Lessee” .

 

and,

 

ON THE OTHER HAND, Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A. , with corporate address at Avda. Pio XII, 44, bajo derecha, Madrid 28016 with Tax Identification Number A-28122299, represented in this act by Mr. Agustín Torrego Casado in his capacity as Chairman of the Board of Directors (hereinafter “Lessor” ).

 

Page 1 of 8


Don Agustín Torrego Casado con DNI. Nº 260.157-g, interviene en su calidad de Presidente del Consejo de Administración y consejero delegado solidario de la sociedad Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A., para este acto en virtud de escritura autorizada por el Notario de Madrid Don Juan Pérez Hereza en fecha 8 de junio de 2010, con protocolo Nº 846, sociedad inscrita en el Registro Mercantil de Madrid, al Tomo 6572, Libro 0, Folio 99, Hoja M-106.965, Inscripción 16ª. En adelante, el “Arrendador” .

 

De aquí en adelante, al Arrendador y Arrendatario se les denominará la “Parte” individualmente, y las “Partes” , colectivamente.

 

AMBAS PARTES, convienen en manifestar lo siguiente:

  

Mr. Agustín Torrego Casado with DNI number 260.157-g, acts in his capacity as Chairman of the Board of Directors and CEO of Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A., by virtue of a power of attorney granted by the Notary from Madrid Mr. Juan Pérez Hereza on date 8th June 2010 with registry number 846 of the abovementioned Notary, registered at the Commercial Registry of Madrid, Volume 6572, Book 0, Page 99, Sheet M-106.965, Entry 16 th , hereinafter, the “Lessor” .

 

Hereinafter, Lessee and Lessor shall be referred to individually as the “Party” , and collectively as the

“Parties” .

 

BOTH PARTIES agree to state the following:

 

EXPONEN

 

  

 

THEY DECLARE

 

(I)     Con fecha 27 de febrero de 2012, las Partes firmaron un contrato de arrendamiento sobre las fincas 334, 10244, 19322, 19324, 19326 y 19328 inscritas en el Registro de la Propiedad nº 17 de Madrid, sitas en la calle Emilio Muñoz número 49, de Madrid, contrato que ambas partes manifiestan conocer en todos sus términos y cláusulas, en adelante el “Contrato de Arrendamiento”

 

(II)   En el mencionado Contrato de Arrendamiento, cláusula cuarta, “fecha de inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento”, se establecía como fecha de inicio de la relación arrendaticia la de 1 de julio de 2013.

 

(III)  Por causas no imputables a la parte Arrendadora, la Arrendataria ha solicitado al Arrendador la modificación y retraso de la Fecha de Inicio, que quedará fijada en la fecha de 1 de julio de 2014.

  

(I)     On February 27th, 2012, the Parties entered into a lease agreement over the plots 334, 10244, 19322, 19324, 19326 and 19328, registered at the Land Registry of Madrid number 17, located at calle Emilio Muñoz number 49, de Madrid both parties state to acknowledge all the terms and conditions of the agreement, hereinafter “Lease Agreement”.

 

(II)   Under clause four of the above mentioned Lease Agreement “Commencement date of the Lease Agreement”, the commencement date of the Lease Agreement was settled on July 1 st , 2013.

 

(III)  For reasons not attributable to the Lessor, the Lessee has requested to the Lessor the amendment and delay of the Commencement Date, which shall be settled on July 1 st , 2014

 

Page 2 of 8


(IV) Que la parte Arrendadora acepta la modificación y retraso de la Fecha de Inicio solicitada, siempre que la parte Arrendataria asuma las obligaciones que de común acuerdo pactan ambas Partes en el presente Anexo.

 

  

(IV) The Lessor accepts the amendment and delay of the Commencement Date requested, provided that the Lessee undertakes the obligations agreed between by both Parties under the present Annex.

CLÁUSULA

 

   CLAUSES

PRIMERO.- Ambas Partes convienen que la Fecha de Inicio del referido Contrato de Arrendamiento será el 1 de julio de 2014.

Por lo tanto, queda modificada la cláusula cuarta del Contrato de Arrendamiento que queda redactado de la siguiente manera:

 

4.-Fecha de Inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento

 

La Fecha de Inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento (“Fecha de Inicio”) será el 1 de julio de 2014, en la cual el Arrendatario tomará posesión del inmueble.

 

El Arrendatario podría solicitar iniciar el Contrato antes, sujeto a un preaviso escrito de 3 meses. Esta fecha alternativa será entre tres (3) meses después de firmar el Acuerdo Base y el 1 de julio de 2014. En este caso, el Arrendador tiene la obligación de dar la posesión al Arrendatario tres meses después de recibir la notificación escrita.

 

Para dicha fecha, el Arrendador deberá ostentar la pacífica y libre posesión de la Propiedad, y la Propiedad deberá estar libre de cualquier carga, gravamen, Arrendatario, etc. En caso contrario el presente Arrendamiento no entrará en vigor.”

 

  

FIRST. - Both Parties agree that the Commencement Date of the Lease Agreement will be July 1 st , 2014.

 

Therefore, clause four shall be amended, and reads as follows:

 

4.- Commencement date of the Lease Agreement

 

The commencement date of the Lease Agreement (“Commencement Date “) will be, 1 st July 2014 on which date, the Lessee may take possession of the Property.

 

The Lessee may request to commence the Lease Agreement before, subject to 3 months prior written notice. This alternative date can take place, as from three (3) months after signing the Head Terms until the 1 st of July 2014. In such a case, The Lessor shall be obliged to give possession of the Property to the Lessee three months after the receipt of the written notice.

 

By such date, the Lessor must hold the free and pacific possession of the Property, and the Property will have to be free of any charge, lien, encumbrance, tenant, etc. Otherwise, the Lease Agreement shall not enter into force.”

SEGUNDO.- En consecuencia, y al haberse modificado la Fecha de Inicio, quedan modificadas todas las cláusulas del Contrato de Arrendamiento en las que se toma como fecha para el cumplimiento de los derechos y    SECOND. - Given the fact that the Commencement Date has been amended, all the clauses of the Lease Agreement referring to the Commencement Date as the date to be taken into account for the compliance of rights and obligations

 

Page 3 of 8


obligaciones de las partes la “Fecha de Inicio”, que desde el presente momento será la indicada de 1 de julio de 2014.

 

De conformidad con la modificación de la Fecha de Inicio del Contrato, se acuerda modificar las siguientes cláusulas del Contrato de Arrendamiento, que quedarán redactadas de la siguiente manera:

 

10.- Garantía Bancaria

 

El Arrendatario entregará al Arrendador una garantía bancaria, con los ajustes razonables realizados por el Arrendatario conforme al Anexo III, por una cantidad de tres (3) meses de renta + IVA, no más tarde del 1 de enero de 2014. Esta garantía bancaria deberá ser emitida por una institución bancaria registrada en España. La garantía deberá de actualizarse cada cinco años, con arreglo al importe de la renta vigente en cada fecha de actualización.”

 

11.2.- Primer Pago

 

Sin perjuicio de que la Fecha de Inicio haya sido fijada el 1 de julio de 2014, el Arrendatario pagará la renta mensual, de conformidad con lo establecido en la cláusula 8, desde el 1 de enero de 2014. Desde el 1 de enero de 2014 hasta 1 de julio de 2014, el Arrendatario abonará a la renta estipulada en la Cláusula Quinta del Contrato de Arrendamiento, “Precio del Alquiler”, en concepto de reserva de alquiler”.

 

13. Condición Resolutoria

 

El Arrendamiento comenzará como muy tarde el 1 de julio de 2014, no obstante serán condiciones resolutorias del mismo las siguientes:

 

1.      No obtención de la licencia de obras para la construcción de un centro de datos en las Nuevas Instalaciones.

 

2.      En el caso de obtenerse la anterior licencia de obras, será condición resolutoria la no obtención por parte del Ayuntamiento de la licencia de actividad o equivalente para iniciar y ejecutar la actividad.

  

undertaken by the Parties are amended accordingly, being the Commencement Date up from now settled on July 1 st , 2014.

 

In accordance with the amendment of the Commencement Date the amendment of the following clauses of the Lease Agreement is agreed,

 

10.- Bank Guarantee

 

The Lessee will provide the Lessor with a written bank guarantee model with reasonable adjustments done by the Lessee as attached in Annex III for an amount of three (3) months rent + VAT, not later than January 1 st , 2014. This bank guarantee must be provided by a banking institution registered in Spain. This guarantee must be updated every five years according to the amount of the updated Rent in force by each updating date.

 

11.2.- First Payment

 

Despite the amendment of the Commencement Date, settled on July 1 st , 2014, the Lessee shall pay the rent, in accordance with the provisions of clause 8, from January 1 st , 2014. From January 1 st 2014 to July 1 st , 2014, the Lessee shall pay the rent stipulated in Clause Five of the Lease Agreement, “Rental Price”, as a rental reserve.

 

13.- Condition Subsequent

 

The Lease will begin, at the latest, on July 1st, 2014. However, the Lease Agreement will be subject to the following conditions subsequent:

 

1.      Not obtaining the planning permission ( Licencia de Obra y Licencia de Actividad ) to locate a data center in the New Premises.

 

2.      In case of obtaining the above referred planning permission, the contract can be terminated if the Municipality of Madrid does not approve the license to commence and execute the activity ( Licencia de Actividad o equivalente ).

 

Page 4 of 8


En el caso de no obtener alguna de las mencionadas licencias requeridas para iniciar la actividad del negocio del Arrendatario, solo se puede resolver el Contrato si las autoridades municipales (o en su caso, el organismo público que pueda sustituir a las autoridades municipales en dichas competencias en el futuro), deniegan el otorgamiento de cualquiera de las 2 licencias.”

 

Las Partes acuerdan mantener todos los derechos que se les reconoce en la cláusula 11.8, “cesión”, si bien los mismos quedarán ampliados en seis meses desde el inicialmente previsto.

 

  

In the event of not obtaining any of the requested mentioned licenses to commence and execute the activity of the Lessee, the Lease Agreement may only be terminated if the City Council authorities (or, where appropriate, the competent authority which can replace the City Council in such competences in the future), deny the granting of any of the 2 licenses.

 

The Parties agree to maintain all the rights that are recognized under clause 11.8, “assignment”, but the latter shall be extended six months as from those initially foreseen.

 

TERCERO.- La modificación de la Fecha de Inicio acordada en este Anexo queda condicionada a que el Arrendatario asuma, mediante la firma del presente Anexo, las siguientes obligaciones a fecha 1 de julio de 2013:

 

El Arrendatario asume desde el 1 de julio de 2013 hasta la fecha de toma de posesión prevista para el 1 de julio de 2014, los gastos de seguridad y custodia del edificio y sus instalaciones durante el periodo que media desde 1 de julio de 2013 y el 1 de julio de 2014. A tal efecto, la Arrendataria firmará el correspondiente contrato de seguridad con One Servicios Delegados, SL u otra empresa similar. Copia del referido contrato será remitida al Arrendador en garantía del cumplimiento de lo estipulado en esta cláusula.

 

El Arrendatario asume desde la fecha de 1 de julio de 2013, todos los impuestos y tasas determinados en la cláusula nueve, (impuestos y tasas), en la parte proporcional que corresponda al ejercicio 2013.

 

El Arrendatario asume desde la indicada fecha de 1 de julio de 2013, los gastos relativos a seguros en los términos establecidos en la cláusula 11.13, “seguros de la propiedad”.

  

 

THIRD.- The amendment of the Commencement Date agreed in this Annex, is subject to the condition that the Lessee undertakes, by signing this Annex, the following obligations on July 1 st , 2013:

 

1 st The Lessee undertakes from July 1 st , 2013 until the date of the transfer of the possession scheduled for July 1, 2014, the cost of security and custody of the building and its facilities from July 1 st , 2013 to July 1 st , 2014. To this end, the Lessee will sign the correspondent security contract with One Servicios Delegados, SL or other similar company.

 

A copy of such security contract will be submitted to the Lessor as a guarantee of the compliance of the content of this clause.

 

2 nd The Lessee undertakes, from July 1 st , 2013, all taxes and fees described in clause nine (taxes and tax rates), in the proportional portion that corresponds to the year 2013.

 

3rd Lessee undertakes from July 1, 2013, those expenses relating to insurance as set forth in section 11.13, “insurance of the property”.

 

Page 5 of 8


También asume los gastos derivados de los distintos servicios de la finca (luz, agua, gas, etc.) así como las reparaciones necesarias para mantenimiento de la estabilidad y edificabilidad de las fincas.

 

Los gastos enumerados en los puntos 1º, 2º, y 3º, anteriores o cualquier otro incurrido por el Arrendador y que corresponda conforme a lo dispuesto en el Contrato de Arrendamiento, al Arrendatario se facturará inmediatamente. El Arrendatario tendrá un plazo de treinta días para su abono, a contar desde la recepción de la factura.

 

El Arrendatario se compromete a pagar desde 1 de enero de 2014 hasta 1 de julio de 2014 la renta estipulada en la Cláusula Quinta del Contrato de Arrendamiento, “Precio del Alquiler”, en concepto de reserva de alquiler. Dichas cantidades no son compensables, ni asimilables con las rentas que se generen a partir del 1 de julio de 2014, y quedarán en beneficio del Arrendador como compensación por la modificación de la Fecha de Inicio del Contrato de Arrendamiento.

 

El Arrendatario se compromete antes del 1 de enero de 2014 a aportar al Arrendador el importe de la garantía bancaria, en los términos establecidos en la cláusula 10 del Contrato de Arrendamiento.

  

It also undertakes the costs of the various plot services (electricity, water, gas, etc..) and those necessary repairs to maintain the stability and constructability of the plots.

 

4 th The expenses listed under points 1, 2, and 3, above, or any other incurred by Lessor and attributable, under the provisions of the Lease Agreement, to the Lessee will be invoiced immediately. The Lessee shall pay the invoices within thirty days as from the receipt of said invoices.

 

5 th The Lessee agrees to pay from January 1 st , 2014 to July 1 st , 2014 the rent foreseen under Clause Five of the Lease Agreement, “Rental Price”, as a rental reserve. These amounts may not be offset, nor assimilated to the rents to be arising as from July 1 st , 2014, and will be for the benefit of Lessor as a compensation for the amendment of the Commencement Date of the Lease Agreement.

 

6 th The Lessee undertakes, before January 1 st , 2014, to provide to the Lessor the amount of the bank guarantee, in the terms set out in clause 10 of the Lease Agreement.

 

CUARTO.- La parte arrendataria, manifiesta y reconoce en el presente documento, que el inmueble objeto de arrendamiento, tras la correspondiente comprobación de su estado, se encuentra a su entera satisfacción, no habiéndose producido modificación sustancial del estado en que se encontraba al firmar el Contrato de Arrendamiento de referencia y exonera de responsabilidad a la Arrendadora por cualquier modificación de su estado desde el 1 de julio de 2013 hasta el 1 de julio de 2014.

 

La Parte Arrendataria asume las posibles causas o consecuencias que pudieran afectar a las obras que se ha comprometido a realizar, derivados de los cambios de normativa que se puedan producir como consecuencia de la modificación de la Fecha de Inicio.

  

 

FOURTH.- The Lessee, expressly recognizes herein, that the leased property, after proper verification of its condition, is of its satisfaction There has been no substantial change in the condition since the signature of the Lease Agreement and the Lessee exonerates the Lessor from any liability derived from changes in the condition of the property occurring from July 1 st , 2013 until July 1 st , 2014.

 

The Lessee assumes the possible causes or consequences that may affect the work that has been undertaken to make, arising from regulatory changes that may occur as a result of the modification of the Commencement Date.

 

Page 6 of 8


La Parte arrendataria exonera a la parte Arrendadora de cualquier daño que se produzca en La Propiedad a terceros, tanto en los bienes como en las personas, durante el plazo comprendido entre el 1 de julio de 2013 y el 1 de julio de 2014, los cuales serán directamente asumidos por la arrendataria, en caso de no estar cubiertos por los correspondientes seguros.

 

La parte arrendataria no podrá alegar desde el 1 de Enero de 2013 a 1 de Enero de 2014, como causa de resolución del Contrato de Arrendamiento la falta de toma de posesión salvo que el Arrendador a partir del 1 de julio de 2013 obrara con mala fe o negligencia.

  

The Lessee exonerates the Lessor from any damage occurring in the Plot to third parties, both in goods and/or in people, from July 1 st , 2013 to July 1 st , 2014, which will be directly assumed by the Lessee, in case that it is not covered by the corresponding insurance policies.

 

From July, 1 st 2013 to July the 1 st 2014, the Lessee shall not assert as grounds for termination of the Lease Agreement the non-possession of the plot, unless the Lessor acts on a bad faith or negligence basis as from July 1, 2013.

 

QUINTO.- La renta será actualizada en la forma prevista en la cláusula siete del Contrato de Arrendamiento, “Modificaciones de Renta”, , tomando como base el incremento producido en el IPC entre las fechas de 28 de noviembre de 2011 y 28 de noviembre de 2012. Este incremento se aplicará sobre la renta inicial pactada en la Cláusula Cinco, “Precio del Alquiler”, esto es, [ *** ]€ anuales.

 

Conforme a lo anterior, la primera actualización de renta tomará como índices a comparar los correspondientes a los meses de noviembre de 2011 y 2012, la diferencia así obtenida establece un porcentaje de actualización según el INE del 2,9%, por lo que la primera actualización de renta se fija en [***] Euros ([***] Euros mensuales), renta que se tomará como base para la siguiente actualización, que tendrá lugar en el mes de noviembre de 2013, y que determinará la renta a pagar desde o a partir del mes de enero de 2014.

 

Las sucesivas rentas se actualizarán a fecha de noviembre de cada año. La siguiente tendrá lugar en el mes de noviembre de 2014 y así sucesivamente, surtiendo efecto en la mensualidad siguiente de enero.

  

 

FIFTH.- The rent will be updated as agreed under clause seven of the Lease Agreement, “Adjustment of Rent”, based on the increase of the CPI between November 28 th , 2011 and November 28 th , 2012. This increase will be applicable to the initial rent agreed under Clause Five, “Rental Price”, i.e. €[***] annually.

 

According to the above, the first update of the rent will be done referred to the index correspondent to the months of November 2011 and 2012, the difference obtained provides an updating of 2.9% according to the INE, so that the first update rent is set at [ *** ] Euros ([ *** ] Euros monthly rental). This rent will be the reference for the next update, which will take place on November 2013, and will determine the rent payable as of the month of January 2014 and forward.

 

The following rents will be updated on November of each year. The next one will take place on November 2014 and so on, being effective the following January monthly rental.

 

Page 7 of 8


SEXTA. El Contrato de Arrendamiento permanecerá en vigor en todo lo no expresamente modificado por el presente Anexo.    SIXTH. The Lease Agreement will remain in force in all its contents unless for those clauses expressly modified under the present Annex.

 

Y en prueba de conformidad firman el presente documento en doble ejemplar en Madrid, a 5 julio de 2013.

  

 

And in witness whereof, they sign two copies of this document in Madrid on July 5, 2013.

 

Firma

Por Interxion España, S.A.

 

D. Robert J.M. Assink

Administrador Solidario

  

 

Signature

On behalf of Interxion España, S.A.

 

Mr. Robert J.M. Assink

Joint Administrator

 

Firma

Por Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A

 

D. Agustín Torrego Casado

Presidente del Consejo y Consejero Delegado

  

 

Signature

On behalf of Edificios Alsina Sur, S.A.

 

Mr. Agustín Torrego Casado

Chairman of the Board and Chief Executive

 

Page 8 of 8

Exhibit 4.28

Lease Agreement between InterXion Deutschland GmbH and Union Investment Real Estate GmbH dated August 2, 2013.

* * *Confidential material has been omitted and filed separately with the Commission

Union Investment

ANNEX No. 19

to the lease dated 29 January / 5 February 1999

and Annex 1 dated 21 May 1999

and Annex 2 dated 14 / 28 May 1999

and Annex 3 dated 1 October / 18 October 1999

and declaration of acceptance dated 23 November 1999

and Annex 4 dated 11 September 2000

and Annex 5 dated 11 January / 11 September 2000

and Annex 6 (undated)

and Annex 7 dated 27 October / 11 December 2000

and Annex 8 dated 20 / 24 March 2003

and Annex 9 dated 16 / 18 October 2006

and Annex 10 dated 29 March / 3 April 2007

and Annex 11 dated 21 December 2007

and Annex 12 dated 11 June / 16 June 2008

and Annex 13 dated 29 May / 16 June 2009

and Annex 14 dated 28 July 2009

and Annex 15 dated 2 December / 4 December 2009

and Annex 16 dated 19 May / 25 May 2011

and Annex 17 dated 2 September / 6 September 2011

and Annex 18 dated 16 February / 20 February 2012

between

Interxion Deutschland GmbH

Hanauer Landstrasse 298, 60314 Frankfurt

Tax no. 045 236381 19

represented by Mr Peter Knapp, Managing Director with sole power of representation

- hereinafter referred to as the “ lessee ” -

and

Union Investment Real Estate GmbH, Valentinskamp 70 / EMPORIO, 20355 Hamburg

Tax no. 27/144/00080

represented by:

Mr Joachim Schönwandt, Group Manager, Asset Management Deutschland, northern estate, and Mr Dominic Moll, Departmental Manager, Asset Management Deutschland

- hereinafter referred to as the “ lessor ” –

[as at 2 August 2013]

Contract number: 1187.V0000010

(Please quote in all correspondence and payments)

Property: Frankfurt, Hanauer Landstrasse 296-326

Genossenschaftliche FinanzGruppe Volksbanken Raiffeisenbanken

Union Investment Real Estate GmbH • Valentinskamp 70 / EMPORIO, 20355 Hamburg • Postfach 30 11 99, 20304 Hamburg

Tel. no.: +49-40-34919-0 • Fax no.: +49-40-34919-4191 • e-mail: service@union-investment.de • Website: www.union-investment.de: Company registration no. HRB 110793 at Hamburg District Court

Board of management: Dr. Reinhard Kutscher (Chairman), Dr. Heiko Beck, Dr. Frank Billand, Volker Noack

Chairman of the Supervisory Board: Jens Wilhelm

 

Page 1 of 11


Preliminary remarks

The lessee and lessor concluded a lease on 29 January / 5 February 1999 and Annexes 1-18 for office and service premises, indoor floor space and parking spaces at property 1187, Frankfurt Business Park, Hanauer Landstrasse.

In addition to the office, service and indoor premises already leased, the lessor wishes to lease further office and indoor space in building sections G1 and G2, located at Weismüllerstrasse 25 and 27, with effect from 15 August 2013. The lessee intends to establish a further computer centre in the office and indoor space in building sections G1 and G2, Weismüllerstrasse 25 and 27.

The contracting parties also agree that the lessee will be entitled to return the office premises in building section B6 at Hanauer Landstrasse 316 under the existing lease and Annexes 1 to 18 to the lessor, with 12 months, commencing on 15 August 2013.

For this reason, the parties agree the following, with reference to the lease:

§1

Leased property

 

(1) From 15 August 2013, the lessee will lease the following additional premises, the location of which can be seen on the attached plans (with the exception of a proportion of the communal areas) appended as

ANNEXES 1.1 to 1.3

 

1.    Indoor space in building section G1, Weismüllerstrasse 27, including a proportion of the communal areas,    Ground floor    Approx. 472.03 m 2
2.    Indoor space in building section G2, Weismüllerstrasse 25, including a proportion of the communal areas    Ground floor    Approx. 529.49 m 2
3.    Office premises in building section G1, Weismüllerstrasse 27, ground and first floors, including a proportion of the communal areas    Ground floor    Approx. 144.13 m 2
4.    Office premises in building section G2, Weismüllerstrasse 27, ground and first floors, including a proportion of the communal areas    Ground floor    Approx. 176.72 m 2
5.    Office premises in building section G2, Weismüllerstrasse 27, ground and first floors, including a proportion of the communal areas    First floor    Approx. 386.62 m 2
6.    Service areas in building section G1, Weismüllerstrasse 27, including a proportion of the communal areas    Ground floor    Approx. 181.00 m 2
7.    Service areas in building section G2, Weismüllerstrasse 27, including a proportion of the communal areas    Ground floor    Approx. 142.36 m 2
8.    Outdoor parking spaces nos. 28, 29, 58, 59, 62 and 63       6

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 2 of 11


(2) The additional leased premises and parking spaces listed in paragraph (1) will be transferred in their current condition familiar to the lessee. A reciprocal certificate will be issued at the transfer inspection. Should the transfer certificate not record any shortcomings or corrective work as being required on the leased premises, the lessee will acknowledge the condition of the rented premises as corresponding to the lease upon signature of the transfer certificate. Hidden defects will be excepted.

§2

Term of the lease / Option to extend the lease

The office, service and indoor premises and the parking spaces listed in §1(1) above will be continuously leased from 15 August 2013 to 31 December 2024.

§3

Rent

 

(1) The rent for all the leased premises will comprise the following from 15 August 2013 :

 

1.    472.03    m 2    Indoor space in building section G1 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
2.    529.49    m 2    Indoor space in building section G2 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
3.    144.13    m 2    Office premises in building section G1 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
4.    176.72    m 2    Office premises in building section G1 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
5.    386.62    m 2    Office premises in building section G2 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
6.    181.00    m 2    Service areas in building section G1 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
7.    142.36    m 2    Service areas in building section G2 including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
8.    5,582.52    m 2    Service areas including a proportion of the communal areas @ €[***]    = €    [***]
9.    11,668.82    m 2    Indoor space @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
10.    337.50    m 2    Service premises in building section D6 @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
11.    6       Parking spaces @ €[***]    = €    [***]

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 3 of 11


12.    1       Parking space @ €[***]    = €    [***]
13.    31       Outdoor parking spaces @ €[***]/each    = €    [***]
14.    30       Covered parking spaces @ €[***]/each    = €    [***]
           

 

  

 

15.          Net rent    = €    [***]
16.    6.289,99    m 2    Prepayment of overheads and heating costs for office premises @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
17.    13,331.20    m 2    Prepayment of overheads for indoor and service areas @ €[***]/m 2    = €    [***]
           

 

  

 

18.          Subtotal    = €    [***]
19.          plus statutory VAT (currently 19%)    = €    [***]
20.          Total monthly rent =    =    [ *** ]
           

 

  

 

The net rent agreed under paragraph (1) nos. 3 to 5 will be adjusted as follows in the second and third year of the lease for the office premises listed:

144.13 m 2 office premises in building section G1

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the second year of the lease, i.e. with effect from 1 September 2014;

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the third year of the lease, i.e. with effect from 1 September 2015

176.72 m 2 office premises in building section G2

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the second year of the lease, with effect from 1 September 2014.

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the third year of the lease, i.e. with effect from 1 September 2015.

386.62 m 2 office premises in building section G2

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the second year of the lease, i.e. with effect from 1 September 2014.

To €[***]/m 2 , i.e. to €[***] in the third year of the lease, i.e. with effect from 1 September 2015.

 

(2) The lessee is exempt from payment of the net rent for the office premises listed under §1(1), nos. 1 to 7, from 15 August 2013 to 15 January 2014. However, the lessee will be liable for the costs of overheads and heating, and the rent for the remaining leased space and parking spaces, plus the statutory VAT, during the exemption period.

 

(3) The value guarantee clause agreed between the parties in the lease will remain unaffected and will also apply in full to the additional premises leased under this Annex. The most recent index adjustment will apply to the value adjustment of the rent.

 

(4) Notwithstanding paragraph (3), the first index adjustment for the office premises listed under §1(1), nos. 3 to 5 of this Annex no. 19 will not be applied until 15 August 2016.

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 4 of 11


§4

Extension / alteration / restoration of leased premises

Under Annex no. 19, the lessee will be responsible for extension of the newly-leased office and indoor floor space at its own expense and risk, in close consultation with the lessor. The lessee will be responsible for draft planning of the internal fixtures and fittings of the indoor floor space, outdoor areas and the surface of the roof, and will submit relevant documents to the lessor.

The lessee will also be responsible for obtaining any planning permission, at its own expense and risk. The lessee will bear sole responsibility for the technical and financial suitability of the leased premises for the purpose for which they are leased.

The extension work and the erection of the planned additional structures, particularly on the office, service and indoor floor space in building sections G1 and G2, Weismüllerstrasse 25 and 27, are subject to the following requirements:

 

  The lessee must carry out the alterations and additions to the building at its own risk and expense.

 

  Outstanding applications for planning permission must be submitted to and agreed with the lessor before submission to the planning authority. Changes to the external appearance will require the express written approval of the lessor.

 

  The extension measures carried out by and at the expense of the lessee involve technical installations on the existing flat roof. The existing roof must be strengthened for erection of the structures, the surface of the roof made load-bearing and accessible for maintenance purposes, and the plant integrated into the lightning conductor system of the building. The lessee will assume the maintenance of and the maintenance obligation for roof penetration occasioned by its installations and structures, at its own expense.

 

  The lessee will assume the maintenance obligation for its fixtures and fittings, at its own expense.

 

  Working drawings must always be made available to the lessor in good time, before work commences, for information and approval.

 

  Completion of building work must be notified to the lessor in writing for each section of the building for the purpose of joint inspection of proper implementation.

As-built documentation of the conversions and additions must be made available to the lessor in digital form, immediately after completion.

The lessee undertakes to return the leased property to its original state at the end of the lease, by agreement with the lessor. The lessee will bear the costs of the above restoration obligation.

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 5 of 11


The interests of the other lessees of the property must be treated with the greatest possible consideration during building work. Should the other lessees be affected during the building work and should claims be made as a result, Interxion Deutschland GmbH will bear responsibility for direct negotiation and making a fair settlement, if the claims are justified. The lessee will indemnify the lessor against any claims whatsoever in this respect. A separate agreement must be made with the lessor on the areas required for the storage of building materials or parking construction plant.

§5

Indemnification clause and lessees in building sections G1, F1 and F2

 

(1) Interxion Deutschland GmbH undertakes to compensate the lessor and the latter’s lessees for any losses incurred due to the building work in building sections G1 and G2 and to rectify impairments or damage which are also attributable to the building work specified under §4 immediately, at its own expense. This also applies expressly to any soiling of the facades and the external areas of the lessor’s building.

 

(2) Should third parties (other lessees and their business partners) in the Hanauer Landstrasse business park be affected by the lessee’s building work in the areas around building sections G1 and G2 because the access to their leased premises or parking spaces are located in this area, Interxion Deutschland GmbH will ensure from the outset that access to these leased areas and parking spaces remains unimpeded, at its own expense. Interxion Deutschland GmbH must also ensure that the upgrading work to be carried out, particularly the extension of the fence, is agreed mutually with the lessor’s affected lessees in the Hanauer Landstrasse business park in building sections G1, F1 and F2, specifically the lessors “Uni Elektro,” “R&M” and “Infuracom”

§6

Condition precedent

The validity of this annex is subject to the condition precedent that a legally effective termination agreement be concluded by 14 August 2013 with the existing lessees of the rented premises and parking spaces listed under §1(1)(1) to (7).

§7

Return of parts of the leased property

The lessee will be entitled to return the rented office premises on the first floor of building section B6, Hanauer Landstrasse 316 to the lessor, in a completely empty, clean state, within a period of 12 months from 15 August 2013, insofar as the condition under §8 1 of this annex has arisen.

 

1   Translator’s note: Since §8 consists of “Other agreements”, it is possible that §6 (“Condition precedent”) was meant.

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 6 of 11


§8

Other agreements

All the other provisions of the lease dated 29 January / 5 February 1999 and Annexes 1 to 19 which have not been amended by this Annex 19 remain unaffected.

The parties are aware of the statutory requirement for the written form. They mutually undertake to take any action and make any declarations which may be required to satisfy the requirement for the written form, particularly in connection with conclusion of this Annex 19 and further Annexes, and not to cancel the lease prematurely in the meantime by invoking a failure to comply with the requirement for the written form.

Should one or more of the provisions of this Annex be or become ineffective for any reason, the validity of the remaining provisions of the Annex will remain unaffected. In such a case, the parties must conclude an effective agreement which reflects the economic intent of the invalid provisions as closely as possible.

 

ANNEXES 1.1 to 1.3   below form a constituent part of this Annex 19.
ANNEX 1.1 to 1.3   Plans of the office, indoor floor space and service areas in building sections G1 and G2
ANNEX 2   Parking spaces

 

Hamburg, 9 August 2013     Frankfurt, 5 August 2013
Union Investment Real Estate GmbH     Interxion Deutschland GmbH
Union Investment Real Estate GmbH    

Postfach 30 11 99

20304 Hamburg

   

Valentinskamp 70 / EMPORIO

20355 Hamburg

   

[signed]

   

[signed]

(Joachim Schönwandt / Dominik Moll)     (Peter Knapp)
    Interxion Deutschland GmbH
   

Hanauer Landstr. 298

60314 Frankfurt/Main

Tel.     +49-69-401470

Fax     +49-69-40147199

E-mail care@interxion.com

www.interxion.com

Names in block letters

 

Schönwandt / Moll

   

Knapp

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 7 of 11


The lessee Interxion Deutschland GmbH will be bound by the quotation made on signature of the above Annex on conclusion hereof until 31 August 2013. The acceptance period will be deemed to have been observed if the countersigned Annex (declaration of acceptance) is mailed during this period. The date of the postmark will be deemed binding.

 

Frankfurt, (date:) 5 August 2013

[signed]

(Peter Knapp)

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 8 of 11


ANNEX 1.1

LOGO

Ground floor, building sections G1 and G2

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 9 of 11


ANNEX 1.2

LOGO

First floor, building sections G1 and G2

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 10 of 11


LOGO

 

2 August 2013

 

Page 11 of 11

Exhibit 4.30

Deed of Pledge of Shares among InterXion Holding N.V., InterXion Operational B.V. and Barclays Bank PLC dated July 2, 2013.

DEED OF PLEDGE OF SHARES

 

IN: INTERXION OPERATIONAL B.V.

 

BY: INTERXION HOLDING N.V.

 

TO: BARCLAYS BANK PLC

Today, the third day of July two thousand and thirteen, appear before me, Arnout Christiaan Stroeve, civil-law notary, practising in Amsterdam, The Netherlands:

 

1 Martine Janneke van Zijl, born in Nieuwegein on the fourth day of August nineteen hundred and eighty-six, with office address at Jachthavenweg 121, 1081 KM Amsterdam, The Netherlands, acting as proxy of, and pursuant to a power of attorney, authorised in writing by:

 

  a. INTERXION HOLDING N.V. , a public company with limited liability ( naamloze vennootschap ) incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands, having its corporate seat in Amsterdam, The Netherlands and its registered office at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands, registered with the Commercial Register under file number: 33301892 (the “ Pledgor ”);

 

  b. INTERXION OPERATIONAL B.V. , a private company with limited liability ( besloten vennootschap met beperkte aansprakelijkheid ) incorporated under the laws of The Netherlands, having its corporate seat in Amsterdam, The Netherlands and its registered office at Tupolevlaan 24, 1119 NX Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands, registered with the Commercial Register under file number: 34389232 (the “ Company ”); and

 

2 Elmar Dijkstra, born in Rotterdam on the sixth day of May nineteen hundred and eighty, with office address at Jachthavenweg 121, 1081 KM Amsterdam, The Netherlands, acting as proxy of, and pursuant to a power of attorney, authorised in writing by BARCLAYS BANK PLC , a public limited company registered in England and Wales with company number 1026167 and having its office at 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP, United Kingdom, acting (i) in its capacity of Security Trustee under the Intercreditor Agreement and (ii) in its capacity of creditor of the Parallel Obligations, as defined below (the “ Pledgee ”).

HEREBY AGREE AS FOLLOWS:

 

1 DEFINITIONS AND INTERPRETATION

 

1.1 Interpretation


Capitalised terms not otherwise defined herein shall have the meaning given to them in the Intercreditor Agreement.

 

1.2 Definitions

In addition, in this Deed, unless the context otherwise requires:

Debt Documents ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement;

Debtor ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement;

Dividends ” means all dividends, other distributions and payments that become payable and/or accrue on or in respect of any of the Shares, whether payable in cash, by means of stock dividend or in kind and whether on the account of the distribution of profits, reserves, the repurchase of Shares, the redemption of Shares or otherwise;

Encumbrance ” means any mortgage, pledge, lien ( retentierecht ), right of usufruct, seizure, attachment or other encumbrance of any kind whatsoever, whether actual or contingent, conditional or otherwise;

Enforcement Event ” means any Event of Default which also constitutes a default ( verzuim ) in the payment of any amount due under the Secured Obligations;

Event of Default ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement;

Future Shares ” means any shares in the capital of the Company that are acquired by the Pledgor following execution of this Deed;

Intercreditor Agreement ” means the intercreditor agreement dated the third day of July two thousand and thirteen (as amended, supplemented, restated or replaced from time to time) between, inter alia , Barclays Bank PLC as Revolving Agent, The Bank of New York Mellon as Original Senior Secured Trustee, the Revolving Lenders, InterXion Holding N.V. as the Company, certain companies as Original Debtors, Barclays Bank PLC as Security Trustee and others;

Liabilities ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement;

Parallel Obligations ” means the Parallel Debt as described in Clause 17.2 of the Intercreditor Agreement, to the extent they constitute obligations for the payment of money ( vorderingen tot voldoening van een geldsom );

Pledge ” means the security created or purported to be created by this Deed and/or any supplemental deed executed pursuant to Clause 2.2.3;

Present Shares ” means all of the issued shares in the capital of the Company held by the Pledgor on the date of this Deed, consisting of one hundred and eighty (180) shares, each share with a par value of one hundred euro (EUR 100), numbered 1 up to and including 180;

Principal Obligations ” means all the Liabilities and all other present and future obligations (other than the Parallel Obligations) at any time due, owing or incurred by each Debtor and by each other grantor of Transaction Security to any Secured Party under the Debt Documents for the payment of money ( vorderingen tot voldoening van een geldsom ), both actual and contingent and whether incurred solely or jointly and as principal or surety or in any other capacity;

Rights ” means the Dividends, all present and future rights and claims of the Pledgor to acquire any shares in the capital of the Company and all other present and future rights and claims of the Pledgor arising out of or in connection with the Shares, other than the Voting Rights and the rights of holders of depository receipts referred to in Clause 3.2;

Secured Obligations ” means (i) the Parallel Obligations and (ii) the Principal Obligations that are secured by this Pledge pursuant to Clause 2.4;

 

2


Secured Parties ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement;

Security Assets ” means the Shares and the Rights collectively;

Shares ” means the Present Shares and the Future Shares collectively;

Transaction Security ” has the meaning given thereto in the Intercreditor Agreement; and

Voting Rights ” means the voting rights attaching to the Shares.

 

1.3 References

In this Deed:

 

  1.3.1 references to any Debt Document shall be construed as references to such document as presently in force and as amended, modified, supplemented, novated, restated or replaced from time to time, including (i) any increase or reduction in any amount made available thereunder, (ii) any alteration of or addition to the purpose for which any amount made available thereunder may be used, (iii) any credit facility provided in substitution of or in addition to the facilities originally made available thereunder, (iv) any rescheduling of the indebtedness incurred thereunder, (v) any substitution, retirement or accession of any party to the Debt Documents or (vi) a combination of the above;

 

  1.3.2 clause headings are inserted for convenience of reference only and are to be ignored in construing this Deed and, unless otherwise specified, all references to Clauses are to clauses of this Deed;

 

  1.3.3 unless the context otherwise requires, words denoting the singular shall include the plural and vice versa ;

 

  1.3.4 references to any party include that party’s successors and permitted transferees and assignees;

 

  1.3.5 references to statutory provisions shall be construed as references to those provisions as replaced, amended or re-enacted from time to time;

 

  1.3.6 references to Security Assets include, where the context so requires, references to all or any of the constituent parts thereof;

 

  1.3.7 an Event of Default or an Enforcement Event is “continuing” if it has not been remedied or waived; and

 

  1.3.8 references to such terms as ‘this Deed’, ‘hereunder’, ‘herein’ and ‘hereby’ shall, where the context so requires, be construed as including references to any supplemental deed executed pursuant to Clause 2.2.3.

 

1.4 Debt Document

This Deed constitutes a Debt Document.

 

1.5 No unlawful financial assistance

No obligations shall be included in the definition of “Secured Obligations” to the extent that, if included, the Pledge or any part thereof would constitute a violation of the prohibition on financial assistance as contained in Section 2:98c of the Dutch Civil Code (the “ Prohibition ”) and this Deed is only legally binding on the Pledgor to the extent it will not be in violation of the Prohibition and all provisions of this Deed will be construed accordingly.

 

2 PLEDGE

 

2.1 Agreement to pledge

 

3


The Pledgor hereby agrees and undertakes with the Pledgee to grant a right of pledge over the Security Assets as security for the Secured Obligations.

 

2.2 Pledge

As security for the performance of the Secured Obligations, the Pledgor hereby:

 

  2.2.1 pledges to the Pledgee the Present Shares and the Rights pertaining thereto;

 

  2.2.2 pledges to the Pledgee in advance ( bij voorbaat ) the Future Shares and the Rights pertaining thereto; and

 

  2.2.3 irrevocably undertakes, to the extent the pledge in advance pursuant to Clause 2.2.2 is not effective, to pledge to the Pledgee any Future Shares and the Rights pertaining thereto immediately upon the acquisition of such Future Shares by the Pledgor by execution of a supplemental deed in the same form as this Deed.

 

2.3 Acceptance by the Pledgee

The Pledgee hereby accepts the Pledge created by this Deed, where appropriate in advance ( bij voorbaat ).

 

2.4 Principal Obligations as Secured Obligations

If at the time of execution of this Deed or at any time thereafter it is not possible to validly secure all or any Parallel Obligations by means of this Pledge, the corresponding Principal Obligations shall be Secured Obligations.

 

3 VOTING RIGHTS AND RIGHTS

 

3.1 Voting Rights

The Pledgor and the Pledgee hereby stipulate in accordance with Section 2:198(3) of the Dutch Civil Code that the Voting Rights shall vest in ( toekomen aan ) the Pledgee subject to the fulfillment of the conditions precedent ( opschortende voorwaarden ) that (i) an Event of Default has occurred and (ii) the Pledgee has given written notice to the Pledgor and the Company that an Event of Default has occurred and the Voting Rights vest in the Pledgee.

 

3.2 Meeting rights

As long as the Voting Rights shall not vest in the Pledgee, the Pledgee shall not have the rights of holders of depository receipts for shares which offer meeting rights ( certificaten van aandelen waaraan vergaderrecht is verbonden ). It is understood that when the Voting Rights shall vest in the Pledgee, the Pledgor shall have the rights of holders of depository receipts for shares which offer meeting rights by operation of law. To the extent possible under Dutch law, the Pledgor waives these rights in advance and the Pledgee accepts such waiver in advance.

 

3.3 Rights

The Pledgee is entitled to collect, receive and exercise the Rights that are pledged pursuant to this Deed, provided that the Pledgee hereby grants the Pledgor permission ( toestemming ) in accordance with Section 3:246(4) of the Dutch Civil Code to collect, receive and exercise the Rights. The Pledgee is entitled to revoke this permission upon the occurrence of an Event of Default which is continuing or upon the occurrence of an Enforcement Event which is continuing.

 

4 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

 

4.1 The Pledgor hereby represents and warrants to the Pledgee that:

 

  4.1.1 the Shares are duly authorised and validly issued, are fully paid up and constitute the entire issued share capital of the Company;

 

  4.1.2 the Pledgor has acquired the Present Shares by placement at the deed of incorporation of the Company, executed on the eighth day of April two thousand and ten before B.J. Kuck, civil-law notary in Amsterdam, The Netherlands;

 

4


  4.1.3 the Pledgor is the sole legal and beneficial owner of the Security Assets, has full title thereto and is entitled ( beschikkingsbevoegd ) to pledge the same to the Pledgee;

 

  4.1.4 this Pledge constitutes a first priority right of pledge ( pandrecht eerste in rang ) of the Security Assets;

 

  4.1.5 the Security Assets are not subject to any Encumbrance, have not been transferred or made subject to an Encumbrance in advance, nor has any such transfer or Encumbrance been agreed upon in advance;

 

  4.1.6 no depository receipts ( certificaten van aandelen ) have been issued in respect of the Shares;

 

  4.1.7 the Pledgor has not entered into any agreements or arrangements, other than as may be included in the articles of association of the Company, which restrict in any way the exercise by the Pledgee of the Voting Rights or its other rights under this Pledge; and

 

  4.1.8 the general meeting of the Company has approved this Pledge and the granting of the Voting Rights to the Pledgee by resolution adopted on the fourteenth day of June two thousand and thirteen,

which representations and warranties, to the extent they relate to Future Shares and the Rights pertaining thereto, shall be deemed to be given on each date such Future Shares are acquired by the Pledgor.

 

5 UNDERTAKINGS

 

5.1 The Pledgor hereby undertakes to the Pledgee:

 

  5.1.1 at the Pledgee’s first demand, to execute and deliver all such agreements and documents and to do all such acts and things the Pledgee may reasonably deem necessary to create, perfect, protect and/or enforce the rights of the Pledgee created or intended to be created hereby;

 

  5.1.2 to promptly notify the Pledgee of any attachment ( beslag ) of the Security Assets and to promptly notify the person making any such attachment or any receiver in bankruptcy ( curator ) or any administrator in (preliminary) suspension of payment ( bewindvoerder ) of the existence of the Pledge;

 

  5.1.3 other than in the ordinary course of business, not to release, settle or subordinate any Rights without the Pledgee’s prior written consent;

 

  5.1.4 other than as expressly permitted under the Debt Documents, not to sell, agree to sell or otherwise dispose of the Security Assets and not to create or grant or permit to subsist any Encumbrance on the Security Assets other than this Pledge;

 

  5.1.5 other than as expressly permitted under the Debt Documents, not to cooperate with the issue or granting of any (rights to acquire) shares in the capital of the Company or of depository receipts issued for such shares; and

 

  5.1.6

other than as expressly permitted under the Debt Documents, without the prior written approval of the Pledgee, not to exercise the Voting Rights in favour of a resolution (i) for an amendment of the articles of association of the Company which would affect the rights of the Pledgee under this Deed, (ii) to dissolve or liquidate the Company, (iii) to

 

5


  apply for the Company’s bankruptcy or (preliminary) suspension of payments, (iv) for a conversion ( omzetting ), legal merger ( juridische fusie ) or legal division ( juridische splitsing ) of the Company, (v) to issue shares or rights to acquire shares in the capital of the Company or (vi) to distribute any Dividends, unless such distribution is expressly permitted under any of the other Debt Documents.

 

6 ENFORCEMENT OF SECURITY - APPLICATION OF PROCEEDS

 

6.1 Default

Any failure to satisfy the Secured Obligations when due shall constitute a default ( verzuim ) in the performance of the Secured Obligations within the meaning of Section 6:81 of the Dutch Civil Code, without any demand ( sommatie ) or notice of default ( ingebrekestelling ) being sent or required.

 

6.2 Enforcement

On or after the occurrence of an Enforcement Event which is continuing, the Pledgee shall be entitled to enforce the Pledge and to take recourse against the proceeds thereof.

 

6.3 No requirement to claim from other person

To the fullest extent possible under applicable law, the Pledgor waives any right it may have of first requiring the Pledgee to proceed against or claim payment from any Debtor or any other person or to enforce any other rights or security before enforcing the Pledge as set forth in Section 3:234 of the Dutch Civil Code.

 

6.4 No notice required

The Pledgee is not obliged to give notice to the Pledgor, any Debtor or any other person of any intended or actual sale of the Security Assets as provided for in Sections 3:249 and 3:252 of the Dutch Civil Code.

 

6.5 No sale in different manner

The Pledgor is not entitled to request the court to determine that the Security Assets be sold in a different manner than as set forth in Section 3:250 of the Dutch Civil Code.

 

6.6 Application

Any amount received or recovered by the Pledgee under this Deed shall be applied by the Pledgee in accordance with the terms of the Intercreditor Agreement, subject to the mandatory provisions of Dutch law.

 

7 CONTINUING SECURITY

 

7.1 Continuing security

The Pledge and the other rights of the Pledgee under this Deed shall, to the maximum extent possible under Dutch law, not be adversely affected by (i) any compromise with or discharge granted to any Debtor or any other person or (ii) any invalidity, illegality, unenforceability or discharge by operation of law of the liability or obligations of any Debtor or any other person or any security granted in connection with the Secured Obligations.

 

7.2 Discharge conditional

Where any discharge of the Secured Obligations or any arrangement is made in whole or in part on the faith of any payment, security or other disposition which is void, avoided or otherwise set aside or must be restored on insolvency, liquidation or otherwise, the Pledge and the liability and obligations of the Pledgor under this Deed shall continue as if such discharge or arrangement had not occurred.

 

6


8 POWER OF ATTORNEY

 

8.1 Power of attorney

The Pledgor, for the benefit of the Pledgee ( in het belang van de gevolmachtigde ), hereby grants an irrevocable power of attorney to the Pledgee (the “ Power of Attorney ”), with full right of substitution, to execute all documents and to do all things on its behalf and/or in the name of the Pledgor as the Pledgee or any substitute shall reasonably deem necessary to give the Pledgee the full benefit of the Pledge and the other rights purported to be granted to the Pledgee under this Deed (including, without limitation the execution of supplemental deeds under Clause 2.2.3). The Power of Attorney shall extend to the exercise of ancillary rights ( nevenrechten ) to the Security Assets and to documents and acts to which the Pledgee itself is the counterparty ( Selbsteintritt ).

 

8.2 Use of Power of Attorney

The Pledgee will not use the Power of Attorney unless and until (i) the occurrence of an Enforcement Event which is continuing or (ii) the Pledgor has failed, after notice of the Pledgee, to comply with its obligations under Clause 2.2.3 or Clause 5.1.1.

 

9 MISCELLANEOUS

 

9.1 Rescission

To the fullest extent permitted by Dutch law, the Pledgor hereby waives its rights to rescind or to seek to rescind ( ontbinden ) this Deed or to avoid or to seek to avoid ( vernietigen ) the legal acts ( rechtshandelingen ) performed under or pursuant to this Deed. The Pledgee accepts this waiver.

 

9.2 Invalidity

Should any provision of this Deed be or become invalid, void or unenforceable, all remaining provisions and terms hereof shall remain in full force and effect and the parties hereto will negotiate in good faith to replace the invalid, void or unenforceable provision with a valid and enforceable provision that reflects as nearly as possible the intention of the parties as referred in the provision thus replaced.

 

9.3 Liability

The Pledgee shall not be liable for any damages resulting from the reduction of value of the Security Assets, the sale of the Security Assets or the exercise or failure to exercise any of its rights hereunder, save for gross negligence ( grove nalatigheid ) or wilful misconduct ( opzet ).

 

9.4 No implied waivers

A failure to exercise or a delay in exercising any right of the Pledgee hereunder shall not operate as a waiver or constitute a forfeiture ( rechtsverwerking ) thereof.

 

10 ASSIGNMENT AND TRANSFER

 

10.1 No assignment by Pledgor

The Pledgor may not assign and/or transfer all or part of its rights, obligations and/or the legal relationship under this Deed, without the prior written consent of the Pledgee.

 

10.2 Assignment by Pledgee

The Pledgee may assign and/or transfer to any party to which or to whom the Pledgee is permitted to do so under the Debt Documents, all or part of its rights, obligations and/or the legal relationship under this Deed by way of an assignment of claims ( cessie ), transfer of obligations ( schuldoverneming ) or transfer of contract ( contractoverneming ) and the Pledgor hereby irrevocably gives its approval and cooperates in advance with such transfer of obligations or contract in accordance with Sections 6:156 and 6:159 of the Dutch Civil Code.

 

7


11 NOTICES

All notices to the parties hereto to be made in connection with this Deed, shall be made in accordance with the notice provisions of the Intercreditor Agreement.

 

12 TERMINATION AND RELEASE

 

12.1 Termination

The Pledgee is entitled by way of a written notice to the Pledgor (i) to terminate ( opzeggen ) the Pledge in whole or in part in accordance with Section 3:81 (2) of the Dutch Civil Code and (ii) to release the Pledge in respect of all or part of the Security Assets and/or the Secured Obligations. If a waiver ( afstand van recht ) by the Pledgee is required, to give effect to such a release, such release shall be deemed to include such waiver, and such waiver is hereby accepted by the Pledgor in advance.

 

12.2 Release

Subject and without prejudice to Clause 7.2, once the Pledgee is satisfied that the Secured Obligations have been unconditionally and irrevocably paid and discharged in full and that all Debt Documents (other than the Security Documents) have been unconditionally and irrevocably terminated, the Pledgee will, following a written request of the Pledgor, terminate and release the Pledge and do all such further acts and things as the Pledgor may reasonably request in relation to the termination of the Pledge.

 

13 THE COMPANY

The Company hereby:

 

  13.1.1 acknowledges, where appropriate in advance, the rights of pledge created over the Security Assets;

 

  13.1.2 acknowledges that it has received notice of the rights of pledge created over the Rights; and

 

  13.1.3 undertakes to register the rights of pledge over the Shares in the Company’s shareholders’ register and to provide the Pledgee with a copy of such registration as soon as practically possible.

 

14 APPLICABLE LAW AND JURISDICTION

 

14.1 Applicable law

This Deed is governed by and shall be construed in accordance with Dutch law.

 

14.2 Jurisdiction

The Pledgor hereby irrevocably submits to the jurisdiction of the competent court in Amsterdam, The Netherlands in connection with any disputes arising under this Deed, without prejudice to the right of the Pledgee to take proceedings in any other competent court in The Netherlands or any other jurisdiction, whether concurrently or not.

CIVIL LAW NOTARY

The parties to this Deed are aware that the undersigned civil law notary works with Van Doorne N.V., the firm that has advised the Pledgee in this transaction. With reference to the Code of Conduct (“ Verordening beroeps- en gedragsregels ”) established by the Royal Notarial Professional Organisation (“ Koninklijke Notariële Beroepsorganisatie ”), the parties hereby explicitly consent to the undersigned civil law notary executing this Deed.

 

8


Final statement

The originals or copies of the powers of attorney given to the said individuals and a copy of the resolution of the general meeting of the Company as mentioned in Clause 4 will be attached to this deed.

The appearers are known to me, civil-law notary.

This Deed is executed in Amsterdam on the date mentioned in the heading of this Deed. After the substance of this Deed and an explanation thereon have been stated to the appearers, the appearers have declared to have taken notice of the contents of this Deed and to consent thereto. Immediately after those parts of the Deed that the law requires to be read out have been read out, this Deed is signed by the appearers and by me, civil-law notary.

 

9

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATIONS

I, David Ruberg, certify that:

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

/s/ David C. Ruberg

David C. Ruberg

Chief Executive Officer

Date: April 8, 2014

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATIONS

I, Josh Joshi, certify that

 

1. I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.;

 

2. Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

3. Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

4. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  (a) Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  (b) Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  (c) Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  (d) Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

5. The company’s other certifying officer(s) and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  (a) All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and

 

  (b) Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

/s/ Josh Joshi

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

Chief Financial Officer

Date: April 8, 2014

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

/s/ David C. Ruberg

David C. Ruberg

Chief Executive Officer

Date: April 8, 2014

Exhibit 13.2

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

In connection with the annual report on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V. (the “Company”) for the fiscal year ended December 31, 2013 as filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on the date hereof (the “Report”), the undersigned officer of the Company hereby certifies to the undersigned’s knowledge, pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (18 U.S.C. Section 1350), that:

 

1. The Report fully complies with the requirements of section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

2. The information contained in the Report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of the Company.

/s/ Josh Joshi

M.V. “Josh” Joshi

Chief Financial Officer

Date: April 8, 2014

Exhibit 15.1

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

To: the Board of Directors of InterXion Holding N.V.:

We consent to incorporation by reference in the registration statement (No. 333-175099) on Form S-8 of InterXion Holding N.V. of our reports dated April 8, 2014 with respect to the consolidated statements of financial position of InterXion Holding N.V. and subsidiaries as of December 31, 2013, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated income statements and, consolidated statements of comprehensive income, shareholders’ equity and cash flows for each of the years in the three-year period ended December 31, 2013, and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of December 31, 2013, which reports appear in the December 31, 2013 Financial Statements on Form 20-F of InterXion Holding N.V.

/s/ KPMG Accountants N.V.

Rotterdam, The Netherlands

April 8, 2014